JP7289804B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine capable of playing games.

In a pachinko game machine, which is an example of a game machine, a storage unit capable of storing game media supplied from a game island installed in a game hall, a payout device (payout unit) capable of paying out game media, and a guide passage forming portion that forms a guide passage for guiding the game media supplied to the storage portion to the payout portion, and the storage portion and the guide passage forming portion are attached to the game frame by screw members. (See Patent Document 1, for example).

JP-A-2003-96050

In the game machine described in Patent Document 1, the screw member for attaching the storage portion and the guide passage forming portion to the game frame and the screw member attached to the inside of the game island are disengaged, and the storage portion and the guide passage forming portion are disengaged. If the game medium falls into the part, the screw member will be mixed into the payout device together with the game medium, and the game medium will not be paid out normally, or the payout device will break down, or the screw member will fall into the player together with the game medium. There was a problem that it may be paid out to

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of preventing a screw member from entering a payout portion.

The game machine of means A is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display to display a display result and is controllable to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) for a player,
Start area (special figure 1 start prize mouth, special figure 2 start prize mouth, etc.),
display means (the image display device 5 is, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence));
a specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect (pseudo-continuous effect) of performing a variable display again after executing a predetermined effect after starting the variable display;
A notification effect executing means capable of executing a notification effect (effect display, etc.) for notifying that the specific effect has been executed;
a suggestive effect executing means capable of executing a suggestive effect (concentrated lines, etc.) suggesting that the specific effect is to be executed;
a storage section capable of storing game media (for example, a sphere tank forming section 201);
a payout unit (e.g., payout device 200) capable of paying out game media;
a guide passage forming portion (for example, a first guide passage or a second guide passage) having an open upper surface and forming a guide passage for guiding the game media in the storage portion to the payout portion;
a prevention member (340 in FIG. 16) for preventing the game medium from flowing down the guide passage forming portion;
a screw drop limiting portion (for example, first cover body 310, second cover body 320, and third cover body 330) provided so as to partially cover the upper surface of the guide passage forming portion;
with
A game can be played using the game medium paid out from the payout unit, and the specific effect can be executed based on the game medium entering the start area,
The guiding passage forming portion is composed of a first guiding passage forming portion and a second guiding passage forming portion (for example, a first guiding passage or a second guiding passage) different from the first guiding passage forming portion,
The prevention member can prevent the game medium from flowing down by entering the first guide passage forming portion,
The notification effect is a effect of displaying a notification image (effect display, etc.) for notifying that the specific effect has been executed on the display means,
The suggestive effect executing means displays a specific image (concentrated line) suggesting that the specific effect is to be executed on the display means, and changes the display mode of the specific image to improve the visibility of the specific effect. It is possible to execute the suggestion effect to lower,
The screw drop-limiting portion prevents game media that have fallen on the screw drop-limiting portion from accumulating and the screw member that has dropped on the screw drop-limiting portion to fall to the guide passage forming portion. It is configured to be able to stay on the restriction part,
It is characterized by
The game machine of means 1 is
A plurality of types of performance identification information (for example, decorative patterns) including specific performance identification information (for example, pseudo consecutive patterns) are variably displayed to derive and display the display results, and an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game) that is advantageous to the player. state) controllable gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1),
a storage section (eg, ball tank forming section 201) capable of storing game media (eg, game ball P);
a payout unit (e.g., payout device 200) capable of paying out game media;
A guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202) that has an open upper surface and forms a guide passage (for example, a first guide passage or a second guide passage) that guides game media in the storage portion to the payout portion. and second guide passage forming portion 204),
a cover part (eg, first cover body 310, second cover body 320, third cover body 330) provided to cover a part of the upper surface of the guide passage forming part;
with
A predetermined limiting portion (for example, long hole 316A 316C, recessed grooves 326A to 326C, recessed portion 336) are provided (see FIGS. 22 and 24),
A plurality of specific restricting portions (for example, holes 271A to 271H) are provided in the guiding passage forming portion for restricting the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the guiding passage forming portion to the dispensing portion (see FIG. 11). , FIGS. 12 and 27),
The predetermined restricting portions (for example, long holes 316A to 316C, grooves 326A to 326C, and recess 336) are provided so that game media that have fallen on the cover portion can fall from the cover portion without staying there. ,
moreover,
As the variable display, a specific effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous a specific effect executing means (for example, a part in which the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 40) capable of executing the effect);
Suggestive effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120 that can execute a suggestive effect suggesting that the specific effect identification information will temporarily stop (for example, temporary stop suggestive effect) executes the effect process during variable display shown in FIG. part) and
A notification effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that can execute a notification effect (for example, a temporary stop notification effect) for notifying that the specific effect identification information has temporarily stopped executes the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. part) and
with
The suggestive effect executing means temporarily lowers the visibility of the effect identification information different from the specific effect identification information to a first low visibility state by displaying an effect display as the suggestive effect, and then the first low visibility state. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 41-33 and 41-34, in the image display device 5, the concentration lines are reduced to the density D1. After lowering the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns by displaying the central lines with a density of D2, the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is further reduced),
The notification effect execution means is capable of executing, as the notification effect, an effect in which effect identification information different from the specific effect identification information is made invisible (for example, as shown in FIGS. 41-34 and 41-35 , a portion where the left and right decoration patterns are rendered invisible by displaying the effect image for notifying the temporary stop in the entire display area of the image display device 5),
The suggestive effect executing means is capable of executing the suggestive effect even when the specific effect identification information does not temporarily stop, and when the temporary stop does not occur, the effect display is performed for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing. Continuous display is possible (for example, as shown in FIGS. 41 to 44, if the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed and the pseudo continuous symbols are not temporarily stopped, after the pseudo continuous symbols are hidden on the image display device 5 also the part where the saturated lines are continuously displayed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen on the cover portion from falling into the guide passage forming portion.

The game machine of means 2 is
A game machine (e.g., pachinko game) capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of performance identification information (e.g., decoration patterns) to derive and display display results, and control to an advantageous state (e.g., jackpot game state) for the player. machine 1),
a storage section (eg, ball tank forming section 201) capable of storing game media (eg, game ball P);
a payout unit (for example, payout device 200) capable of paying out game media;
A guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202) that has an open upper surface and forms a guide passage (for example, a first guide passage or a second guide passage) that guides game media in the storage portion to the payout portion. and second guide passage forming portion 204),
a cover part (eg, first cover body 310, second cover body 320, third cover body 330) provided to cover a part of the upper surface of the guide passage forming part;
with
A predetermined limiting portion (for example, long hole 316A 316C, recessed grooves 326A to 326C, recessed portion 336) are provided (see FIGS. 22 and 24),
A plurality of specific restricting portions (for example, holes 271A to 271H) are provided in the guiding passage forming portion for restricting the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the guiding passage forming portion to the dispensing portion (see FIG. 11). , FIGS. 12 and 27),
The predetermined restricting portions (for example, long holes 316A to 316C, grooves 326A to 326C, and recess 336) are provided so that game media that have fallen on the cover portion can fall from the cover portion without staying there. ,
moreover,
As the variable display, special identification information (for example, pseudo-continuous pattern) different from the effect identification information is temporarily stopped at a predetermined timing from when the variable display of the effect identification information is started until the display result is derived and displayed. a specific effect execution means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect process during variable display shown in FIG. 40) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous effect) for restarting the variable display later;
Suggestive effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that can execute a suggestive effect suggesting that the special identification information will temporarily stop (for example, a temporary stop suggestive effect) executes the effect process during variable display shown in FIG. part) and
A notification effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that can execute a notification effect (for example, a temporary stop notification effect) for notifying that the special identification information has temporarily stopped executes the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. part) and
with
The suggestive effect executing means temporarily lowers the visibility of the effect identification information to a first low visibility state by displaying an effect display as the suggestive effect, and then increases the visibility further than the first low visibility state. It is possible to execute an effect that lowers to a low second low visibility state (for example, as shown in FIGS. After reducing the visibility of the decoration pattern, the visibility of the left and right decoration patterns is further reduced by displaying the concentrated lines with a density of D2),
The notification effect execution means can execute an effect that makes the effect identification information invisible as the notification effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 41-34 and 41-35, an effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5 to make the left and right decorative patterns invisible),
The suggestive effect executing means is capable of executing the suggestive effect even when the special identification information does not temporarily stop, and when the temporary stop does not occur, the effect display is continued for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 41 to 44, if the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed and the pseudo continuous symbols are not temporarily stopped, even after the pseudo continuous symbols are hidden on the image display device 5 The part where the saturated lines are continuously displayed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen on the cover portion from falling into the guide passage forming portion. Moreover, it is possible to prevent the threaded member that has entered the guide passage forming portion from entering the delivery portion. In addition, since the game medium does not stay in the predetermined restricting portion and the screw member can be kept in a state where it can always stay, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen on the cover portion from falling into the guide passage forming portion. can do. In addition, it is possible to increase the expectation of the player for the temporary stop by the suggestive effect, and it is possible to increase the excitement of the temporary stop by executing the notification effect, and when the temporary stop is not performed, To make it easier for a player to recognize that a temporary stop was not made and to relieve the player's disappointment due to the fact that the temporary stop was not made by continuously displaying the effect display even after the predetermined timing of the temporary stop. Since it becomes possible to do so, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described later include inventions related to gaming machines of means 3 and 4 below. Conventionally, in a gaming machine, it is possible to execute variable display of decorative symbols (effect identification information) as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-131876, and pseudo-continuous symbols during the variable display of the decorative symbols. There was a pseudo-continuous effect (specific effect) including temporary stop of (specific effect identification information) and re-variable display. However, in such a gaming machine, no effect is executed when the pseudo-continuous symbols are temporarily stopped. There is a problem that the player's sense of exhilaration cannot be enhanced in response to the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbols. There is a demand for the provision of gaming machines that can

The game machine of means 3 is
A plurality of types of performance identification information (for example, decorative patterns) including specific performance identification information (for example, pseudo consecutive patterns) are variably displayed to derive and display the display results, and an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game) that is advantageous to the player. state) controllable gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1),
As the variable display, a specific effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous a specific effect executing means (for example, a part in which the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 40) capable of executing the effect);
Suggestive effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120 that can execute a suggestive effect suggesting that the specific effect identification information will temporarily stop (for example, temporary stop suggestive effect) executes the effect process during variable display shown in FIG. part) and
A notification effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that can execute a notification effect (for example, a temporary stop notification effect) for notifying that the specific effect identification information has temporarily stopped executes the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. part) and
with
The suggestive effect executing means temporarily lowers the visibility of the effect identification information different from the specific effect identification information to a first low visibility state by displaying an effect display as the suggestive effect, and then the first low visibility state. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 41-33 and 41-34, in the image display device 5, the concentration lines are reduced to the density D1. After lowering the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns by displaying the central lines with a density of D2, the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is further reduced),
The notification effect execution means is capable of executing, as the notification effect, an effect in which effect identification information different from the specific effect identification information is made invisible (for example, as shown in FIGS. 41-34 and 41-35 , a portion where the left and right decoration patterns are rendered invisible by displaying the effect image for notifying the temporary stop in the entire display area of the image display device 5),
The suggestive effect executing means is capable of executing the suggestive effect even when the specific effect identification information does not temporarily stop, and when the temporary stop does not occur, the effect display is performed for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing. Continuous display is possible (for example, as shown in FIGS. 41 to 44, if the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed and the pseudo continuous symbols are not temporarily stopped, after the pseudo continuous symbols are hidden on the image display device 5 also the part where the saturated lines are continuously displayed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the temporary stop by the suggestive effect, and to increase the excitement of the temporary stop by executing the notification effect, and to increase the temporary stop. If not, the effect display is continuously displayed even after the predetermined timing of the temporary stop, thereby making it easier for the player to recognize that the temporary stop was not made and the player's disappointment at the fact that the temporary stop was not made. Since the feeling can be softened, the amusement of the game can be improved.

The game machine of means 4 is
A game machine (e.g., pachinko game) capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of performance identification information (e.g., decoration patterns) to derive and display display results, and control to an advantageous state (e.g., jackpot game state) for the player. machine 1),
As the variable display, special identification information (for example, pseudo-continuous pattern) different from the effect identification information is temporarily stopped at a predetermined timing from when the variable display of the effect identification information is started until the display result is derived and displayed. a specific effect execution means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect process during variable display shown in FIG. 40) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous effect) for restarting the variable display later;
Suggestive effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that can execute a suggestive effect suggesting that the special identification information will temporarily stop (for example, a temporary stop suggestive effect) executes the effect process during variable display shown in FIG. part) and
A notification effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that can execute a notification effect (for example, a temporary stop notification effect) for notifying that the special identification information has temporarily stopped executes the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. part) and
with
The suggestive effect executing means temporarily lowers the visibility of the effect identification information to a first low visibility state by displaying an effect display as the suggestive effect, and then increases the visibility further than the first low visibility state. It is possible to execute an effect that lowers to a low second low visibility state (for example, as shown in FIGS. After reducing the visibility of the decoration pattern, the visibility of the left and right decoration patterns is further reduced by displaying the concentrated lines with a density of D2),
The notification effect execution means can execute an effect that makes the effect identification information invisible as the notification effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 41-34 and 41-35, an effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5 to make the left and right decorative patterns invisible),
The suggestive effect executing means is capable of executing the suggestive effect even when the special identification information does not temporarily stop, and when the temporary stop does not occur, the effect display is continued for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 41 to 44, if the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed and the pseudo continuous symbols are not temporarily stopped, even after the pseudo continuous symbols are hidden on the image display device 5 The part where the saturated lines are continuously displayed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the temporary stop by the suggestive effect, and to increase the excitement of the temporary stop by executing the notification effect, and to increase the temporary stop. If not, the effect display is continuously displayed even after the predetermined timing of the temporary stop, thereby making it easier for the player to recognize that the temporary stop was not made and the player's disappointment at the fact that the temporary stop was not made. Since the feeling can be softened, the amusement of the game can be improved.

The present invention may include only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may include the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention together with the matters specifying the invention other than the matters specifying the invention. It may have.

It is a front view showing a pachinko game machine. It is a block diagram showing the configuration of the pachinko game machine. It is a rear view showing a pachinko game machine. It is a left side view showing the pachinko game machine. FIG. 4 is a plan view showing a frame for a game machine to which a game board is attached; It is a perspective view showing a state in which the pachinko game machine is seen from diagonally behind. It is a perspective view showing a state in which the game board is removed from the game machine frame. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view showing a mounting structure of the passage forming body to the game machine frame; It is an enlarged rear view showing the rear upper part of the frame for gaming machines. (A) is a plan view showing the first passage forming body, and (B) is a rear view showing the first passage forming body. (A) is a sectional view taken along line AA of FIG. 10A, (B) is a sectional view taken along line BB of FIG. 10A, and (C) is a sectional view taken along line CC of FIG. 10A. (A) is a plan view showing a first guide passage forming portion, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD of (A). (A) is a plan view showing the first cover body, (B) is an EE cross-sectional view of (A), and (C) is an FF cross-sectional view of (A). (A) is a plan view showing the second cover body, (B) is a GG sectional view of (A), and (C) is a HH sectional view of (A). (A) is a plan view showing the third cover body, (B) is a cross-sectional view along II of (A), (C) is a cross-sectional view along JJ of (A), and (D) is a third cover body. and (E) is a perspective view showing a ball stopper member. (A) is a vertical cross-sectional view showing the first guide passage forming portion showing the state in which the ball stopper member is in the first state, and (B) is a first guide passage forming portion showing the state in which the ball stopper member is in the second state. It is a vertical cross-sectional view showing the. (A) is a perspective view showing a board mounting frame to which a terminal board is mounted, (B) is a KK section of (A), and (C) is a LL section of (B). It is the perspective view which shows the state which looked at the circumference|surroundings of the ball|bowl tank part in the back surface of the game frame from diagonally behind. (A) is a plan view showing the periphery of the ball tank portion on the back of the game frame, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line MM of (A). It is the perspective view which shows the state which looked at the periphery of the 1st guide passage formation part in the back surface of a game frame from diagonally behind. It is a top view which shows the periphery of the 1st guide passage formation part in the back surface of a game frame. 21. (A) is a sectional view taken along line NN of FIG. 21, (B) is a view showing a rotating state of the screw member, and (C) is a sectional view taken along line OO of FIG. (A) is a cross-sectional view along PP in FIG. 21, and (B) is a cross-sectional view along QQ in FIG. FIG. 22 is a cross-sectional view taken along line RR of FIG. 21; FIG. 22 is a cross-sectional view taken along line SS of FIG. 21; (A) is the retention state of the screw member when the ball stopper is in the first state, (B) is a TT sectional view of (A), and (C) is the ball stopper when the ball stopper is in the second state. FIG. 10D is a UU cross-sectional view of FIG. 1C, showing a retained state of the screw member; It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the first guide passage forming portion showing the movement of the screw member. It is a vertical cross-sectional view of the first guide path forming portion showing the movement state of the game ball on the cover portion. (A) is a schematic rear view showing a cover portion as a modification, and (B) is a schematic rear view showing a state in which cables are wired so as to cross the cover portion. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the gaming machine in the characteristic part 053SG. It is a figure which shows the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the soldering surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the mounting surface of the state by which the input circuit and the output circuit were mounted in the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the structure of the data bus formed in the soldering surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the wiring pattern branched from the data bus in the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the structure of the ground area|region formed in the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the structure of the ground area|region formed in the soldering surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a circuit diagram showing a connection mode of low-voltage components and high-voltage components mounted on the game control board in the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structure of the connector mounted in the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a diagram showing a wiring pattern around the connector formed on the solder surface of the game control board in the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows the state where the game control board in Example 1 was accommodated in the board case. It is a circuit diagram related to the supply of backup power to the game control microcomputer mounted on the game control board in the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows the wiring pattern for the power supply formed in the soldering surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the wiring pattern formed in the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1, and the wiring pattern for power supply formed in the soldering surface. It is a figure which shows an example of the situation where the game control board in Example 1 was attached to the game machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the situation where the game control board in Example 1 was attached to the game machine. It is a figure which shows the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 2. FIG. It is a figure which shows the soldering surface of the game control board in Example 2. FIG. It is a figure which shows the wiring pattern formed in connection with the connection of the microcomputer for game control, an input circuit, and an output circuit in the soldering surface of the game control board in Example 2. FIG. It is a figure which shows the wiring pattern formed in connection with the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 2 in connection with the microcomputer for game control, an input circuit, and an output circuit. It is a circuit diagram related to the connection between the game control microcomputer and the input circuit and the output circuit in the game control board in the second embodiment. It is a perspective view showing the structure of the specific electronic component mounted on the game control board in Example 3, (A) is a perspective view from above the specific electronic component, (B) is a lower side of the specific electronic component 1 is a perspective view from . It is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which a specific electronic component is soldered to the game control board in Example 3. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a jackpot in the variable display of the 1st special figure in a normal state or a time saving state, and the numerical range of loss with a time saving. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows operation|movement of a 2nd movable body. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of image data that constitutes display on an image display device; FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of image data that constitutes display on an image display device; (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating an effect control command. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number; (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 1, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 2. FIG. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between variable display results and variation patterns; (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration example of an effect control data holding area, and (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a reception command buffer at the time of start winning. It is a flow chart which shows an example of start winning a prize judging processing. (A) is a flow chart showing an example of a winning random number value determination process, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of a variable category command. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design stop processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of big hit end processing. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of command analysis processing; It is a part of the flowchart which shows an example of production|presentation control process processing. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of pre-reading notice setting processing; (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display pattern determination ratio for pending storage of a big hit, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of a display pattern determination ratio for pending storage of a loss. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing; FIG. 11 is a timing chart of variable display for executing pseudo-continuous effects; FIG. FIG. 11 is a timing chart of variable display for executing pseudo-continuous effects; FIG. FIG. 11 is a timing chart of variable display for executing pseudo-continuous effects; FIG. FIG. 11 is a timing chart of variable display for executing pseudo-continuous effects; FIG. FIG. 11 is a timing chart of variable display for executing pseudo-continuous effects; FIG. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of each effect period and effect contents in the pseudo-continuous effect; (A) is a flow chart showing an example of an announcement effect determination process (for execution of a pseudo-continuous effect), and (B) is a diagram showing whether or not the announcement effect is executed and the decision ratio of the announcement effect to be executed. (A) is a flow chart showing an example of the announcement effect determination process (for non-execution of the pseudo-continuous effect), and (B) is a diagram showing whether or not the announcement effect is executed and the decision ratio of the announcement effect to be executed. (A) is a diagram showing a special temporary stop notification effect execution determination ratio, and (B) is a diagram showing a temporary stop notification effect period determination ratio. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an output mode of sound output from a speaker; FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a display mode of each image during a temporary stop suggestion effect period when the pseudo consecutive symbols are not stopped; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display mode of each image during a temporary stop suggestion effect period when the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image display device in variable display that executes a pseudo-continuous effect; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image display device in variable display that executes a pseudo-continuous effect; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image display device in variable display that executes a pseudo-continuous effect; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image display device in variable display that executes a pseudo-continuous effect; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image display device in variable display that executes a pseudo-continuous effect; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image display device in variable display that executes a pseudo-continuous effect; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image display device in variable display that executes a pseudo-continuous effect; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image display device in variable display that executes a pseudo-continuous effect; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image display device in variable display that executes a pseudo-continuous effect; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image display device in variable display that executes a pseudo-continuous effect; It is explanatory drawing of the change of the visibility of the decoration design on either side in the temporary stop suggestion production|presentation period and the temporary stop notification production|presentation period. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image display device in variable display that executes a pseudo-continuous effect; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image display device in variable display that executes a pseudo-continuous effect; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image display device in a variable display that executes a pseudo-continuous effect in a modified example; FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of image data that constitutes display on an image display device; FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of image data that constitutes display on an image display device; FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of image data that constitutes display on an image display device; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image display device in variable display that executes a pseudo-continuous effect; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of image data forming a display in an image display device in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image display device in a variable display that executes a pseudo-continuous effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image display device in a variable display that executes a pseudo-continuous effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image display device in a variable display that executes a pseudo-continuous effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image display device in a variable display that executes a pseudo-continuous effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the transparency of a saturated line and an effect image in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image display device in a variable display that executes a pseudo-continuous effect in a modified example;

A mode for carrying out the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

(form)
The game machine of form 1 is
a storage section (eg, ball tank forming section 201) capable of storing game media (eg, game ball P);
a payout unit (for example, payout device 200) capable of paying out game media;
A guide passage forming portion (for example, a first guide passage forming portion 202) that has an open top surface and forms a guide passage (for example, a first guide passage or a second guide passage) that guides game media in the storage portion to the payout portion. and second guide passage forming portion 204),
It is characterized by having

The gaming machine of form 2 is the gaming machine according to form 1,
A cover portion (for example, the cover portion 314 of the first cover body 310, the cover portion 324 of the second cover body 320, the cover portion of the third cover body 330) provided to partially cover the upper surface of the guide passage forming portion 334),
The cover restricts screw members (for example, screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16) dropped on the cover from falling to the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202). Predetermined restricting portions (for example, long holes 316A to 316C, grooves 326A to 326C, and recesses 336) are provided (see FIGS. 22 and 24).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen on the cover portion from falling into the guide passage forming portion.

The gaming machine of form 3 is the gaming machine according to form 2,
The predetermined restricting portions (for example, long holes 316A to 316C, grooves 326A to 326C, recess 336) are provided so that game media that have fallen on the cover portion can fall from the cover portion without staying there. It is characterized by
According to this feature, the game medium does not stay in the predetermined restricting portion, and a state in which the screw member can always stay can be maintained. can be prevented.

The gaming machine of form 4 is the gaming machine according to form 2 or 3,
The predetermined restricting portion has a first retention portion (eg, long hole 316A) capable of retaining the screw members (eg, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) dropped on the cover portion. ~ 316C) and a second retention portion (eg, grooves 326A to 326C),
The second retention section is provided at a position closer to the dispensing section (for example, dispensing device 200) than the first retention section, and is larger than the first retention section (L22B>L21).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the screw member is more likely to be retained in the retaining portion as the dispensing portion is approached, so that it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen on the cover portion from moving and falling into the guide passage forming portion.

The gaming machine of form 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 4,
The dispensing portion (eg, dispensing device) of the screw members (eg, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) dropped into the guiding passage forming portion (eg, the first guiding passage forming portion 202) 200) are provided with a plurality of specific restriction portions (for example, holes 271A to 271H) (see FIGS. 12 and 27).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has entered the guide passage forming portion from entering the delivery portion.

The gaming machine of form 6 is the gaming machine according to form 5,
The specific restriction portion is a plurality of holes (for example, holes 271A to 271H),
At least two or more of the plurality of holes have a size that allows the screw member mixed in the guide passage forming portion to drop outside the guide passage forming portion before reaching the dispensing portion. have (L11>L2, see FIG. 11)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if a screw member is mixed in the guide passage forming portion, it can be dropped out of the guide passage forming portion from the hole. can be prevented. In addition, it is possible to prevent the screw member from entering the guide passage forming portion from obstructing the flow of the game medium.

The gaming machine of form 7 is the gaming machine according to form 6,
The plurality of holes have different sizes,
A predetermined largest hole among the plurality of holes is provided at a position closest to the dispensing portion (for example, the lateral dimension L12 of the hole 271H is larger than the lateral dimension of the other holes 271A to 271G. See Figure 12)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the screw member can be suitably dropped from the predetermined hole to the outside of the guide passage forming portion, so that the screw member dropped into the guide passage forming portion can be prevented from being mixed into the dispensing portion. .

The gaming machine of form 8 is the gaming machine according to form 6 or 7,
The cover portion (eg, the cover portion 314 of the first cover body 310, the cover portion 324 of the second cover body 320, the third cover body 330, and the cover portion (eg, the cover portion 314 of the first cover body 310, the third cover body 330 There is an uncovered area (e.g., uncovered area 350) that is not covered by the cover portion 334 of
At least some of the plurality of specific restricting portions (for example, holes 271B to 271H) are provided at positions corresponding to the uncovered regions in the guide passage forming portion (see FIG. 27).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if the screw member enters the guide passage-forming portion from the uncoated region, it can be dropped out of the guide passage-forming portion through the hole.

The gaming machine of form 9 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 8,
A game frame (for example, a game machine frame 3) provided with the storage portion (for example, a ball tank forming portion 201),
The reservoir is
Arranged on the upper surface side of a predetermined portion (for example, the first projecting portion 224) of the game frame,
It is close to or in contact with the upper surface of the predetermined portion so that the screw member does not enter between it and the upper surface of the predetermined portion (L30<L1, see FIG. 19B).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member from entering between the predetermined portion of the game frame and the storage portion and damaging the member.

The gaming machine of form 10 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 9,
A first board (e.g., main board 11, effect control board 12, etc.) attached to a lower position than the guide path forming portion (e.g., first guide path forming portion 202);
a second substrate (for example, a terminal substrate 210) attached at a position above the guide passage forming portion;
with
The first board is mounted by a mounting method using screw members, while the second board is mounted by a mounting method different from the mounting method using screw members (for example, the board cases 11A and 12A are mounted using screw members). The terminal board 210 is attached to the board mounting frame 211 by using locking means consisting of a plurality of restricting portions 235 and locking portions 236 as mounting means different from the screw members. See Figure 17)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the delivery portion.

The gaming machine of form 11 is the gaming machine according to form 10,
The second board is an external output board (e.g., terminal board 210) to which a wiring (e.g., cable C) for outputting a predetermined signal to the outside of the gaming machine is connected,
The first substrate has a smaller number of wirings to be connected than the external output substrate (for example, the plurality of connection holes 231 of the terminal substrate 210 as the first substrate provided above the first guide path forming portion 202). While the number of cables C that can be connected to is set to the first number (for example, 20), the second Each signal line is also connected to the substrate, but the second number (for example, 10) is smaller than the first number.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the second board, which has a large number of wires to be connected and is likely to be subjected to external force during the wiring connection work, cannot be attached with the screw member. It is possible to prevent it from falling into the guide passage forming portion.

The gaming machine of form 12 is the gaming machine according to form 10 or 11,
a game frame (for example, the game machine frame 3) provided with the storage portion (for example, the ball tank forming portion 201);
a mounting frame (for example, a board mounting frame 211) for mounting the external output board to the game frame;
with
The mounting frame is characterized by having a mounting frame restricting portion (for example, recessed portion 242) for restricting the movement of the screw member dropped onto the mounting frame to the guide passage forming portion.
According to this feature, the attachment frame of the external output board can be used to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from entering the dispensing portion.

The gaming machine of form 13 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 12,
The guide passages of the screw members (for example, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) moved toward the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202) around the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202) Special restricting portions (for example, recessed portions 280, 290, 214, 242, 243) are provided to restrict dropping into the forming portion (Figs. 22(C), 23(A), (B), 24 reference)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member from falling into the guide passage forming portion.

The gaming machine of form 14 is the gaming machine according to form 13,
The special restricting portion moves the screw members (for example, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) that have moved toward the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202) to the guide passage forming portion. A special retention portion (for example, recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, 243) that can be retained before reaching, and is provided below the screw member attached to the attached portion,
A threaded member that has been detached from the attached portion but has not been retained in the special retention portion can move toward the cover portion (see FIGS. 22(C), 23(A), (B), and 24).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member detached from the attached portion from falling into the guide passage forming portion.

The gaming machine of form 15 is the gaming machine according to form 13 or 14,
the special retention portion is a recess (for example, recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, 243) capable of accommodating at least a portion of the screw member;
The depth of the recess is the depth to which a portion of the screw member protrudes when the screw member is accommodated (see FIGS. 22(C), 23(A), (B), and 24).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the screw member retained in the recess can be easily taken out.

The gaming machine of form 16 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 15,
A cover portion (for example, the cover portion 334 of the third cover body 330) provided to cover a part of the upper surface of the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202),
The cover portion is provided so as to incline downward toward the dispensing portion side,
A specific portion (for example, a ball stop member 340) capable of retaining a screw member that has fallen onto the cover portion is provided on the payout portion side of the cover portion in the inclined direction (see FIG. 15, Figures 26 and 27)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the delivery portion.

The gaming machine of form 17 is the gaming machine according to form 16,
The specific part (for example, the ball stopping member 340) has a first state in which the game medium (for example, the game ball P) of the guide path forming part (for example, the first guide path forming part 202) can flow down; It can be changed to a second state in which the game medium in the guide passage forming portion is difficult to flow down or cannot flow down (for example, the rotating portion 341 is positioned at the standing position and the front wall portion 341A deviates upward from the slit 344). A first state in which the game ball in the first guide passage forming portion 202 can flow down to the second guide passage forming portion 204, and the rotating portion 341 is positioned at the tilted position, and the front wall portion 341A is inserted into the slit 344. It is possible to change to a second state in which it is possible to contact the game ball and the game ball in the first guide path forming part 202 cannot flow down to the second guide path forming part 204 (or difficult to flow down).) ,
When the specific portion is in the second state, the screw member tends to stay more easily than when it is in the first state (see FIG. 26).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the delivery portion.

The gaming machine of form 18 is the gaming machine according to form 16 or 17,
The cover part
A first cover portion (for example, long holes 316A to 316C, grooves 326A to 326C, recess 336) provided with a retention portion (for example, long holes 316A to 316C, recessed grooves 326A to 326C, recessed portion 336) capable of retaining screw members dropped onto the cover portion ( For example, the cover portion 324 of the first cover body 310, the cover portion 324 of the second cover body 320),
a second cover portion (for example, the cover portion 334 of the third cover body 330) provided with the specific portion different from the first cover portion;
It is characterized by including
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the delivery portion.

The gaming machine of form 19 is the gaming machine according to form 18,
The second cover portion (for example, cover portion 334 of third cover body 330) is attached by a screw member (for example, screw member N16) having a locking portion (for example, flange portion F) (see FIG. 8). reference)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the delivery portion.

The gaming machine of form 20 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 19,
A game frame (for example, a game machine frame 3) provided with the storage portion (for example, a ball tank forming portion 201),
The storage portion is attached to the game frame at a plurality of locations by screw members (for example, screw members N11 to N14) having locking portions,
A screw member for attaching the storage portion and the guiding passage forming portion (for example, the first guiding passage forming portion 202) to the game frame is designed to fall outside the guiding passage forming portion even if the screw member is disengaged from the game frame. Installed (see Figure 8)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the screw member that attaches the storage portion is made difficult to come off from the game frame, and the screw member that attaches the storage portion and the guide passage formation portion falls outside the guide passage formation portion even if it comes off. It is possible to prevent the threaded member that has fallen into the passage forming portion from being mixed into the delivery portion.

The gaming machine of form 21 is the gaming machine according to form 20,
A plurality of screw members for attaching the storage portion (for example, the ball tank forming portion 201) and the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202) to the game frame (for example, the game machine frame 3) Of these, a predetermined screw member (for example, screw member N12) near the periphery of the game machine is also used as a screw member for attaching a ground wire (for example, ground wire 226) (see FIG. 8).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the number of screw members can be reduced, it is possible to prevent the screw members that have fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the delivery portion.

The gaming machine of form 22 is the gaming machine according to form 20 or 21,
The screw members (for example, screw members N11 to N14) for attaching the storage portion (for example, the ball tank forming portion 201) to the game frame (for example, the game machine frame 3) are provided to reinforce the game frame. Attached to a metal member (for example, a metal plate 222) (see FIG. 8)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the reservoir can be firmly attached.

The gaming machine of form 23 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 20 to 22,
Screw members (for example, screw members N3 to N6) attached to positions above the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202) in the game frame (for example, the game machine frame 3) are It is a screw member different from the screw member having the locking portion.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the delivery portion.

The gaming machine of form 24 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 20 to 23,
A game board (e.g., game board 2) detachable from the game frame (e.g., game machine frame 3) is provided,
In the area below the guiding passage forming portion (for example, the first guiding passage forming portion 202) in the game board, there is an inclined surface (for example, the upper portion of the cover body 220) that allows the falling screw member to flow down. wall portion 220H) is provided (see FIGS. 18 to 20 and 27)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has dropped from the guide passage forming portion onto the game board to rebound and be mixed into the guide passage forming portion again.

The gaming machine of form 25 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 24,
A cover portion (for example, the cover portion 360 of Modification 1) provided to cover a part of the upper surface of the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202),
The guide passage forming portion is
a first passage forming portion (e.g., first guide passage forming portion 202) extending downward toward one side (e.g., left side);
a second passage forming portion (for example, a second guiding passage forming portion 204) extending downward from the lower end of the first passage forming portion;
has
The cover portion is provided along the first passage forming portion so that the screw member dropped onto the cover portion moves and falls outside the guiding passage forming portion from the lower end (Fig. 29 ( A) See)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the delivery portion.

The gaming machine of form 26 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 2 to 25,
A wiring (for example, a cable CH) is provided so as to intersect the guide passage forming portion at a position near the predetermined restriction portion (for example, the concave portion 361) in the cover portion (for example, the cover portion 360 of Modification 1). (see FIG. 29(B))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the screw member is likely to get caught on the wiring and remain in the predetermined restricting portion.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
First, the configuration of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described. In the following description, the direction in which the player is positioned is defined as the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the opposite direction is defined as the rear. Also, the description will be made with reference to the up, down, left, and right directions when viewed from a player positioned in front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 .

FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area Y is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot and struck in the game area Y from a predetermined ball shooting device. In addition, a glass door frame 50 having a glass window 50a is provided in the game machine frame 3 so as to be rotatable around the left side, and the game area Y can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 50. When the glass door frame 50 is closed, the game area Y can be seen through the glass window 50a.

As shown in FIG. 1, the game board 2 is made of a translucent synthetic resin material such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, or methacrylic resin, and has a substantially square shape when viewed from the front. (not shown), a guide rail 2b, etc., and a spacer member integrally attached to the back side of the board. The game board 2 is made of a non-translucent member such as a plywood board and has a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. may be configured

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the bottom left of the game area Y), special symbols (also called special symbols) as special identification information of a plurality of types are variably displayed (also called a special symbol game). A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of the special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are variably displayed (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Incidentally, the variation includes a mode of blinking a certain symbol. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area Y on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 . A frame-shaped center decorative frame 51 is provided in the opening 2c of the game board 2. As shown in FIG.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronism with the first special game or the second special game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, vertically direction scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special game and the decoration pattern which are executed synchronously is generically called simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory count and the second reserved memory count is also referred to as the total reserved memory count.

In addition, at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the bottom left of the game area), a first suspension display 25A and a second suspension display 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. , the first reservation display 25A displays the first reservation storage number according to the number of lit LEDs, and the second reservation display 25B displays the second reservation storage number according to the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). For example, the variable winning ball device 6B includes a starting winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 81, and when the solenoid 81 is in an OFF state, the starting winning opening door is in the closed position, thereby opening the second starting winning opening. It will be in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter (it is also said that the second start winning opening is in a closed state). On the other hand, in the variable winning ball device 6B, when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state, the starting winning opening door is in the open position, so that the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening (the second It is also said that the starting prize opening is in an open state.). When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be one that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable winglets. Also, when a game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions on the left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning holes 10 which are always kept open by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning hole is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning gate door is in the ON state, the big winning gate door opens the big winning gate, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big winning gate. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including general winning holes is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize to a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the bottom left of the game area Y). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Below the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above structure, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area Y, there is provided an out port (not shown) into which game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports are taken in.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the game machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for game effects is provided at the peripheral portion of the game area Y. It is The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like in order to shoot a game ball toward the game area Y by the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area Y, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held so as to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device ( A batted ball supply plate (upper plate) for storage is provided. Below the upper plate, there is provided a payout port through which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full. A hitting ball supply tray (lower tray) may be provided.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area Y, a stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area Y, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area Y by a player's rotation operation of a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be immediately executed) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern winning pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern winning". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern losing pattern) other than the normal pattern per pattern is stop-displayed as the determined normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern losing". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during execution of the special game or during the period when it is controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state described later (although the start win has occurred If the special game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, when a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol varies depending on the type of the big hit to be described later) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" and a big winning symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example, "2") different from the symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, a plurality of types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc. described later) are prepared, and the jackpot is obtained according to these. type is set. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained, and a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small winning game state, the same opening mode as the big winning game state when some jackpot types etc.), the big prize opening is opened. In addition, you may provide a small-hit classification also in a "small-hit" like a big-hit classification.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, a predetermined return after power-on) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

After the small win game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small win" is continuously controlled (however, "small win" occurs If the special game at the time is the special game for the predetermined number of times in the above cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, there may not be a "small hit" as a display result of a special figure game.

Incidentally, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are provided. lighting or extinguishing, the movement of the movable body 32, or a performance using any performance device including a part or all of these.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) is a "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of the ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to the variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1, 3, 5", etc.) are derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "minor hit"). As an example, decoration symbols constituting a chance eye are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special game is "big hit" of some jackpot types (jackpot type of jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state), and when it becomes "small hit" , a common fixed decoration pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special game is "Loss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" Also referred to as "non-reach loss".) may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "losing", after the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("reach losing") that is not a big hit combination. (Also called) fixed decorative pattern is displayed stop (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed. Also, during the small-hit game state, an effect during the small-hit game for notifying the small-hit game state is executed. In addition, during the small-hit game state, some big-hit types (jackpot types in the same manner as the small-hit game state, for example, the jackpot type in which the subsequent game state is a high probability state) By executing a common performance in both states, the player may not know whether the current state is a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small winning game state and after the end of the big winning game state, it is made impossible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. may

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as payout control board 37 (see FIG. 3), information terminal board, launch control board, power supply board 91 (see FIG. 3), etc. are arranged on the back of pachinko game machine 1. there is

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, small hit game state, game state, etc.) has a function to control. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

In addition, the CPU 103 determines whether or not there is a first start prize or a second start prize, and if there is a prize, a random value for special figure display result determination, jackpot type determination, variation pattern determination, etc. , respectively, and stored (stored) at the top of the empty entry in the first special figure reservation storage section and the second special figure reservation storage section.

Further, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to start the special figure game based on the presence or absence of the reserved data stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit and the second special figure reservation storage unit, and the special figure display result Based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for judgment, whether or not the fluctuation display result of the special pattern and the production pattern is a "jackpot" is determined (predetermined) before the fluctuation display result is derived and displayed. Symbol normal processing is executed. In other words, when starting the variable display of the special game, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to derive and display the big win display result as the display result of the variable display based on the random number value stored when the start winning is generated. Execute the process of determining (lottery).

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches (gate switch 21, starting switch (first starting switch 22A and second starting switch 22B), count switch 23) for detecting game balls A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

Solenoid circuit 111, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82), to the solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes voice output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(Back structure of pachinko machine)
Next, the rear structure of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 3 to 7. FIG. FIG. 3 is a rear view showing the pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 4 is a left side view showing the pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 5 is a plan view showing a game machine frame to which a game board is attached. FIG. 6 is a perspective view showing a state in which the pachinko gaming machine is seen obliquely from behind. FIG. 7 is a perspective view showing a state in which the game board is removed from the game machine frame. 5 to 7, illustration of the glass door frame 50 is omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 3 to 7, the pachinko game machine 1 includes a game board 2, a game machine frame 3 to which the game board 2 is detachably provided, and a left side of the game machine frame 3. A game hall having a glass door frame 50 provided so as to be able to open and close the front surface of the machine frame 3, and a square frame-shaped outer frame 60 supporting the game machine frame 3 so as to be openable and closable about the left side thereof. By fixing the outer frame 60 to a game island (not shown) installed in the game island, it can be installed on the game island.

At the upper back of the game machine frame 3, a replenishment device 150 (FIGS. 3 and 4) is provided from a circulation path of game balls (hereinafter also referred to as game balls P) provided inside game islands (not shown). ), forming a ball tank forming portion 201 that forms a storage portion capable of storing game balls supplied through the ball tank forming portion 201, and forming a first guide passage that guides the game balls stored in the ball tank forming portion 201 toward the left side. A first guide passage forming portion 202 and a first passage forming body 203 extending in the left-right direction along the upper side portion 3A of the frame 3 for a game machine. A terminal substrate 210, which will be described later, is provided above the first guide path forming portion 202. As shown in FIG.

The replenishment device 150 has a guiding member 150A composed of a nozzle or the like capable of guiding the game balls on the circulation route of the game island, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls guided by the guiding member 150A. a sprocket (not shown) capable of driving the sprocket, a drive source (not shown) for driving the sprocket, and the game machine frame 3 when the opening of the outer frame 60 is closed by the game machine frame 3. When the lever switch (not shown) is pressed by the game machine frame 3 in the closed state, the game balls sent out by the sprocket enter the ball tank forming portion 201. When the lever switch (not shown) is not pressed by the game machine frame 3 in the open state, the game ball delivered by the sprocket is held so as not to fall. When the number of game balls stored in the ball tank forming part 201 decreases while the outer frame 60 is in the closed state, the drive source rotates the sprocket and the game balls are fed out by a predetermined number to the ball tank forming part 201. It is designed to be supplied to In the replenishment device 150, a case body 150B is constructed by assembling a plurality of members with a plurality of screw members (not shown). It is fixed at a predetermined location.

In addition, a second guide path forming portion 204 that forms a second guide path that guides the game ball guided to the left side by the first guide path forming portion 202 downward, and a game guided by the second guide path forming portion 204 A payout device 200 constituting a payout section capable of putting out balls, and a payout passage for guiding the game balls paid out by the payout device 200 to the upper tray, that is, forming a payout passage for paying out the game balls to the player. Pachinko game for discharging the game balls guided by the payout passage forming part 205 and the second guiding passage forming part 204 to the outside of the pachinko game machine 1 without paying out from the payout device 200 to the payout passage forming part 205 A second passage forming body 207 comprising a ball removing passage forming portion 206 that forms a ball removing passage leading to a discharge portion (not shown) provided on the lower back side of the machine 1 is provided in the gaming machine frame 3. It extends vertically along the left side of the back surface of the .

The payout device 200 is composed of a case body formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, and has therein a sprocket for paying out a predetermined number of game balls (for example, one ball) at a time, a payout motor for rotating the sprocket, and a game ball. A switching valve capable of switching the passage of the balls between the paying-out passage and the ball-removing passage, an operation lever for switching the switching valve, and the like are provided. Further, a board case 91A in which the power board 91 is housed, a board case 37A in which the payout control board 37 is housed, and the like are provided at the lower back of the gaming machine frame 3 .

In this embodiment, a ball break switch (not shown) capable of detecting a game ball is provided at a predetermined position of the second guide path, and the CPU 103 receives a detection signal from the ball break switch (not shown). Based on the input state, it is constantly monitored whether or not there are game balls to be paid out in the second guide passage on the upstream side of the payout device 200.例文帳に追加When the off state of the ball-out switch (not shown) continues for a predetermined time or longer, it is determined that game balls are not supplied to the payout device 200 for some reason such as ball clogging, that is, a replenishment error has occurred, and payout is performed. The payout operation by the device 200 is stopped. In addition, a predetermined display (not shown) connected to the main board 11 displays a replenishment error, and by outputting a replenishment error command to the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 displays the glass door frame 50. It is possible to execute notification processing to the effect that a replenishment error has occurred by, for example, causing a game effect lamp 9 provided at a predetermined location on the front surface to emit light in an error mode.

As shown in FIG. 7, the game board 2 is detachably arranged from the front side of the gaming machine frame 3 in an opening 221 formed substantially in the central portion of the gaming machine frame 3 . The game board 2 includes a plate-like body 2a made up of the above-described board plate and spacer members, various game parts (for example, obstacle nails, winning devices, etc.) provided on the front side of the plate-like body 2a, and the plate-like body 2a. Electronic components such as an image display device 5 provided on the back side, a production device having a movable body 32, a board case 12A in which the production control board 12 is stored, a board case 11A in which the main board 11 is stored, and a plate-shaped It is a structure including a cover body 220 that protects a part, a production device, electronic parts, and the like.

The substrate cases 11A, 12A, 91A, and 37A are constructed by a base member and a cover member made of a transparent synthetic resin material so that each substrate can be accommodated therein. , are attached to the game machine frame 3 or the game board 2 by one or more screw members N20, N21 (see FIG. 3), respectively, and the board cases 91A, 37A are attached to the game machine frame 3 by locking means (not shown). Or it is attached to the game board 2 . The cover body 220 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin material in the shape of a box with an open front surface. part can be opened and closed.

As shown in FIGS. 4 to 6, a first passage formation body 203 and a second passage formation body 207 provided on the back surface of the game machine frame 3, and a cover body 220 constituting the back surface of the game board 2 are It protrudes rearward from the outer frame 60 when the outer frame 60 is closed by the machine frame 3 . In particular, the first passage forming body 203 is provided so that the upper surface opening of the ball tank forming portion 201 is arranged behind the upper plate of the outer frame 60 on the upper back surface of the frame 3 for a game machine, so that the pachinko machine can be used for pachinko games. In a state in which the outer frame 60 of the game machine 1 is fixed to a game island (not shown), game balls can be supplied to the ball tank forming section 201 through the supply device 150 from the circulation path above the game island. .

(Mounting Structure of First Passage Forming Body 203)
Next, the mounting structure of the first passage forming body 203 to the game machine frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9. FIG. FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view showing the attachment structure of the passage forming body to the game machine frame. FIG. 9 is an enlarged rear view showing the upper rear portion of the gaming machine frame.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the game machine frame 3 is a substantially rectangular frame when viewed from the front, and is provided with an opening 221 for mounting the game board 2 thereon. A reinforcing metal plate 222 is provided in the left-right direction on the rear surface of the upper side portion 3A. A mounting member 223 for mounting the first passage forming body 203 to the game machine frame 3 is attached to the back surface of the metal plate 222 .

The mounting member 223 is formed of a synthetic resin material so as to be able to cover the metal plate 222 from the back side. It is attached to the metal plate 222 by screwing each into a plurality of formed screw holes. On the right side of the mounting member 223, a plate-shaped first projecting portion 224 protrudes rearward, and on the left side of the mounting member 223, an upper wall portion 225A, a rear wall portion 225B, and left and right side wall portions 225C. A three-dimensional second projecting portion 225 projects rearward.

The first projecting portion 224 projects rearward from a lower position than the upper wall portion 225A of the second projecting portion 225, and the sphere tank forming portion 201 is arranged on the upper side thereof. In addition, the first guide path forming portion 202 is arranged on the rear side of the rear wall portion 225B of the second projecting portion 225, and the board mounting frame 211 for mounting the terminal board 210 is mounted on the upper side thereof. ing. The substrate mounting frame 211 is mounted from the rear side to the mounting hole H6 formed in the upper portion while the locking piece 212 projecting downward from the lower side is inserted into the locking hole 213 formed in the rear wall portion 225B. It is attached to the mounting member 223 by screwing the threaded member N6 into a threaded hole formed in the mounting member 223 .

Thus, the mounting member 223 is formed to cover the upper side of the game board 2 by having the first projecting portion 224 and the second projecting portion 225 projecting backward. Therefore, game balls supplied to the ball tank forming portion 201 from above the game islands are prevented from entering the game board 2 . That is, the mounting member 223 functions as a protective cover for the game board 2. As shown in FIG.

The first passage forming body 203 includes a plurality of screw members N11 to N14 attached to the plurality of mounting holes H11 to H14 from the rear side and a screw member N15 attached to the mounting hole H15 from the upper side. They are attached to the attachment member 223 by screwing into the screw holes. The screw member N12 attached to the mounting hole H12 is also used as a screw member for attaching the ground wire 226 for removing the electricity charged in the first passage forming member 203 to the first passage forming member 203. A first cover body 310, a second cover body 320, and a third cover body 330, which will be described later, are attached to the upper portion of the first passage forming body 203. As shown in FIG. The third cover body 330 is attached to the first passage forming body 203 by screwing a screw member N16 attached to the mounting hole H16 from above into a screw hole formed in the rear wall of the first passage forming body 203. there is

As shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 8, the threaded members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 include a male threaded portion NS and a head portion NH. It is a flanged screw in which a flange part F as a locking part is integrally formed on the bearing surface of the screw, and by increasing the contact area of the bearing surface and increasing the frictional force, it is difficult to loosen compared to the screw members N3 to N6. It is considered as a screw member.

For example, the diameter L1 of the male screw portion NS of each screw member N1 to N6, N11 to N16 is about 1 to 3 mm, the diameter L2 of the head NH is about 4 to 7 mm, and the diameter L3 of the flange portion F is about NH 8 to 10 mm longer than the diameter L2.

The sizes and types of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 are arbitrary, and the dimensions of the diameters L1 to L3 are not limited to those described above. The screw members N1, N2, N11 to N16, which are flanged screws, are screw members integrally formed with a flange portion F (washer). may be attached to the screw member, and the flange portion F and the washer constitute the locking portion of the present invention. Further, the screw member includes a member such as a screw or a bolt that separates from the attached portion when loosened. In addition, the locking portion includes a locking portion for the head NH formed unevenly on the back surface of the head NH and the flange portion F (washer), an adhesive, and the like.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the first passage formation body 203 needs to receive and store the game balls supplied from above the game island in the ball tank formation portion 201, and the first guide passage It is formed in a concave shape with an open upper surface so that clogging of balls is unlikely to occur in the case of clogging of balls, and clogging of balls can be easily eliminated in the event that clogging occurs.

In addition, a first cover body 310 and a second cover body 320 cover the upper surface of the portion where the game balls accumulated in the ball tank forming portion 201 in the vertical direction flow into the first guide passage forming portion 202. In addition, the third cover body 330 is arranged so as to cover the upper surface of the portion where the ball flows from the first guide path forming portion 202 to the second guide path forming portion 204, so that the game ball is rectified. However, although a part of the top opening of the first passage forming body 203 is covered with the first cover body 310, the second cover body 320 and the third cover body 330, the sphere tank forming part 201 and the uncovered area 350 ( 27) is open.

On the other hand, in the vicinity of the periphery of the first passage forming body 203, a plurality of screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 attached to the gaming machine frame 3 and the attachment member 223 are arranged. In addition, above the pachinko machine 1 fixed to the game island, screw members (not shown) for assembling the building blocks constituting the game island, and various devices (for example, A large number of screw members (not shown) for attaching the replenishing device 150, etc., to the frame or the like, and a plurality of screw members for assembling a plurality of members constituting the case bodies of various devices are arranged.

If these screw members are loosened and fall off due to vibration or shock generated in the game island or the pachinko game machine 1, they will roll due to the vibration or shock or the opening and closing of the game machine frame 3, and the ball tank forming part 201 and the first screw member will roll. There is a possibility that they fall inside from the non-covered area 350 of the guide passage forming part 202 and mix into the guide passage of the game ball. In particular, the replenishment device 150 and the like are arranged in the vicinity directly above the ball tank forming section 201 as shown in FIGS. , or when the game machine frame 3 is opened or closed, the replenishment device 150 is likely to vibrate, so a screw member ( (not shown), or when a plurality of screw members for assembling a plurality of members constituting the case body 150B of the replenishment device 150 are loosened due to vibration and fall off, the inside of the sphere tank forming portion 201 or the first guide passage forming portion 202 very likely to fall.

Then, when the screw member falls into the ball tank forming part 201 or the first guide passage forming part 202, it may move toward the payout device 200 side as the game ball flows down, and finally mix in the payout device 200. When the threaded member enters the payout device 200 in this way, the sprocket or the switching valve may be damaged by the threaded member, the ball clogging may occur and the payout motor may be damaged due to the load, or the screw member may be damaged by the game ball and the player. There is a risk that the player will be paid out immediately, giving the player a sense of discomfort or distrust.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as described below, the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 mixes with the dispensing device 200 and damages or breaks down the dispensing device 200, or the screw member is broken together with the game ball. Various measures have been taken to suppress the payout to the player.

(First passage forming body 203)
Next, the first passage forming body 203 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 16. FIG. 10, (A) is a plan view showing the first passage forming body, and (B) is a rear view showing the first passage forming body. 11, (A) is a sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 10A, (B) is a sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 10A, and (C) is a sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 10A. It is a diagram. 12, (A) is a plan view showing the first guide passage forming portion, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD of (A). 13, (A) is a plan view showing the first cover body, (B) is a sectional view taken along line EE of (A), and (C) is a sectional view taken along line FF of (A). 14, (A) is a plan view showing the second cover body, (B) is a GG sectional view of (A), and (C) is a HH sectional view of (A). 15, (A) is a plan view showing the third cover body, (B) is a sectional view taken along line II in (A), (C) is a sectional view taken along line JJ in (A), and (D) is a third cover member. 3 is a perspective view showing a cover body, and (E) is a perspective view showing a ball stopper member. 16, (A) is a vertical cross-sectional view showing the first guiding passage forming portion showing the state in which the ball stopper member is in the first state, and (B) is a first guide passage showing the state in which the ball stopper member is in the second state. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view which shows a guidance passage formation part.

As shown in FIGS. 10 to 12, the first passage forming body 203 is made of a conductive synthetic resin material, and has a bottom wall portion 203A and a vertical wall portion 203B erected on the periphery of the bottom wall portion 203A. is formed in a concave shape or a concave groove shape with an opening, and has a ball tank forming portion 201 arranged on the right side and a first guiding passage forming portion 202 arranged on the left side. The sphere tank forming portion 201 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in a plan view, and the first guide passage forming portion 202 is formed by an upstream portion extending obliquely rearward from the left side of the sphere tank forming portion 201 and a downstream portion extending in the left-right direction. Become. The longitudinal dimension of the ball tank forming portion 201 is longer than the longitudinal dimension of the first guide passage forming portion 202, so that more game balls than the first guide passage forming portion 202 can be stored. It is Further, since the bottom wall portion 203A is formed so as to gradually incline downward from the left side of the sphere tank forming portion 201 toward the right side of the first guide passage forming portion 202, The game ball naturally flows down toward the ball tank formation part 201 and the first guide passage formation part 202 to the left.

A mounting piece 261 facing in the vertical direction is projected from the outer surface of the right standing wall portion 203B of the ball tank forming portion 201, and mounting holes H11 and H12 facing in the front-rear direction are formed in the upper and lower sides of the mounting piece 261. . A mounting piece 265 projects from the rear side of the mounting piece 261, and the mounting piece 265 is formed with a mounting hole H15 facing in the vertical direction. A mounting piece 262 facing in the vertical direction is projected from the outer surface of the left standing wall portion 203B of the first guiding passage forming portion 202, and a mounting hole H14 facing in the front-rear direction is formed in the mounting piece 262. A horizontal wall portion 264 protrudes forward from the outer surface of the front vertical wall portion 203B in the upstream portion of the first guiding passage forming portion 202 . A mounting piece 263 is erected on the front side of the horizontal wall portion 264, and the mounting piece 263 is formed with a mounting hole H13 facing in the front-rear direction.

The first passage forming body 203 is attached to the gaming machine frame 3 by screwing a plurality of screw members N11 to N15 attached to the attachment holes H11 to H15 into screw holes formed in the attachment member 223. As shown in FIG. A concave portion 280 having a substantially square shape in a plan view is formed on the upper surface of the horizontal wall portion 264 at a position near the rear of the mounting piece 263 .

As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, hole portions 270A and 270B are formed at the corners of the bottom wall portion 203A in the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and the rear standing wall portion 203B ( See FIG. 11(A)). A plurality of holes 271A to 271H are formed downstream of the holes 271A and 271B at approximately the central position in the front-rear direction of the bottom wall 203A on the downstream side (left side) of the holes 271A and 271B. In addition, a communication hole 272 is formed through the bottom wall portion 203A at the downstream end portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 to drop the game ball into the second guide passage forming portion 204 below. .

A meandering portion 273 is formed in the middle of the first guide passage forming portion 202, and causes the game ball to meander in the front-rear direction and flow down toward the left side. is formed at a position corresponding to the meandering portion 273 . By providing such a meandering portion 273, the ball pressure due to the succeeding ball is prevented from increasing.

In addition, the distance L10 between the front and rear vertical wall portions 203B and 203B lower portions of the first guide passage forming portion 202 is longer than the diameter 2R (about 11 mm) of the game ball and twice the diameter 2R (about 22 mm). (11 mm<L10<22 mm). That is, the first guide path forming portion 202 is formed so as to be able to guide the game balls in one row toward the downstream side.

Since the longitudinal dimension L11 of the holes 271A to 271H excluding the holes 271A and 271B is slightly longer than the diameter L2 of the heads NH of the screw members N3 to N6 (L11>L2), as will be described later, the screw members N3 to Even if N6 enters the first guide passage forming portion 202, the screw members N3 to N6 can drop from the holes 271A to 271H. In addition, since the hole 271H formed on the most downstream side has the longest lateral dimension L12 (dimension in the downstream direction of the game ball) compared to the other holes 271A to 271G, the screw members N3 to N6 are connected to the communication hole 272. can be reliably dropped outside the first guide passage forming portion 202 before reaching the .

In other words, these holes 271A to 271H constitute specific restricting portions for restricting movement of the screw members N3 to N6 that have fallen into the first guiding passage forming portion 202 toward the dispensing device 200. As shown in FIG. It should be noted that dirt and dust other than the threaded member, or any other member can fall from these plurality of holes 271A to 271H.

(First cover body 310)
As shown in FIGS. 13A to 13C, the first cover body 310 extends along the upper edge of the standing wall portion 203B on the front side of the ball tank forming portion 201, and the upper end of the standing wall portion 203B extends. A mounting portion 311 having a downward U-shape in cross section that can be fitted from above, a vertical wall portion 312 extending from the right side of the mounting portion 311 toward the rear side, and a right side from the lower portion of the vertical wall portion 312 (forming a ball tank). 201 side), a cover portion 314 extending from the lower portion of the vertical wall portion 312 toward the left side (first guide passage forming portion 202 side), and an attachment A plurality of engaging portions 315A to 315D elastically deformable are mainly formed on the front side of the portion 311 and the front and rear sides of the cover portion 314. As shown in FIG.

The first cover body 310 configured in this manner is configured such that the mounting portion 311 is attached to the sphere tank forming portion 201 while the vertical wall portion 312 is arranged near the boundary between the sphere tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202 . By fitting the upper end of the front standing wall portion 203B from above, the plurality of locking portions 315A to 315D are elastically locked to the locked portion 317 (see FIG. 18) formed on the outer surface of the standing wall portion 203B. By doing so, it is attached to the first passage forming body 203 . In the attached state, the ball holding portion 313 is arranged to cover a portion of the downstream side of the ball tank forming portion 201 from above, and the cover portion 314 is arranged to cover a portion of the upstream side of the first guide passage forming portion 202. The upper surface of the cover portion 314 is arranged so as to be slightly downward toward the first guide passage forming portion 202 (see FIG. 9).

When the first cover body 310 is attached to the first passage forming body 203, the ball holding part 313 is arranged on the ball tank forming part 201 side, so that the ball tank forming part 201 is moved from the game island (not shown). Even when the supplied game balls are stored so as to pile up in the vertical direction, the game balls are rectified by being pressed downward by the ball pressing portion 313 when flowing down to the first guide passage forming portion 202 side. It is designed to be

Long holes 316A to 316C extending in the left-right direction and having the shape of a horizontally long rectangle in a plan view are formed in the cover portion 314 so as to penetrate vertically while being arranged in rows so as to be parallel to each other. Each of the long holes 316A-316C has the same longitudinal dimension L21, and the longitudinal dimension L21 is shorter than the diameter 2R of the game ball, and the heads of the screw members N1-N6 and N11-N16 mentioned above. It is shorter than the diameter L2 of NH (L21<2R, L21<L2). In other words, the long holes 316A-316C are formed in a size that prevents the game balls and screw members N1-N6, N11-N16 from falling. Reinforcing ribs hang down from the peripheries of the long holes 316A to 316C on the lower surface of the cover portion 314. As shown in FIG.

In addition, since the long holes 316A to 316C are extended along the flowing direction of the game ball, as shown in FIGS. In this case, the game ball P can move in the downstream direction (left side).

(Second cover body 320)
As shown in FIGS. 14A to 14C, the second cover body 320 includes a plate-like cover portion 324 formed along the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202, and a cover portion 324 and a plurality of locking portions 325A and 325B which are elastically deformable. In the close state, the plurality of locking portions 325A and 325B are elastically locked to the locked portion 317 (see FIG. 20) formed on the outer surface of the standing wall portion 302B, so that the first passage forming body 203 Mounted on. In the attached state, the cover portion 324 covers a portion of the upstream side of the first guide passage forming portion 202 from above, and is arranged so as to incline downward toward the flowing direction of the game ball (FIG. 9). reference).

On the upper surface of the cover portion 324, recessed grooves 326A to 326C extending in the left-right direction are formed in rows. The concave grooves 326A-326C have different front-to-rear dimensions L22A-L22C, but are each shorter than the diameter 2R of the game ball (L22A-L22C<2R). The longitudinal dimension L22B of the central groove 326B, which has the longest longitudinal dimension, is longer than the diameter L2 of the head NH of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 (L22B>L2). In other words, the recessed groove 326B is formed in a size that cannot accommodate game balls and that can accommodate the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16. Further, the front-rear dimension L22B of the groove 326B is longer than the front-rear dimension L21 of the long holes 316A to 316C of the cover portion 314 (L22B>L21).

In addition, since the front-rear dimension L22A of the recessed groove 326A and the front-rear dimension L22C of the recessed groove 326C are longer than the diameter L1 of the male screw portion NS of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 (L22B>L1, L22C>L1 ), and is sized to accommodate at least the externally threaded portion NS.

In addition, since the concave grooves 326A to 326C extend along the flowing direction of the game ball and are arranged so as to incline downward toward the flowing direction of the game ball, FIGS. 2, when the game ball P falls to the upper part of the recessed grooves 326A to 326C, the game ball P is guided in the flowing direction (left side).

(Third cover body 330)
As shown in FIGS. 15A to 15C and 16, the third cover body 330 includes a plate-like cover portion 334 formed along the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202. A plurality of locking portions 335A to 335D elastically deformable formed on the front and rear sides of the left end of the cover portion 334 and a screw member N15 protruding between the locking portions 335C and 335D on the rear surface are attached from above. A mounting portion 331 having a hole H15 formed thereon and a ball stopper member 340 provided at the left end of the upper surface of the cover portion 334. It is elastically locked to a locked portion 317 (see FIG. 20) formed on the outer surface of the portion 302B, and the screw member N15 attached to the mounting hole H15 is screwed into the screw hole provided on the outer surface of the standing wall portion 203B. It is attached to the first passage forming body 203 by inserting it. In the attached state, the cover portion 334 covers the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 from above, and is arranged so as to be inclined downward toward the downstream direction of the game ball (see FIG. 9).

The cover portion 334 extends obliquely upward from the left side to the right side, and a concave portion 336 having a predetermined depth extends from the right end portion of the upper surface toward the left side. Since the right part reaches the meandering part 273 , it is formed corresponding to the shape of the meandering part 273 . At a position corresponding to the concave portion 336, a slit 337 having a horizontally elongated U-shape in plan view is formed, thereby forming a rectifying plate 338 whose left end side is elastically deformable so as to swing vertically. At the right end, an inclined plate portion 339 inclined downward toward the right side is formed, so that the game balls P stacked up and down are guided toward the bottom wall portion 203A and leveled. (See Fig. 16).

The front-rear dimension L23 of the recess 336 is longer than the diameter 2R of the game ball, and longer than the diameter L2 of the head NH of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 (L23 >2R, L23>L2). That is, the recessed portion 336 is formed to have a size capable of accommodating the game ball P and the heads NH of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16. Further, the front-rear dimension L23 of the recess 336 is longer than the front-rear dimension L22B of the recessed groove 326B of the cover portion 324 (L23>L22B).

In addition, since the recess 336 extends along the flowing direction of the game ball and is disposed so as to incline downward toward the flowing direction of the game ball, as shown in FIG. When the game ball P falls on the upper part of 336, the game ball P is guided toward the flowing direction (left side).

In addition, since the longitudinal dimension L24 of the slit 337 is shorter than the diameter L2 of the head NH of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 (L24<L2), the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 ˜N16 do not drop from the slit 337.

The ball stopper member 340 includes a plate-like front wall portion 341A having a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the rear, a rear wall portion 341B arranged on the rear side of the front wall portion 341A, and the front wall portion 341A and the rear wall portion 341B. It is composed of a rotating portion 341 having a connected left wall portion 341C, a projecting wall portion 341D projecting from the upper end of the left wall portion 341C, and a cylindrical shaft portion 342 facing in the front-rear direction. Bearing portions 343A and 343B are erected on the left side of the upper surface of the cover portion 334 to rotatably support the front and rear ends of the shaft portion 342 . A slit 344 is formed through the right side of the bearing portion 343A in the cover portion 334 so that the front wall portion 341A can be inserted therethrough.

As shown in FIG. 16 , when the third cover body 330 is attached to the first passage formation body 203 , the downstream portion of the first guide passage formation portion 202 is covered by the cover portion 324 . Since the cover portion 324 is arranged to be inclined downward toward the bottom wall portion 203A toward the downstream side (left side), the game balls P stacked up and down in the first guide passage forming portion 202 are covered with the cover portion 324. While flowing down, it is leveled, and finally it is made possible to flow out one by one from the communication hole 272. - 特許庁In particular, the straightening plate 338 is elastically deformable when a game ball comes into contact with it, so that it smoothes (rectifies) the game ball so as to press it downward to the extent that ball clogging does not occur.

(Ball stop member 340)
As shown in FIG. 16A, the ball stopper member 340 is rotatable between a standing position in which the rotating portion 341 stands up and a tilted position in which the rotating portion 341 tilts to the right. is located in the standing position, the front wall portion 341A deviates upward from the slit 344 to allow the game ball of the first guide passage forming portion 202 to flow down to the second guide passage forming portion 204; The part 341 is positioned at the tilted position, the front wall part 341A is inserted into the slit 344 and can contact the game ball, and the game ball of the first guide path formation part 202 cannot flow down to the second guide path formation part 204 (or difficult), that is, the ball-stopped state.

By setting the ball stop member 340 to the second state in this way, it is possible to restrict the entry of the game ball into the second guide passage formation portion 204, so that the game inside the second guide passage formation portion 204 in this state It is possible to extract the ball and remove the dispensing device 200 for inspection or replacement.

Further, as shown in FIG. 16A, when the ball stopper member 340 is in the first state, the right side of the rotating portion 341 is opened and consists of a front wall portion 341A, a rear wall portion 341B, and a left wall portion 341C. The space surrounded by the substantially U-shaped wall in plan view functions as a retaining portion in which the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 can be retained as described later. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 16B, when the ball stop member 340 is in the second state, the rotating portion 341 is tilted, but the protruding wall portion 341D is positioned in an upright state so as to cross the passage. Therefore, as will be described later, the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 can be retained on the right side of the projecting wall portion 341D.

(Terminal board 210)
Next, the terminal board 210 will be described based on FIG. 17 with reference to FIG. 17, (A) is a perspective view showing a board mounting frame to which a terminal board is mounted, (B) is a KK section of (A), and (C) is a LL section of (B). .

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 17, the terminal board 210 has a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the rear, and has a cable connecting portion (not shown) to which a signal line cable (not shown) connected to the main board 11 or the like is detachable on the back. ) and a mounting member 232 provided with a plurality of connection holes 231 for connecting a plurality of cables C (see FIG. 3) connected to an external device such as a hall computer. Connection pinches (not shown) for pinching the ends of the cables C are provided inside the mounting member 232 at positions corresponding to the connection holes 231 . A spring (not shown) is provided for biasing the connection pinch in the direction of closing it, that is, in the direction of clamping the tip of the cable C. As shown in FIG. The mounting member 232 is provided with a plurality of operation portions 233 for opening each connection pinch (not shown) against the biasing force of a spring (not shown).

The number of cables C that can be connected to the plurality of connection holes 231 of the terminal board 210 as the first board provided above the first guide path forming part 202 is set to the first number (for example, 20). On the other hand, each signal line is also connected to a second board such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12 provided below the first guiding path forming portion 202, but the number of lines is less than the first number. It is set to the number (for example, 10).

A plurality of the operation portions 233 are provided corresponding to the respective connection holes 231, and have a substantially hook-like shape when viewed from the side, and are swung in the front-rear direction with the base end thereof as the swing axis. When opening the connection pinch (not shown), the operation portion 233 is pushed upward or downward to swing the operation portion 233, thereby releasing the connection pinch (not shown). When the tip of the cable C is inserted into the connection hole portion 231 with the connection pinch opened and the pressing operation of the operation portion 233 is stopped, the connection pinch is closed by the biasing force of the spring (not shown). Cable C comes to be held. The operation portions 233 arranged in the left-right direction alternately have different shapes in the left-right direction so that when a predetermined operation portion 233 is pressed, the adjacent operation portions 233 do not interfere with the pressing operation. there is

The substrate mounting frame 211 is mounted from the rear side to the mounting hole H6 formed in the upper portion while the locking piece 212 projecting downward from the lower side is inserted into the locking hole 213 formed in the rear wall portion 225B. It is attached to the mounting member 223 by screwing the threaded member N6 into a threaded hole formed in the mounting member 223 . Further, a horizontally long rectangular opening 234 is formed in the board mounting frame 211 .

On the inner surface of the substrate mounting frame 211, a plurality of restricting portions 235 that restrict the forward movement of the terminal substrate 210 by engaging with the periphery of the terminal substrate 210 inserted from the front side, and the restricting portions 235 prevent the terminal substrate 210 from moving forward. a plurality of locking portions 236 that can be elastically locked from the front side to the peripheral edge of the terminal substrate 210 whose movement is restricted; have. Therefore, the terminal board 210 is inserted from the front side of the board mounting frame 211, and is elastically locked by the locking parts 236 in a state where forward movement is restricted by the plurality of restricting parts 235, whereby the board is mounted. It is attached to the frame 211 . That is, the terminal board 210 is attached to the board mounting frame 211 by using a plurality of restricting portions 235 and locking portions 236 as mounting means different from screw members (using a mounting method different from the mounting method using screw members). Mounted.

Since the terminal board 210 is formed with a plurality of connection holes 231 to which the cables C can be connected, during wiring work for connecting a plurality of cables C to the connection holes 231, an operation portion 233 corresponding to each cable C can be operated. need to operate. In addition, when the pachinko machine 1 is fixed to the game island and the game machine frame 3 is opened for inspection by a game hall clerk or the like, the cable C hanging down from the upper part of the game island is attached to the outer frame. It may be pulled around in front of 60 and tension may be applied to the connection. In other words, since the terminal board 210 is likely to be subjected to a load on the mounting portion, if it is attached to the board mounting frame 211 or the mounting member 223 with a screw member, the screw member becomes loose and easily comes off. ing.

In addition, when the terminal board 210 is attached to the board mounting frame 211, the connection hole portion 231 and the operating portion 233 of the terminal board 210 face the rear side through the opening 234 (see FIG. 17A). ). Further, since the plurality of operating portions 233 protrude substantially horizontally toward the rear, the screw members N3 to N6 can be held by the plurality of operating portions 233 arranged side by side as will be described later. A recess 242 is formed between the lower portion of the terminal board 210 and the front portion of the board mounting frame 211 to accommodate the screw members N3 to N6.

(Mounting state of screw members N1 to N16)
Next, the mounting state of the screw members N1 to N16 will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 to 21. FIG. FIG. 18 is a perspective view showing a state where the periphery of the ball tank portion on the back surface of the game frame is seen obliquely from behind. 19, (A) is a plan view showing the periphery of the ball tank portion on the back of the game frame, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line MM of (A). FIG. 20 is a perspective view showing a state in which the periphery of the first guide passage forming portion on the back surface of the game frame is seen obliquely from behind. FIG. 21 is a plan view showing the periphery of the first guide passage forming portion on the back side of the game frame. 22, (A) is a sectional view taken along line NN of FIG. 21, (B) is a view showing a rotating state of the screw member, and (C) is a sectional view taken along line OO of FIG. 23, (A) is a sectional view taken along line PP of FIG. 21, and (B) is a sectional view taken along line QQ of FIG. 24 is a cross-sectional view taken along line RR of FIG. 21. FIG. 25 is a cross-sectional view taken along line SS of FIG. 21. FIG. FIG. 26 shows (A) the retention state of the screw member when the ball stopper is in the first state, (B) is a TT sectional view of (A), and (C) is the ball stopper in the second state. (D) is a UU cross-sectional view of (C). FIG. 27 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the first guide passage forming portion showing movement of the screw member. FIG. 28 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the first guide passage forming portion showing the moving state of the game ball on the cover portion.

As shown in FIGS. 9, 18 and 19(A), screw members N1 to N1 for attaching the mounting member 223 to the metal plate 222 are provided on the sphere tank forming portion 201 and its periphery on the back surface of the frame 3 for the gaming machine. N2 and screw members N11, N12 and N15 for mounting the first passage forming body 203 to the mounting member 223 are mounted.

Specifically, the screw members N1 and N2 are attached forward from the back side at a position away from the sphere tank forming portion 201 to the right and below the upper edge of the standing wall portion 203B of the sphere tank forming portion 201. Therefore, even if the screw members N1 and N2 are loosened and fall backward due to vibration or shock generated in the pachinko game machine 1, the possibility of falling into the ball tank forming portion 201 as shown in FIG. 18 is extremely low. .

The screw members N11 and N12 are attached forward from the back side on the outer surface of the right standing wall portion 203B of the sphere tank forming portion 201 and at a position below the upper edge of the sphere tank forming portion 201. Even if the screw members N11 and N12 are loosened and fall backward due to vibration or shock generated in the pachinko game machine 1, the possibility of falling into the ball tank forming portion 201 as shown in FIG. 18 is extremely low.

The screw member N15 is attached downward from the upper side on the outer surface of the right standing wall portion 203B of the ball tank forming portion 201 and at a position below the upper edge of the ball tank forming portion 201. Even if the screw member N15 loosens due to vibration or shock generated in the machine 1 and falls upward, the possibility of falling into the sphere tank forming portion 201 as shown in FIG. 18 is extremely low.

The screw members N1, N2, N11, N12, and N15 receive and store the game balls supplied from the replenishment device 150 from the circulation path above the game island, and form a ball tank on which the load of a large number of game balls is applied. Vibrations and impacts are likely to occur due to being arranged around the portion 201, so a screw member with a flange is used, which has a large contact area with the attached portion and is less prone to loosening.

Further, the screw members N1, N2, N11, N12, and N15 around the sphere tank forming portion 201 are located at positions where they are unlikely to fall into the sphere tank forming portion 201 even if they are loosened and fall off, that is, at the top opening of the sphere tank forming portion 201. , the game balls supplied from the replenishing device 150 from the circulation path above the game islands are received and stored in the ball tank forming portion 201, which is open at the top. suppressed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 19B, the sphere tank forming portion 201 is close to (or may be in contact with) the upper surface side of the plate-shaped first projecting portion 224 projecting rearward from the mounting member 223. The gap L30 between the bottom wall portion 203A and the first projecting portion 224 is smaller than the diameter L1 of the male threaded portion NS of the screw member (L30<L1). It is almost impossible for the screw member to be caught between the wall portion 203A and the first projecting portion 224 and held in the vicinity of the sphere tank forming portion 201 .

Further, the gap L31 formed between the rear portion of the bottom wall portion 203A of the sphere tank forming portion 201 and the upper wall portion 220H of the cover body 220 is larger than the head portion L2 of the flanged screw member and the diameter L3 of the flange portion F. is also long (L3>L2), the flanged screw member is almost never caught in the gap L31 and held in the vicinity of the sphere tank forming portion 201. As shown in FIG.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 18 and 19B, if the screw member N15 slips out of the mounting hole H15 as the mounted portion and falls onto the upper wall portion 220H of the cover body 220, the upper wall portion 220H is Since the screw member N15 is inclined downward toward the back side, the dropped screw member N15 flows down either rearward or leftward, so that it is almost never held in the vicinity of the sphere tank forming portion 201.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to prevent the dropped screw member N15 from entering each of the substrate cases 11A, 12A, 37A, and 91A provided below the sphere tank forming portion 201 and contacting the wiring of the substrate to cause disconnection or the like. .

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 9, 20 and 21A, screw members N3 to N5 for attaching the mounting member 223 to the metal plate 222 and the substrate A screw member N6 for mounting the mounting frame 211 to the mounting member 223, screw members N13 and N14 for mounting the first passage forming body 203 to the mounting member 223, A threaded member N16 for attaching to is attached.

Specifically, the screw members N3 to N6 are separated from the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the front side and are positioned above the upper end edge of the standing wall portion 203B of the first guide passage forming portion 202 toward the front from the rear side. In addition, the second projecting portion 225 of the mounting member 223 is arranged between the mounting position of each of the screw members N3 to N6 and the first guide passage forming portion 202, so that the screw member Although there is a certain distance from the mounting position of each of N3 to N6 to the first guide passage forming portion 202, the upper wall portion 225A of the second projecting portion 225 is inclined downward toward the back side, so the pachinko game machine 20, when the screw members N3 to N6 are loosened due to vibrations or shocks occurring in 1 and fall off backward, as shown in FIG. There is a high possibility that it will fall into the guide passage forming portion 202 .

As shown in FIGS. 20 to 22, the screw member N3 is formed in the mounting member 223 at a position forwardly away from the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and above the upper end edge of the standing wall portion 203B. is attached to the mounting hole H3. Further, at a position corresponding to the mounting hole H3 on the upper surface of the upper wall portion 225A, a recessed groove 227 for avoiding interference with the head portion NH when mounting the screw member N3 to the mounting hole H3 is formed in a straight line toward the rear. has been extended to The groove 227 is formed so that the width of the groove 227 tapers toward the rear and becomes shallower. The bottom surface of 227 is substantially horizontal (or slightly slanted downward toward the rear side).

Therefore, when the screw member N3 is loosened and falls out backward due to vibration or shock generated in the pachinko game machine 1, there is a high possibility that the screw member N3 falls into the concave groove 227 on the upper wall portion 225A of the second projecting portion 225 (Fig. 22(A)). Further, the screw member N3 that has fallen into the groove 227 is likely to be guided to move rearward in a straight line when vibration or impact occurs. , the screw member N3 is less likely to move rearward than in the region other than the concave groove 227. In other words, the concave groove 227 constitutes a special restricting portion for restricting the screw member N3 moving toward the first guiding passage forming portion 202 from falling into the first guiding passage forming portion 202. As shown in FIG.

Here, all screw members, including the screw member N3, are composed of the head NH and the male threaded portion NS. In many cases, the screw member N3 is tilted in a state in which two points with the tip are in contact (see FIG. 22(A)), so that the tilted screw member N3 as shown in FIG. Occasionally, the head NH swings around the tip of the male threaded portion NS and changes direction. Therefore, if it falls on a flat surface other than the groove 227 on the upper surface of the upper wall portion 225A, or if it deviates from the rear end of the groove 227, it may move linearly backward, or the head may move backward. The NH may also move to turn left or right by rotating its head. That is, as shown by the arrow in FIG. 20, if it moves backward and bends to the right, there is a high possibility that it will fall onto the first cover body 310. There is a high possibility that it will fall on the second cover body 320, and if it moves backward and bends to the left, there is a high possibility that it will fall on the horizontal wall portion 264 in front of the first guide passage.

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, when the screw member N3 that has fallen out of the mounting hole H3 is guided to the rear end of the recessed groove 227 and then bent rearward to the right, the first cover body There is a high possibility of falling onto the cover portion 314 of 310 . As shown in FIG. 22A, when the screw member N3 drops onto the cover portion 314, the screw member N3 tilts so that the male threaded portion NS intersects the long holes 316A to 316C, or the male threaded portion NS falls. Although it is inserted into any one of the long holes 316A to 316C, the head NH is retained on the cover portion 314 without falling from the cover portion 314 into the first guide passage forming portion 202 by being locked without falling off. will do. In other words, the long holes 316A to 316C prevent the screw member N3 from dropping onto the first guide passage forming portion 202 onto the cover portion 314 provided so as to partially cover the upper surface of the first guide passage forming portion 202. It constitutes a predetermined limiter for limiting.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, when the groove 227 is guided to the rear end of the groove 227 and then linearly moved rearward, the cover portion 324 of the second cover body 320 or the first passage is formed. It is likely to fall on horizontal wall 264 of body 203 . As shown in FIG. 22(C), when the threaded member N3 falls onto the cover portion 324, the threaded member N3 tilts so that the male threaded portion NS intersects the grooves 326A to 326C. A portion of the head NH is accommodated in the recessed grooves 326A to 326C, so that the head portion NH stays on the cover portion 324 without falling from the cover portion 324 into the first guide passage forming portion 202 . In other words, the concave grooves 326A to 326C prevent the screw member N3 from falling onto the cover portion 324 provided to partially cover the upper surface of the first guide passage forming portion 202 from falling onto the first guide passage forming portion 202. It constitutes a predetermined limiter for limiting.

In addition, when falling onto the horizontal wall portion 264 of the first passage forming body 203 provided between the rear wall portion 225B of the second projecting portion 225 and the first guide passage forming portion 202, the horizontal wall portion 264 Stay in a state of leaning to. That is, the horizontal wall portion 264 side is arranged between the rear wall portion 225B and the first guide passage forming portion 202 below the upper edge of the upper wall portion 225A and the vertical wall portion 203B, so that the upper wall portion 225A, the vertical wall portion 203B and the horizontal wall portion 264 form a concave portion 290 with an open top, so that the liquid is accommodated and retained in the concave portion 290. As shown in FIG. That is, the recess 290 is provided between the mounting hole H3 around the first guide passage forming portion 202 and the first guide passage forming portion 202, and the screw member that has moved toward the first guide passage forming portion 202 It constitutes a special restricting portion for restricting N3 from falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202 .

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, the screw member N13 is separated forward from the upstream portion of the first guiding passage forming portion 202 in the first passage forming member 203 and slightly above the upper edge of the standing wall portion 203B. It is attached to the attachment hole H13 formed in the attachment piece 263 which is the position. Therefore, when the screw member N13 is loosened and falls backward due to vibration or shock generated in the pachinko game machine 1, there is a possibility that the screw member N13 falls into the recess 280 formed near the rear side of the mounting hole H13 in the horizontal wall portion 264. high (see FIG. 23(A)). More specifically, the horizontal wall portion 264 is arranged between the mounting piece 263 and the first guide passage forming portion 202 below the upper edge of the upper wall portion 225A and the vertical wall portion 203B. A recess 280 smaller than the recess 290 is formed in the vicinity of the mounting hole H13 in the recess 290 opened upward by 225A, the standing wall portion 203B and the horizontal wall portion 264, so that the recess 280 is accommodated and stays in the recess 280. Become.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 20 and 23B, when the screw member N13 is loosened and falls backward due to vibration or shock generated in the pachinko game machine 1, the screw member N13 is arranged on the lower left side of the horizontal wall portion 264. It may drop and stay in the concave portion 214 provided near the right side of the board mounting frame 211 . That is, the recess 214 is provided between the mounting hole H13 around the first guide passage forming portion 202 and the first guide passage forming portion 202, and the screw member that has moved toward the first guide passage forming portion 202 It constitutes a special restricting portion for restricting N13 from falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, the screw member N4 is formed in the mounting member 223 at a position forwardly away from the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and above the upper end edge of the standing wall portion 203B. It is attached to the mounting hole H4. Therefore, if the screw member N4 is loosened and falls backward due to vibration or shock generated in the pachinko game machine 1, there is a high possibility that it will fall onto the upper wall portion 225A of the second projecting portion 225 (see FIG. 24).

As shown in FIGS. 20, 21 and 24, the screw member N4 that has fallen out of the mounting hole H4 moves backward when it bends to the right, moves backward linearly, and moves backward. As shown in FIG. 24, in any of the cases where the board is turned to the right, it falls from the rear end of the upper wall portion 211H of the board mounting frame 211 from above the upper wall portion 225A. The screw member N4 dropped from the rear end of the upper wall portion 211H enters the inside through the opening 234 and stays in the concave portion 242 formed by the substrate mounting frame 211 and the terminal substrate 210, or stays in the substrate mounting frame. Although the male threaded portion NS is inserted into the recessed portion 243 formed between 211 and the standing wall portion 203B, the head portion NH may be retained by being locked without falling off. That is, the recessed portion 242 and the recessed portion 243 are provided between the mounting hole H4 around the first guide passage forming portion 202 and the first guide passage forming portion 202, and move toward the first guide passage forming portion 202. A special restricting portion for restricting the screw member N4 from falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202 is constructed.

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 24, when the screw member N4 drops from the rear end of the upper wall portion 211H, the screw member N4 may be held on the plurality of operation portions 233. As shown in FIG. In addition, when the pachinko machine 1 is fixed to the game island, the plurality of cables C connected to the plurality of connection holes 231 hang down from the upper part of the game island (see FIG. 3). C may also prevent the screw member N4 from falling from the rear end of the upper wall portion 211H. That is, the operating portion 233 and the cable C are provided between the mounting hole H4 around the first guide passage forming portion 202 and the first guide passage forming portion 202, and move toward the first guiding passage forming portion 202. This constitutes a special restricting portion for restricting the falling of the threaded member N4 into the first guide passage forming portion 202. As shown in FIG.

Further, when the screw member N4 falls out of the mounting hole H4 and moves rearward so as to bend to the right, and then crosses the vertical wall portion 203B, the first cover body 203 is removed from the upper surface opening of the first guide passage forming portion 202. 310 , an uncovered region 350 provided between the second cover body 320 and the third cover body 330 , which is not covered by either the second cover body 320 or the third cover body 330 , to the first guide passage forming portion 202 . to fall. The screw member N4 that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 falls out from between the game balls while moving toward the downstream side as the game ball P flows down, and approaches the bottom wall portion 203A. It falls from one of the holes 271B to 271D formed at the position corresponding to the non-coated area 350 in the guide passage forming portion 202 and is discharged out of the first guide passage forming portion 202. FIG.

Further, even if it does not fall from any one of the holes 271B to 271D, it will eventually fall from one of the holes 271A to 271H and be discharged out of the first guide passage forming portion 202. FIG. In other words, the holes 271A to 271H constitute specific restricting portions for restricting movement of the screw member N4 that has fallen into the sphere tank forming portion 201 or the first guide passage forming portion 202 toward the dispensing device 200. As shown in FIG.

On the other hand, when the screw member N4 falls out of the mounting hole H4 and moves backward and bends to the left, and then crosses the standing wall portion 203B, the screw member N4 falls onto the concave portion 336 on the cover portion 334 of the third cover body 330. By dropping, it is accommodated and stays in the concave portion 336 without dropping from the cover portion 334 into the first guide passage forming portion 202 . In other words, the recessed portion 336 restricts the screw member N4 from falling onto the first guide passage forming portion 202, which has fallen onto the cover portion 334 provided so as to partially cover the upper surface of the first guide passage forming portion 202. constitutes a predetermined limit part of

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, the screw member N6 is formed in the substrate mounting frame 211 at a position forwardly away from the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and above the upper end edge of the standing wall portion 203B. is attached to the mounting hole H6. Therefore, if the screw member N6 is loosened and falls backward due to vibration or shock generated in the pachinko game machine 1, there is a high possibility that it will fall onto the upper wall portion 211H of the board mounting frame 211 (see FIG. 25).

As shown in FIGS. 20, 21 and 25, the screw member N6 that has fallen out of the mounting hole H6 is guided by a plurality of ribs 211A extending rearward so as to move linearly rearward. After that, when it moves so as to bend to the right, as shown in FIG. As described with reference to FIG. 16, the cover part 334 covers the upper opening of the first guide passage forming part 202 so as to be inclined downward toward the downstream side (dispensing device 200 side). There is a high possibility that the screw member N6 that has fallen to a position in the vicinity of the upstream side of the ball stopper member 340 will move toward the downstream side.

As shown in FIG. 26, the screw member N6 that has moved downstream comes into contact with the ball stop member 340 provided at the downstream end (left end) of the cover portion 334, which is the lower inclined side, and Left side) is restricted, and stays on the cover portion 334 .

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 26A and 26B, when the ball stop member 340 is in the first state, the right side of the rotating portion 341 is opened, and the front wall portion 341A and the rear wall portion 341B are opened. , the left wall portion 341C, and the screw member N6 can be retained in the space surrounded by the substantially U-shaped wall portion in a plan view. be able to. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 26(C) and 26(D), when the ball stopper member 340 is in the second state, the protruding wall portion 341D is positioned in an upright state so as to cross the passage, so that the screw member N6 is placed on the protruding wall. Since the screw member N6 can be retained on the right side of the portion 341D, the screw member N6 can be held without dropping from the cover portion 334. FIG.

In the second state, the projecting wall portion 341D is arranged so as to intersect the inclination direction, and the front and rear sides are open, so that the screw member N6 whose movement is restricted may drop backward or forward. On the other hand, in the first state, the front wall portion 341A, the rear wall portion 341B, and the left wall portion 341C cover the front wall portion 341A, the rear wall portion 341B, and the left wall portion 341C. It can be retained more reliably than in the second state in which the left wall portion 341C is positioned only on the left side. In other words, the ball stopper member 340 is provided on the side of the dispensing device 200 in the inclined direction of the cover portion 334, and constitutes a specific portion capable of retaining the screw member N6 dropped onto the cover portion 334 in the cover portion 334. are doing.

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, the threaded member N5 is separated from the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 in the mounting member 223 to the front and right side, and is positioned above the upper end edge of the standing wall portion 203B. Although it is attached to the formed mounting hole H5, the first guide passage forming portion 202 is not arranged directly behind the mounting hole H5, and the upper wall portion 225A of the second protruding portion 225 is also cut halfway. Therefore, if the screw member N5 loosens due to vibration or impact and falls out backward, it will drop onto the upper wall portion 225A of the second projecting portion 225, but before it reaches the first guide passage forming portion 202, There is a high possibility of dropping from the upper wall portion 225</b>A to the outside of the first guide passage forming portion 202 .

The screw member N16 is attached to an attachment hole H16 formed in the third cover body 330 on the rear side of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and below the upper edge of the standing wall portion 203B. Therefore, if the screw member N5 is loosened due to vibration, impact, or the like and falls backward, there is a high possibility that it will fall outside the first guide passage forming portion 202 without falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202. .

(action/effect)
As described above, in the pachinko game machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. N3 to N6, etc. are loosened due to vibrations and impacts generated in the pachinko game machine 1 and fall off, and after moving backward on the upper wall portion 225A due to vibrations, impacts, opening and closing of the game machine frame 3, etc., the cover When it falls on the parts 314, 324, 334, the long holes 316A to 316C, the concave grooves 326A to 326C, the concave part 336 and the ball stop member 340 restrict the fall to the first guide passage forming part 202, Since there is a high possibility that the screws will remain on the cover portions 314, 324, 334 without falling from the cover portions 314, 324, 334 into the first guide passage forming portion 202, the screws that have fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 It is possible to prevent the member from moving and mixing into the dispensing device 200 . In addition, since vertical wall portions are formed at the left (downstream) end portions of the long holes 316A to 316C and the grooves 326A to 326C, even if the screw member moves leftward, can be suitably prevented from falling.

Further, as shown in FIG. 28 , on the upper surface of the first guide passage forming portion 202 , the regions other than the uncovered region 350 are covered with the cover portions 314 , 324 and 334 , but the sphere tank forming portion 201 Even if the replenished game ball spills out and gets on the cover parts 314, 324 on the upstream side, the longitudinal dimensions of the long holes 316A to 316C and the concave grooves 326A to 326C are smaller than the diameter 2R of the game ball P. Since the space is also narrow, the game ball P rolls leftward and then falls from the left end of the cover portion 324 to the uncovered area 350 and is returned into the first guide path forming portion 202 .

Therefore, not only can the game ball that has landed on the cover portions 314 and 324 be returned into the first guide path forming portion 202, but also the game ball P can be retained in the long holes 316A to 316C and the concave grooves 326A to 326C. As a result, the space in which the falling screw member N stays is restricted, or it comes into contact with the staying game ball and falls from the uncovered area 350 into the first guide passage forming part 202. can be prevented.

In addition, when the game ball falls on the cover part 334, it either flows down on the cover part 334 toward the left side and is restricted by the ball stopper member 340, or falls outside the first guide passage forming part 202. do.

In addition, in the long holes 316A to 316C as the first retaining portion and the concave grooves 326A to 326C as the second retaining portion, the concave groove 326B is provided at a position closer to the dispensing device 200 than the long holes 316A to 316C, The front-rear dimension L22B is larger than the front-rear dimension L22 of the long hole 316B (L22B>L21). By doing so, the screw member is more likely to be retained in the retention portion as it approaches the dispensing device 200, so that the screw member dropped onto the cover portions 314 and 324 moves and falls into the first guide passage forming portion 202. can be prevented.

On the other hand, the screw members N3 to N6 that have fallen and stayed on the cover portions 314, 324, and 334 move due to vibration, impact, etc., and the non-covered portions provided between the cover portions 324 and 334 move. When it falls from the region 350 into the first guide passage forming portion 202, or after moving backward on the upper wall portion 225A like the screw member N4, it falls from the uncovered region 350 to the first guiding passage forming portion 202. Even if the game ball P falls directly inside the first guide passage forming portion 202, it falls out from between the game balls while moving toward the downstream side and approaches the bottom wall portion 203A. As a result, the screw member dropped into the first guide passage forming portion 202 moves to the dispensing device 200 because it falls from one of the holes 271A to 271H and is discharged outside the first guide passage forming portion 202. Mixing can be suppressed.

A plurality of holes 271A to 271H formed in the bottom wall portion 203A are formed from the midstream portion (near the meandering portion 273) to the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202. There is a region where no hole is formed between the holes 270A and 270B which are formed close to each other and the hole 271A which is the most upstream of the holes 271A to 271H. In this way, since a region in which a plurality of holes are not formed is formed in the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202, the game balls from the ball tank forming portion 201 flow down in a state of being stacked up and down. By doing so, it is possible to suitably prevent a decrease in the strength of the bottom wall portion 203A in the vicinity of the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 to which ball pressure is applied.

In addition, by forming a region in which no holes are formed in the first guide passage forming portion 202 in this manner, the screw member dropped from the first guide passage forming portion 202 is formed in the rear wall portion of the cover body 220. Entry into the cover body 220 through the heat radiation hole 220B (see FIG. 6) or the like can be appropriately suppressed.

In addition, by providing the first cover body 310 and the second cover body 320 at positions corresponding to the regions where the holes are not formed in the first guide passage forming portion 202, the first guide passage forming portion 202 is provided with a screw member. can be suppressed from falling, and it is suppressed that the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 does not fall outside the first guide passage forming portion 202 and is mixed into the dispensing device 200. be able to.

In addition, the hole 271H, which is the largest among the plurality of holes 271A to 271H, is provided at the position closest to the dispensing device 200, so that the screw member can be preferably transferred from the hole 271H to the outside of the first guide passage forming portion 202. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 from entering the dispensing device 200 .

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 27, when a screw member falls into the first guide passage forming portion 202 from the ball tank forming portion 201 or the uncovered region 350, the game ball is are stacked vertically, the screw member is often located above the game ball, but the hole portion 271H is arranged downstream of the straightening plate 338 of the cover portion 334, that is, , Since the game ball is arranged in a position where the game ball is rectified vertically, the screw member easily falls into the hole 271H. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 from entering the dispensing device 200 .

Further, since at least some of the holes 271B to 271D among the plurality of holes 271B to 271H are provided at positions corresponding to the uncovered regions 350 in the first guide passage forming portion 202, the screw member is uncovered. Even if it enters the first guide passage forming portion 202 from the region 350, it can be dropped out of the first guide passage forming portion 202 through the holes 271B to 271D.

Furthermore, at least some of the plurality of holes 271B to 271H, the holes 271E to 271H are provided closer to the dispensing device 200 than the uncovered region 350 in the first guide passage forming portion 202, so that the above-described Even if the game ball dropped from the uncovered area 350 to the first guide passage forming part 202 does not reach the holes 271B to 271D, it moves downward while moving with the flow of the game ball and falls from the holes 271E to 271H. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 from entering the dispensing device 200 .

Further, as shown in FIGS. 22C, 23A, 23B, and 24, the screw members N3 to N6 that have moved toward the first guide passage forming portion 202 are moved toward the first guide passage forming portion. Recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, and 243 as special retention portions that can be retained before reaching 202 are below screw members N3 to N6 attached to attachment holes H3 to H6 as attachment portions. The screw members N3 to N6 provided in the mounting holes H3 to H6 but not retained in the recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, 243 can move toward the cover portions 314, 324, 334. , the screw members N3 to N6 detached from the mounting holes H3 to H6 can be prevented from falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202. As shown in FIG.

Further, since the depths of the recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, 243 are the depths at which the screw members N3 to N6 partially protrude when the screw members N3 to N6 are accommodated, the recesses 280, 290, The screw members N3 to N6 staying in 214, 242, 243 can be easily taken out.

In addition, the recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, and 243, the long holes 316A to 316C, the recessed grooves 326A to 326C, and the recess 336 restrict the falling screw member from falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202. Not only does it block (or hinder), but it is also a retention part that can be retained outside the first guide path formation part 202, so that the screw member can be found when a store clerk or the like at the game parlor performs an inspection or the like. Since it becomes possible to identify which screw member has come off, it becomes easier to take countermeasures against mixing of the screw member into the dispensing device 200 .

Further, the ball stopper member 340 as the specific portion has the rotating portion 341 positioned at the upright position and the front wall portion 341A deviating upward from the slit 344 to guide the game ball in the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the second guide. A first state in which it is possible to flow down to the passage forming portion 204, the rotating portion 341 is positioned at the tilted position, the front wall portion 341A is inserted into the slit 344 and can come into contact with the game ball, and the first guiding passage forming portion 202 is opened. It is possible to change to a second state in which the game ball cannot flow down to the second guide passage forming part 204 (or difficult to flow down), and when the ball stopper member 340 is in the second state, it is in the first state. The screw member can be prevented from being mixed into the dispensing device 200 when the screw member has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 because the screw member is more likely to stay than in the case of .

More specifically, the reason why the ball stopper member 340 is set to the second state is, as described above, when the game ball in the first guide passage or the second guide passage is pulled out, that is, when the game parlor clerk or the like operates the pachinko game machine. 1, the ball stop member 340 is put in the first state, while the pachinko game machine 1 is in operation, that is, when the game hall clerk or the like cannot monitor it. Therefore, it is possible to preferably prevent the screw member from entering the first guide passage forming portion 202 in such a state.

In addition, the sphere tank forming portion 201 is attached to the gaming machine frame 3 at a plurality of locations by screw members N11 to N14 having flange portions F as looseness preventing portions. The screw members N11 to N14 for attaching to the game machine frame 3 are arranged so as to fall outside the first guide path formation part 202 even if they are detached from the game machine frame 3. It is mounted below the upper edge of the vertical wall portion 203B of the tank forming portion 201 . Therefore, the screw members N11 to N14 for attaching the sphere tank forming part 201 are easily loosened due to vibration and the weight of the game ball. Even if the screw members N11 to N14 for attaching the first guide passage forming part 202 come off, they will fall outside the first guide passage forming part 202. can be prevented from being mixed into

Further, among the plurality of screw members for attaching the ball tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the game machine frame 3, a predetermined screw member (for example, the screw member N12) near the periphery of the pachinko game machine 1 ) is also used as a screw member for attaching the ground wire (for example, the ground wire 226), so that the number of screw members (the number of parts) can be reduced. It is possible to prevent the screw member from entering the dispensing device 200 . Incidentally, instead of the ground wire, a screw member for attaching a predetermined member other than the sphere tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202 may also be used.

Further, the screw members N11 to N14 for attaching the ball tank forming part 201 to the game machine frame 3 are attached to the metal plate 222 for reinforcing the game machine frame 3, so that the ball tank forming part 201 can be firmly attached, and vibrations are less likely to occur, so loosening of the screw member can be suitably suppressed.

Further, the screw members N3 to N6 attached to the upper position of the first guide passage forming portion 202 in the game machine frame 3 are screw members having a head portion NH with a small diameter that does not have a flange portion F. Even if it falls into the first guide passage forming portion 202, it can be easily dropped from the holes 271A to 271H, so that the screw member can be prevented from entering the dispenser 200. FIG.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 19(B) and 27, in the area below the first guide passage forming portion 202 on the game board 2 detachable from the frame 3 for the game machine, the fallen screw member is placed backward. Alternatively, an inclined surface (for example, the upper wall portion 220H of the cover body 220) that can flow down to the dispensing device 200 side is provided with a gap from the first guide passage forming portion 202, so that the cover body 220 It is possible to prevent the screw member that has dropped on the upper wall portion 220H from jumping and being mixed into the first guide passage forming portion 202 again.

Also, although not shown, the substrate cases 11A, 12A, 37A, and 91A are provided so as not to protrude rearward from the rear wall portion of the cover body 220, and drop onto the upper wall portion 220H of the cover body 220. The screw members are guided so as to flow backward or toward the dispensing device 200 side, thereby preventing the screw members falling on the upper wall portion 220H from falling into the substrate cases 11A, 12A, 37A, and 91A arranged below. can be prevented.

In addition, the cover body 220 is provided so as to cover the image display device 5 provided on the back side of the game board 2, the production device having a movable body, and the production control board 12, so that the drive source of these is generated. A plurality of heat radiation holes 220B for releasing heat are formed in the upper part of the rear wall (see FIG. 6). It is preferably of a size that does not allow NH to be inserted. In addition, since there is a high possibility that screw members will fall from the upper holes 270A, 270B, and 271A to 271H of the upper wall portion 220H arranged directly below the first guide passage forming portion 202, the heat radiation hole 220B is Preferably, it is formed at least at positions not corresponding to the holes 270A, 270B, and 271A to 271H in the upper wall portion 220H, or formed at a portion other than the upper wall portion 220H (for example, the rear wall portion). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the falling screw member from falling into the cover body 220 and adversely affecting the image display device 5, the performance device having the movable body, the performance control board 12, and the like.

(Modification 1)
Next, Modification 1 of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29A is a schematic rear view showing a cover portion as a modification, and FIG. 29B is a schematic rear view showing a state in which cables are wired so as to intersect the cover portion.

In the above-described embodiment, the guiding passage forming portion that forms the guiding passage for guiding the game balls of the ball tank forming portion 201 to the payout device 200 is the first ball tank forming portion extending to the left side so as to incline downward. It has a guiding passage forming portion 202 and a second guiding passage forming portion 204 extending downward from the lower left end portion of the first guiding passage forming portion 202. As shown in FIG. 16, the cover part 334 of the third cover body 330, which is provided so as to partially cover the upper surface, is provided with a ball stopper member 340 protruding upward from the upper surface of the left end. In the above, the configuration in which the screw member N moving to the left on the cover portion 334 can be received and retained has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the cover portion of Modification 1 Like 360, the left end portion 360R of the cover portion 360 may be formed in an R shape that curves toward the second guide passage forming portion 204 below.

By doing so, the game ball P and the screw member N that have fallen onto the cover portion 360 do not remain on the cover portion 360 when moving toward the left end side, and the first guide passage forming portion 202 Since the screw member N directly falls outside the first guide passage forming portion 202 from the left end portion of the screw member N, it is possible to prevent the screw member N from being mixed into the dispensing device 200 .

Further, as shown in FIG. 29B, in the cover portion 360 in which a recess 361 capable of retaining the screw member N is formed in the upper surface thereof, a second A cable CH may be provided so as to intersect the flowing direction of the game ball in the 1 guide passage forming portion 202 .

By doing so, the movement of the screw member N and the game ball P, which are retained in the recessed portion 361 but may move due to the inclination, can be restricted by the cable C so as to be retained.

(description of variations and applications)
For example, in the above-described embodiment, screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 for attaching the mounting member 223 and the first passage forming body 203 to the game machine frame 3 of the pachinko game machine 1, Screw members (not shown) attached to other parts of the game machine 1, screw members (not shown) for assembling the building blocks that make up the game island, and various devices (for example, , replenishment device 150, etc.) and the like have been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. All screw members such as screw members that have remained in the pachinko game machine 1 for some reason, such as forgetting to install them during maintenance at the place, can be targeted, but at least they are installed in the pachinko game machine 1 in advance. It is preferable that the screw member can be prevented from being mixed into the dispensing device 200 .

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as a storage portion capable of storing game media, the sphere tank forming portion 201 formed in a box-like shape with an open upper surface by the bottom wall portion 203A and the vertical wall portion B is applied. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as long as the storage portion can store game balls, the front-rear dimension is larger than the front-rear dimension of the first guide passage-forming portion 202 like the ball tank-forming portion 201 described above. It does not have to be long, and the front-to-rear dimension may be substantially the same as or shorter than that of the first guide passage forming portion 202 . In addition, as long as the game balls supplied from the supply device 150 can be received, the upper surface does not necessarily have to be open.

In the above-described embodiment, the payout device 200 capable of paying out game balls with a rotatable sprocket is applied as a payout unit capable of paying out game media, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, it may be a payout device that can pay out game balls by members other than sprockets.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the bottom wall portion 203A and the vertical wall portion 203B serve as the guide passage forming portion having an open upper surface and forming a guide passage for guiding the game media in the storage portion to the payout portion. Although the configuration in which the groove-shaped first guide passage forming portion 202 is applied is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the guide is composed of a tubular member having an opening formed in a part of the upper surface. It may be a passage forming portion, and the shape, size, and the like can be variously changed. In addition, the width dimension (front-rear dimension) of the ball tank forming part 201 may be substantially the same or larger, and the game balls may be guided so as to flow down in a plurality of rows.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the ball tank forming portion 201 as a storage portion capable of storing game balls and the first guide passage whose upper surface is open and which guides the game balls in the ball tank forming portion 201 to the payout device 200 are provided. Although the form in which the first guiding passage forming portion 202 to be formed is integrally formed is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the sphere tank forming portion 201 and the first guiding passage forming portion 202 are separately formed. The members may be integrally formed by assembling them with screw members or the like. In this case, the threaded member for assembling the sphere tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202 is also subject to the threaded member of the present invention.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the form in which the screw member can enter from the top opening of the first guide passage forming portion 202 was illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first guide passage forming portion 202 The screw member may enter through a hole or a notch formed on the vertical wall side. In addition, when the screw member may be mixed in the second guide passage forming portion 204, a predetermined limiting portion for limiting the fall of the screw member to the second guide passage forming portion 204, or the second guide passage forming portion 204 A specific restricting portion or the like for restricting the movement of the dropped screw member to the dispenser 200 may be provided.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the first cover body 310, the second cover body 320, and the third cover body 330 are applied as the cover parts provided so as to partially cover the upper surface of the first guide passage forming part 202. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the entire area of the upper surface of the first guide passage forming portion 202 may be covered with the cover portion.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the cover portion that covers a partial region of the upper surface of the first guide passage forming portion 202 may be configured by a member separate from the first guide passage forming portion 202, It may be integrally formed with the first guide passage forming portion 202 in advance. In other words, the first guide passage forming portion 202 may be formed in advance in a square tubular shape.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the screw member is retained on the cover portion as a predetermined limiting portion for limiting the drop of the screw member dropped onto the cover portions 314, 324, 334 to the first guide passage forming portion 202. Although the embodiments in which the elongated holes 316A to 316C as the holes that allow the thread to be inserted, the grooves 326A to 326C and the recess 336 as the recesses are applied, the present invention is not limited to this, and the screw member A fall restriction part (drop obstruction part) that can restrict (or obstruct) the fall from the cover part, and a movement restriction part (movement obstruction part) that can restrict (or obstruct) the movement of the screw member on the cover part Alternatively, it may be a drop guide portion such as an inclined surface that guides the screw member so that it can fall from the cover portion to the outside of the first guide passage forming portion 202 . Note that the means capable of restricting or inhibiting falling or movement may be not only the protrusions and recesses, but also magnets capable of attracting metal screw members, adhesive parts capable of adhering screw members, and the like.

In other words, the predetermined limit portion for limiting the drop of the screw member dropped onto the cover portions 314 , 324 , 334 onto the first guide passage forming portion 202 is Not only those that make it impossible to fall, but also those that make it difficult to fall.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a plurality of specific restricting portions are provided in the first guiding passage forming portion 202 to restrict the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the first guiding passage forming portion 202 toward the dispensing device 200. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 toward the dispensing device 200 is restricted ( Alternatively, it may be a movement restricting portion (movement inhibiting portion) capable of inhibiting movement. It should be noted that the means capable of restricting or inhibiting the movement to the dispensing device 200 side is not limited to the protrusions and recesses, but may be a magnet capable of attracting a metal screw member, an adhesive portion capable of adhering the screw member, or the like. However, it is preferable to provide them at positions that do not affect the flow of the game ball (for example, the corners between the bottom wall portion 203A and the vertical wall portion 203B, which are not in contact with the game ball).

That is, the specific restricting portion provided in the first guide passage forming portion 202 for restricting the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the dispensing device 200 is the dispensing device 200 for the screw member. If the movement to the side can be restricted, the movement of the screw member mixed in the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the dispensing device 200 side is not necessarily disabled, and the movement can be made difficult. Anything is fine.

Further, when the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the dispensing device 200 is restricted (restricted, inhibited) by the specific restricting portion provided in the first guide passage forming portion 202, the movement is restricted. There is a high possibility that the screw member that is restricted and stays in the first guide passage restricts the downflow of the game ball, resulting in ball clogging. When ball clogging occurs, the replenishment error notification is executed as described above, so that the game hall clerk or the like opens the game machine frame 3 to form the ball tank forming part 201 on the back or the first guide passage. There is a high possibility that the state of the game ball in the section 202 will be visually inspected. At this time, since the screw member remains in the first guide passage forming portion 202 without moving to the dispensing device 200, it becomes easier for the store clerk or the like to identify that the ball clogging was caused by the screw member. Appropriate measures can be taken.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, all of the plurality of holes 271A to 271H have a size that allows the screw member to drop, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the plurality of holes 271A 271H are formed so that the screw member can be dropped, the other holes may not be capable of dropping the screw member. Further, the shape and size of the plurality of holes 271A to 271H are arbitrary and can be changed in various ways without being limited to the above-described forms.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the main board 11 and the production control board 12 are applied as the first board attached to the lower position than the first guide passage forming part 202, but the present invention is limited to this. Other substrates such as relay substrates may also be targeted.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the terminal substrate 210 is applied as the second substrate attached above the first guide path forming portion 202, but the present invention is not limited to this. , other substrates such as a relay substrate may be used as the second substrate.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the main board 11 and the effect control board 12 as the first board are exemplified by the form in which the board cases 11A and 12A in which these boards are accommodated are attached to the game board 2 by the screw members N20 and N21. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the various substrates as the first substrate may be attached directly to the game board 2 or the game machine frame 3 without interposing the substrate case.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the main board 11 and the effect control board 12 as the first board are configured such that the board cases 11A and 12A in which each board is accommodated are screw members N20 and N21, that is, screw members are used. The terminal board 210 as the second board is attached to the game board 2 by an attachment method, using locking means consisting of a plurality of restricting portions 235 and locking portions 236 as mounting means different from screw members, that is, Although a form in which the board mounting frame 211 is mounted by a mounting method different from the mounting method using a screw member is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. It may include attachment means, adhesion means using an adhesive or the like.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the screw member is provided around the first guide passage forming portion 202 to restrict the screw member moving toward the first guide passage forming portion 202 from falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202. As a special restricting portion for making the first guiding passage forming portion 202 of the screw member, the recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, and 243 are applied, but the present invention is not limited to this. a fall restricting portion (fall inhibiting portion) capable of regulating (or inhibiting) the fall of, a movement regulating portion (movement inhibiting portion) capable of regulating (or inhibiting) movement of the screw member to the first guide passage forming portion 202, , a drop guide portion such as an inclined surface that guides the screw member so that it can drop out of the first guide passage forming portion 202, or the like. In addition, as a means capable of restricting or inhibiting the falling or movement of the first guide passage forming portion 202, not only the convex portion and the concave portion, but also a magnet capable of attracting a metal screw member and a magnet capable of adhering the screw member. It may be an adhesive portion or the like.

In other words, the special restricting portion for restricting the falling of the detached screw member to the first guide passage forming portion 202 is not only the portion that disables the dropping of the screw member to the first guide passage forming portion 202, Any material can be used as long as it makes it difficult to fall. For example, a convex portion as a fall restricting portion (fall inhibiting portion) and a concave portion or a hole as a movement restricting portion (movement inhibiting portion) may be provided at predetermined positions of the upper wall portion 225A or the like.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the periphery of the first guide passage forming portion 202 in which the concave portions 280, 290, 214, 242, 243, etc., are provided as the special restricting portion is in the vicinity of the front standing wall portion 203B. Although it was exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least it is provided in the vicinity of the vertical wall portion 203B as long as it is between the mounting portion (mounting hole) to which the screw member is mounted and the guide passage forming portion. For example, it may be provided at a position closer to the attached portion than the guide passage forming portion between the attached portion and the guide passage forming portion of the screw member.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the first Although the form which applied the ball stop member 340 which can change to the 1st state which makes the game ball of the guidance passage formation part 202 flow down, and the 2nd state which makes it difficult or impossible to flow down was illustrated, this invention It is not limited to this, and any member provided on the side of the payout device 200 in the inclined direction (lower side of the inclination) of the cover portion 334 may restrict the movement of the screw member even if it does not have a ball stopper function. It may be a convex portion, a standing wall portion, or a wiring retainer that can (or obstruct).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the ball stopper member 340 as the specific portion is provided on the payout device 200 side in the inclined direction of the cover portion 334, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, the specifying portion may be provided at the end portion of the dispensing device 200 side of the cover portions 314 and 324 as long as it is provided at the dispensing device 200 side end portion of one cover portion.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the ball stopper member 340 as the specific portion is configured by a member separate from the cover portion 334, but the present invention is not limited to this. A specific portion (a ball stop portion) may be integrally formed with a part of the member that constitutes the cover portion 334 .

Further, in the above embodiment, as an example of the locking portion, the flange portion F (washer) having a larger diameter than the head portion NH of the screw members N1, N2, N11 to N16 and integrally formed with the head portion NH However, the present invention is not limited to this, instead of the flange portion F, a washer or the like that is formed separately from the screw member and can be attached to the screw member may be used, or the head Also included are the anti-rotation portion of the head NH formed in an uneven shape on the back surface of the NH and the flange portion F (washer), an adhesive agent, and the like. Further, the threaded member is not limited to one that can be attached with a tool such as a screwdriver, but may also be a thumbscrew, or includes a member such as a screw or a bolt that detaches from the attached portion when loosened.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the ball tank forming portion 201 as the storage portion is attached to the gaming machine frame 3 at a plurality of locations by the screw members N11 to N14 having the flange portion F as the locking portion to form the ball tank. The screw members N11 to N14 for attaching the portion 201 and the first guiding passage forming portion 202 to the game machine frame 3 are designed so as to fall outside the first guiding passage forming portion 202 even if they come off the game machine frame 3. , the first guiding passage forming portion 202 and the sphere tank forming portion 201 are mounted below the upper edge of the standing wall portion 203B of the sphere tank forming portion 201, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even if the position is above the upper end edge of the vertical wall portion 203B of the guiding passage forming portion 202 or the ball tank forming portion 201, for example, it may be displaced in the horizontal direction from the position directly above the first guiding passage forming portion 202 or the ball tank forming portion 201. If the screw member is attached at a non-directly above position, it is possible to prevent the screw member from directly falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202 . Further, the dropped screw member is guided to fall outside the first guide passage forming portion 202 by a predetermined guiding portion (for example, a concave groove formed in the upper wall portion 225A). good too.

Further, the predetermined restriction portion, the specific restriction portion, the special restriction portion, and the specific portion in the above-described embodiments are not only the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 attached to the pachinko game machine 1, but also the pachinko game such as game islands. Although the embodiment of restricting or regulating (obstructing) the movement of the screw member other than the machine 1 to the payout device 200 has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least the screw member is attached to the pachinko game machine 1. Restricts or restricts the movement of the screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16, and the screw members N3 to N6 attached above the first guide passage forming portion 202 and the sphere tank forming portion 201 to the dispensing device 200. It is preferably formed in a size and shape that allow (inhibition).

(Characteristic part 053SG)
Next, the form for implementing the game machine in the characterizing portion 053SG according to the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 30-1 to 30-24.

The game machine in the characteristic part 053SG is a pachinko game machine or a slot machine installed in a game hall or the like, and in particular, as shown in FIG. Equipped with a game control board. As the game machine described below, the pachinko game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment can be applied, and the main board 11 of the above-described embodiment can be applied as the game control board, and the effect control board 12 can be applied as the effect control board. is.

As shown in FIG. 30-1, the game control board is connected with a plurality of input components such as various switches and sensors for detecting input conditions according to the progress of the game. Input components include, for example, detection switches that detect operations by the player, detection switches that detect the passage of game media such as game balls and medals, sensors that specify the positions of movable objects used in games such as reels, detection switches used for various settings such as the degree of advantage of the door, and detection switches for detecting door opening, abnormalities, and the like.

In addition, the game control board, as shown in FIG. 30-1, is equipped with an input circuit that detects the input signal from these input components, and the detection status of the input signal from the input component by the input circuit is specified. The input data is transmitted to the game control microcomputer and used for game control by the game control microcomputer.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 30-1, the game control board is connected to a plurality of output components such as indicators, LEDs, motors, solenoids, etc., which perform output control according to the progress of the game. Output components include, for example, a display that displays according to the lottery result, a display that displays the progress of the game and the state of the gaming machine, a display that instructs the player on how to operate, and a value that the player owns. , an LED that indicates the game state, an LED that notifies the occurrence of an abnormality, a motor, a solenoid, and the like that operate movable parts used in the game, such as reels and variable winning devices.

In addition, the game control board, as shown in FIG. 30-1, is provided with an output circuit that outputs an output signal to the corresponding output component based on the output data transmitted from the game control microcomputer. , the game control microcomputer transmits output data to the output circuit, thereby controlling the output components according to the progress of the game.

In addition, the game control microcomputer, the input circuit and the output circuit are connected via a data bus, and input data is transmitted from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. The transmission of the output data of is through a shared data bus.

Also, not all input circuits are connected via a shared data bus, but some input circuits are connected directly to the game control microcomputer without a data bus, and are connected to a shared data bus. Input data is transmitted from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer without going through.

The output circuits are all connected via a shared data bus. The configuration may be such that the output data is transmitted from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit without passing through the data bus.

In addition, the data bus is connected to an external output terminal, and the output data from the game control microcomputer is output to the external device as an external output signal. It is possible to inspect the performance of the game machine using the output data output as.

Next, the game control board provided in the gaming machine of the present invention will be explained using the following Examples 1 to 3.

The structure of the game control board in Example 1 will be described. The game control board has electronic components mounted on one surface and no electronic components mounted on the other surface, and has a configuration in which the terminals of the electronic components are soldered. The surface is called a mounting surface, and the surface on which no electronic component is mounted and terminals of the electronic component are soldered is called a soldering surface.

30-2 is a diagram showing the mounting surface of the game control board in this embodiment, and FIG. 30-3 is a diagram showing the soldering surface of the game control board in this embodiment. As shown in FIGS. 30-2 and 30-3, the game control board has a rectangular shape consisting of a pair of short sides extending in the vertical direction and a pair of long sides extending in the horizontal direction, and has an insulating printed board. Consists of In addition, the game control board is formed with a plurality of through holes passing through the mounting surface and the soldering surface, and the mounting surface and the soldering surface of the game control board are configured with conductors so as to appropriately connect the through holes. A plurality of wiring patterns are formed. In addition, in the area where the wiring pattern is not formed on the mounting surface and the soldering surface of the game control board, a ground area is formed by an insulating area made of an insulator and a conductor and forming a ground. The ground area is a solid ground formed over substantially the entire area other than the area where the wiring pattern and the insulating area are formed on the mounting surface and the soldering surface of the game control board.

As shown in FIG. 30-2, wiring patterns extending in the vertical direction are arranged on the mounting surface in a larger proportion than wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction, and on the other hand, as shown in FIG. , more wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction are arranged than wiring patterns extending in the vertical direction. Therefore, the wiring patterns extending in the vertical direction are concentrated on the mounting surface, and the wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction are concentrated on the soldering surface. Designs such as bypassing wiring patterns can be reduced as much as possible.

Further, as shown in FIG. 30-3, the wiring pattern arranged on the solder surface has many wires extending in the same horizontal direction as the long side, so the wiring pattern distance is longer than the wiring pattern arranged on the mounting surface. However, as mentioned above, electronic components are mounted only on the mounting surface, not on the soldering surface, and the relatively long wiring pattern placed on the soldering surface is obstructed by the electronic components. is avoided.

Further, when branching the wiring pattern formed on the solder surface, one of the branched wiring patterns is formed on the solder surface, and the other is formed on the mounting surface through the through holes. One wiring pattern of the branch destination is detoured, and the one wiring pattern of the branch destination and the other wiring pattern do not cross each other on the same plane.

FIG. 30-4 is a diagram showing the mounting surface of the game control board in the present embodiment in which the input circuit and the output circuit are mounted.

As shown in FIG. 30-4, electronic components such as the aforementioned game control microcomputer, input circuit, and output circuit are mounted on the mounting surface of the game control board. These electronic components include electronic components having one or more terminal rows each composed of a plurality of terminals arranged in one direction. Most of the electronic components having these terminal rows are arranged along the long side of the game control board, that is, in the horizontal direction. As mentioned above, on the mounting surface, there is a large percentage of wiring patterns extending in the vertical direction, and electronic components with terminal rows are often arranged along the long side of the game control board, that is, arranged in the horizontal direction. By doing so, it is possible to directly connect the wiring pattern extending in the vertical direction to the terminal rows arranged in the horizontal direction without changing the direction of the wiring pattern.

30-4, the input circuit and the output circuit among the electronic components having a terminal row are formed in a rectangular shape, and are provided with a recessed notch on one of the short sides and a The model number is printed so that the orientation of the part can be specified by the orientation of the notch and the printing direction of the model number. As shown in FIG. 30-4, the input circuit is arranged so that the notch is on the left side in FIG. 30-4 and the model number is printed from left to right. 30-4, the notch faces right and the model number is printed from right to left. It is possible to specify whether the circuit is present or whether it is an output circuit.

FIG. 30-5 is a diagram showing the configuration of the data bus formed on the soldering surface of the game control board in this embodiment, and FIG. It is a figure which shows the wiring pattern which branched.

The game control board is formed with a data bus shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and transmission of output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit as described above. . The data bus formed on the game control board of this embodiment is composed of eight wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction formed on the solder surface, and as shown in FIG. It consists of eight wiring patterns formed so as to extend laterally toward the right side from through holes to which terminals of a game control microcomputer mounted on the left side are connected. As shown in FIG. 30-6, data buses, input circuits, output circuits, and other electronic components are connected to a wiring pattern that is branched on the mounting surface side through through holes and extends vertically in the vertical direction. connected by

When connecting the game control microcomputer and electronic components such as input circuits and output circuits separated in the horizontal direction through the data bus, first, the terminals of the game control microcomputer extend in the horizontal direction. It is connected to a data bus on the surface, branches through a through hole at a position where the electronic component is mounted, and branches into a wiring pattern on the mounting surface side extending in the vertical direction toward the electronic component, and is connected to the electronic component. Therefore, it is not necessary to bypass the wiring pattern branched from the data bus, and it is possible to efficiently connect the game control microcomputer and the electronic parts separated in the horizontal direction. In addition, since the wiring pattern forming the data bus is formed on the solder surface on which electronic components are not mounted, the data bus is less likely to be affected by noise from the electronic components. Since the wiring pattern branched to the mounting surface side through the hole is used for connection, the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side is shortened, and the influence of noise from the electronic components during this period is reduced.

As shown in FIG. 30-5, the wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction forming the data bus are not formed in a straight line, but divided into a plurality of wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction. The length of each divided wiring pattern (L1 to L8) is an antenna that maximizes resonance according to the bus clock (frequency used when transmitting data on the data bus) when transmitting data on the data bus. It is formed shorter than the length (λ (bus clock)/2). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wiring pattern forming the data bus from having an antenna length corresponding to the bus clock and unintentionally emitting radio waves due to resonance. Furthermore, even if the length of the antenna is half the length corresponding to the bus clock, it may reflect off the surface of the substrate and cause strong resonance. The lengths (L1 to L8) are formed to a length that is not half the antenna length at which resonance is maximized according to the bus clock. Emission of radio waves is also prevented.

In addition, the bus clock varies depending on the game control microcomputer and the oscillator to be installed, but the length of each divided wiring pattern (L1 to L8) depends on the bus clock, which is the maximum frequency assumed among them. The length of the antenna is shorter than the length of the antenna that maximizes resonance, and the length of the antenna is less than half the length of the antenna that maximizes resonance according to the bus clock that has the maximum frequency. Therefore, even when data is transmitted with a bus clock frequency lower than the expected maximum frequency, unintended radio waves are prevented from being generated.

As shown in FIG. 30-5, a plurality of divided horizontal wiring patterns forming a data bus are arranged in an oblique right direction or an oblique left direction. They are connected across wiring patterns extending in different directions. Further, the wiring pattern in the horizontal direction and the wiring pattern in the oblique right direction or the oblique left direction are connected while being bent at an obtuse angle. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unintended emission of radio waves from the bent portion of the wiring pattern.

Also, as shown in FIG. 30-5, mounting through through holes (A to F shown in FIG. 30-5) provided on oblique wiring patterns that connect a plurality of divided horizontal wiring patterns. Wiring patterns on the surface side (wiring patterns connected to A to F shown in FIG. 30-6) are branched, and diagonal wiring patterns that connect the divided horizontal wiring patterns to each other. are used to branch the wiring pattern that constitutes the data bus.

In addition, in the game control board in the first embodiment, in order to make the length of the wiring pattern in the horizontal direction shorter than the antenna length that maximizes resonance, the wiring pattern in the horizontal direction is divided into a plurality of wiring patterns, and a plurality of In this configuration, the horizontal wiring patterns divided into two are connected to each other by oblique wiring patterns formed on the same soldering surface. In other words, horizontal wiring patterns are alternately formed on the soldering surface and the mounting surface so that the horizontal wiring pattern length is shorter than the antenna length at which resonance is maximized. Also good. In such a configuration, it is preferable to branch the wiring pattern in the horizontal direction at the point where the wiring pattern is switched from the soldering surface or the mounting surface to the other surface. , the wiring patterns forming the data bus can be branched without intersecting on the same plane.

Figure 30-7 is a diagram showing the configuration of the ground area formed on the mounting surface of the game control board in this embodiment, Figure 30-8 is formed on the solder surface of the game control board in this embodiment FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the configuration of a ground area;

As shown in FIGS. 30-7 and 30-8, the ground area is formed over almost the entire area other than the area where the wiring pattern and the insulating area are formed on the mounting surface and soldering surface of the game control board. The ground area formed on the game control board comprises a first ground area and a second ground area electrically separated via an insulating area. In both the mounting surface and the soldering surface, the first ground area is formed in the left area of the game control board, and the second ground area is formed in the right area of the game control board.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 30-7, a wiring pattern that transmits a low voltage (Vcc (+5 V) in this embodiment) signal such as a game control microcomputer, an input circuit, an output circuit, etc. is connected. Electronic components (low-voltage components) are mounted on the left area where the first ground area is formed, and ground terminals of the low-voltage components are connected to the first ground area. On the other hand, electronic parts (high voltage parts) to which wiring patterns for transmitting high voltage (VLD (+24 V) in this embodiment) signals are connected, such as drive circuits for operating motors, solenoids, etc. It is mounted on the right area where two ground areas are formed, and the ground terminal of the high voltage component is connected to the second ground area. This prevents unintended reverse flow of current from the high voltage component to the low voltage component via the ground area. In addition, since the first ground area and the second ground area are formed on opposite side sides of the game control board, interference with each other is prevented even if a potential difference occurs temporarily.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 30-9, a capacitor is provided between the first ground area and the second ground area. Even if a potential difference occurs temporarily, current is prevented from flowing from one ground area to the other ground area.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 30-7 and 30-8, an insulating region in which no wiring pattern is formed is formed between the first ground region and the second ground region on the mounting surface and the soldering surface. The ground area and the second ground area are electrically separated. Further, the first ground region and the second ground region on the mounting surface and the first ground region and the second ground region on the soldering surface are formed so as to overlap each other, and the first ground region and the second ground region on the mounting surface are formed so as to overlap each other. Since the insulating region that separates the ground regions and the insulating region that separates the first ground region and the second ground region on the solder surface are also formed so as to overlap each other, from one surface of the mounting surface and the solder surface to the other surface Mutual interference is prevented even if a potential difference occurs temporarily.

30-10 is a diagram showing the configuration of the connector mounted on the mounting surface of the game control board in this embodiment, FIG. 30-11 is a connector formed on the soldering surface of the game control board in this embodiment FIG. 30-12 is a diagram showing a peripheral wiring pattern, and FIG. 30-12 is a diagram showing a state in which the game control board in this embodiment is housed in the board case.

As shown in FIG. 30-10, the game control board has a plurality of connectors CN1 to CN7 mounted near the lower side of the mounting surface for connecting wires from the outside of the game control board. In the wiring from the game control board, there are a signal that triggers the lottery, a signal that changes the set value that defines the advantage for the player such as the probability of the lottery, and a signal that changes the set value. Wiring for inputting or outputting signals related to the degree of advantage in the game, such as signals, signals for displaying information advantageous to the player on an external display, wiring for inputting detection signals for error cancellation operations, backup power supply wiring as a supply line for

As shown in FIG. 30-10, the terminals provided on the connectors CN1 to CN7 are not directly connected to the wiring patterns formed on the mounting surface, that is, the surface on which the connectors CN1 to CN7 are mounted. -11, it is connected to a wiring pattern formed on the solder side, that is, the side opposite to the side on which the connectors CN1 to CN7 are mounted. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 30-10, no wiring pattern is formed around the mounting portion of the connectors CN1 to CN7 on the mounting surface, and information about the connector such as the connector number is printed therearound. ing. The information printed around the mounting portions of the connectors CN1 to CN7 is not limited to the connector number, and may be configured to print information on the number of terminals, the direction of the connector, the connection destination, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 30-11, the wiring pattern connected to the terminals provided on the connectors CN1 to CN7 on the solder surface passes through the through holes at the end opposite to the side connected to the terminals, and the wiring on the mounting surface passes through. connected to the pattern. In particular, the through holes a to h shown in FIGS. 30-10 and 30-11 are through holes to which the terminals of electronic components are connected, and the wiring patterns connected to the terminals provided in the connectors CN1 to CN7 are It is provided at the place where it is first connected to the electronic component. Therefore, it is possible to connect from the solder surface to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface using the through holes for connecting to the electronic component.

As shown in FIGS. 30-12(A) and 30-12(B), the game control board is attached to the game machine while being accommodated in the board case. The substrate case can be sealed by a one-way screw, sealing seal, welding, or the like, and once sealed, it is difficult to open without leaving a trace. Therefore, by attaching the game control board to the game machine in a state where it is housed in the board case, it has a structure that prevents fraudulent use of the game control board.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 30-12 (A) and (B), the substrate case is provided with a covering portion that covers the area around the connectors CN1 to CN7 when the game control substrate is housed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 30-10, the wiring pattern is not formed in the area covered by the covering portion of the board case of the mounting surface of the game control board, and the wiring pattern is formed avoiding the area. there is The covering portion is provided with insertion holes having substantially the same shape as the connectors CN1 to CN7, and the connectors CN1 to CN7 are exposed to the outside through these insertion holes so that wiring from the outside can be connected.

Even when the game control board is housed in the board case in this way, since the connectors CN1 to CN7 are connected to wiring from the outside, a slight gap is generated around the connectors CN1 to CN7. are not directly connected to the wiring patterns formed on the mounting surface, that is, the surface on which the connectors CN1 to CN7 are mounted, and are not directly connected to the solder surface, that is, the surface on which the connectors CN1 to CN7 are mounted. It is designed to be connected to the wiring pattern formed on the opposite side, and the wiring pattern connected to the terminals of the connectors CN1 to CN7 is short-circuited from the periphery of the portion where the connectors CN1 to CN7 are exposed from the substrate case. Fraudulent acts such as disconnection are prevented.

In addition, the periphery of the mounting portion of the connectors CN1 to CN7 on the mounting surface is covered by the covering portion of the board case, and the area covered by the covering portion includes wiring connected to the terminals provided on the connectors CN1 to CN7. No wiring patterns including patterns are formed, and the wiring patterns connected to the terminals provided in the connectors CN1 to CN7 are connected to the wiring patterns on the mounting surface in areas other than the covering portion, The wiring patterns connected to the terminals of the connectors CN1 to CN7 from around the portions where the connectors CN1 to CN7 are exposed from the substrate case are reliably prevented from being short-circuited or broken.

FIG. 30-13 is a circuit diagram relating to the supply of backup power to the game control microcomputer mounted on the game control board in this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 30-13, Vcc (+5V) is generated by the power board and connected to the power input terminal Vcc of the game control microcomputer mounted on the game control board. In addition, Vcc (+5V) is branched from the line supplied to the game control microcomputer on the power supply board, and is connected to the charging capacitor through the backflow prevention diode, and the backflow prevention diode and the charging capacitor A line branched between is connected to the backup power supply input terminal VBB of the game control microcomputer.

While the power is being supplied, Vcc (+5V) is supplied as a drive power source for the game control microcomputer, and the charging capacitor is charged. On the other hand, when the power supply is stopped, the supply of Vcc (+5V) is stopped, so that the backup power supply VBB charged in the charging capacitor is supplied to the game control microcomputer, The game control microcomputer is supplied with the backup power supply VBB so that the data stored in the RAM of the game control microcomputer is retained. In this embodiment, the backup power supply is configured to be supplied from a power supply board outside the game control board, but may be configured to be supplied from a circuit provided within the game control board.

30-14 is a diagram showing a wiring pattern for power supply formed on the solder surface of the game control board in this embodiment, and FIG. 30-15 is formed on the mounting surface of the game control board in this embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the relationship between the wiring pattern formed on the soldered surface and the wiring pattern for power supply formed on the solder surface;

As shown in FIG. 30-14, on the soldering surface of the game control board, wiring patterns Vcc1 to 3 for supplying normal power and wiring patterns VBB for supplying backup power are provided as wiring patterns constituting power supply lines. , are formed. The wiring patterns Vcc1 to 3, as shown in FIGS. 30-14 and 30-15, are configured by a wiring pattern formed on the solder surface and a wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface, and are mounted on the game control board. Connected to electronic components. On the other hand, the wiring pattern VBB, as shown in FIG. 30-14, is composed only of the wiring pattern formed on the solder surface. That is, the wiring pattern VBB is connected to the backup power input terminal VBB of the game control microcomputer only through the wiring pattern formed on the soldering surface without being connected to the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface. That is, the wiring pattern VBB supplied with the backup power supply VBB from the power supply board is formed only on the solder surface. Therefore, the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power supply VBB is supplied does not need to detour the electronic parts mounted on the mounting surface, and the distance of the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer can be shortened, so that noise from the outside can be reduced. This prevents the data stored in the RAM from being corrupted by noise.

Further, as shown in FIG. 30-15, on the mounting surface, a solid ground is formed in the portion where the wiring pattern VBB is formed on the solder surface side. Therefore, the wiring pattern VBB on the solder surface side is less susceptible to noise because the solid ground formed on the mounting surface blocks noise. Further, as shown in FIG. 30-15, among the wiring patterns formed on the solder surface, the wiring pattern VBB for supplying the backup power is closer to the mounting surface than the wiring patterns Vcc1 to 3 for supplying the normal power. In the region corresponding to , the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface side, especially the wiring pattern used for signal transmission, is formed at a position where there are few crossing points. Therefore, the influence of noise on the wiring pattern VBB to which backup power is supplied from the wiring pattern used for signal transmission formed on the mounting surface side is suppressed as much as possible.

In the present embodiment, among the wiring patterns formed on the soldering surface, the wiring pattern VBB for supplying the backup power supply is located in the corresponding region on the mounting surface side rather than the wiring patterns Vcc1 to 3 for supplying the normal power supply. is formed at a position where there are few intersections with the wiring pattern used for signal transmission formed on the mounting surface side. For example, a wiring pattern that transmits a signal related to the player's profit is closer to the mounting surface than a wiring pattern that transmits a signal that is not directly related to the player's history, such as a signal for controlling output parts. In the corresponding area, the wiring pattern used for signal transmission formed on the mounting surface side is formed at a position where there are few crossing points, so that the signal formed on the mounting surface side can be used for transmission. The influence of noise on the wiring pattern, through which the signal related to the profit of the player is transmitted from the wiring pattern, is suppressed as much as possible.

In addition, among the wiring patterns formed on the solder surface, the wiring pattern that transmits the reset signal to the game control microcomputer and the wiring pattern that gives the operation clock to the game control microcomputer are relatively important. A place where a wiring pattern for signal transmission intersects a wiring pattern used for signal transmission formed on the mounting surface side in a corresponding region on the mounting surface side rather than a wiring pattern for transmitting other signals. By adopting a configuration in which the noise is reduced, the influence of noise on the wiring pattern used for signal transmission formed on the mounting surface side and transmitting signals of relatively high importance is minimized. suppressed.

FIG. 30-16 is a diagram showing an example of a situation in which the game control board is attached to the slot machine. The slot machine is equipped with game parts related to games such as a liquid crystal display, an effect control board for controlling effects, a reel unit consisting of a plurality of reels, and a hopper unit for paying out medals. When the game control board is attached to the slot machine, the game control board has the mounting surface side, that is, the surface opposite to the solder surface on which the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power is supplied is formed on the game component side. Mounted to be positioned. With such a configuration, the influence of noise generated from the game parts on the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power supply is supplied can be suppressed.

FIG. 30-17 is a diagram showing an example of a situation in which the game control board is attached to the pachinko game machine. When the pachinko gaming machine is installed in a game arcade, it is often installed in such a manner that the back faces of other gaming machines such as other pachinko gaming machines face each other. When the game control board is attached to the pachinko game machine, the game control board has a mounting surface side, that is, a surface opposite to the solder surface on which the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power is supplied is formed. It is attached so that it is arranged on the device side. By adopting such a configuration, the influence of noise emitted from other game machines on the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power supply is supplied can be suppressed.

(Effect 1)
In the game control board of this embodiment, wiring patterns are formed on both the mounting surface and the soldering surface, and the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface has a ratio of the wiring pattern extending in the first direction (vertical direction). The ratio of the wiring patterns extending in the second direction (horizontal direction) different from the first direction (horizontal direction) is higher than that of the wiring patterns extending in the second direction (horizontal direction). direction). According to such a configuration, the wiring patterns extending in the first direction (vertical direction) are concentrated on the mounting surface, and the wiring patterns extending in the second direction (horizontal direction) are concentrated on the soldering surface. When the wiring pattern extending in the (vertical direction) and the wiring pattern extending in the second direction (horizontal direction) intersect, designing such as bypassing the wiring pattern can be reduced as much as possible.

The game control board of this embodiment is a quadrilateral consisting of a pair of sides (left side and right side) extending in a first direction (vertical direction) and a pair of sides (upper side and lower side) extending in a second direction (horizontal direction). It is characterized by its shape. According to such a configuration, the wiring pattern can be formed along the shape of the game control board without waste.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that an electronic component having a terminal row consisting of a plurality of terminals is arranged so that the terminal rows are arranged in the second direction (horizontal direction). According to such a configuration, the wiring pattern extending in the first direction (horizontal direction) can be directly connected to the electronic component.

The game control board of this embodiment includes a pair of short sides (left side and right side) extending in the first direction (vertical direction) and a pair of long sides (upper side and lower side) extending in the second direction (horizontal direction). It is characterized in that the electronic component is mounted only on the mounting surface and the electronic component is not mounted on the soldering surface. According to such a configuration, it is possible to form a wiring pattern in the second direction (horizontal direction), in which the distance can be long on the solder surface, without being obstructed by the electronic component.

In the game control board of the present embodiment, the wiring pattern includes a wiring pattern branching from one wiring pattern to two wiring patterns, one of the two wiring patterns at the branch destination is formed on the mounting surface, The other wiring pattern is characterized in that it is formed on the solder surface. With such a configuration, it is not necessary to detour one of the wiring patterns at the branch destination, or to cross the one wiring pattern at the branch destination with the other wiring pattern on the same plane. can be formed.

(Effect 2)
The game control board of the present embodiment connects the first terminal (terminal of the game control microcomputer) and the second terminal (terminal of the input circuit, output circuit) separated in a specific direction (horizontal direction), and a specific signal ( A specific wiring pattern (data bus) used for transmitting input data and output data) is formed, and the specific wiring pattern (data bus) is formed of a plurality of wiring patterns consisting of straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction). Each linear wiring pattern formed by division and extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) has a specific length (λ/2), which is an antenna length corresponding to the frequency (bus clock) of a specific signal (input data, output data). It is characterized by being formed shorter than According to such a configuration, the specific wiring pattern (data bus) is divided into a plurality of wiring patterns each composed of a straight wiring pattern extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction). Each wiring pattern is formed shorter than a specific length (λ/2), which is an antenna length corresponding to the frequency (bus clock) of a specific signal (input data, output data), so that the specific wiring pattern (data bus ) can be prevented from becoming an antenna length corresponding to the frequency (bus clock) of the specific signal (input data, output data), and unintended radio waves can be prevented from being emitted.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) are connected by wiring patterns extending in a direction (diagonal direction) different from the specific direction (horizontal direction). . According to such a configuration, a specific wiring pattern (data bus) can be divided into straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) with a simple structure.

In addition, the game control board of the present embodiment has a configuration in which straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) are connected by a wiring pattern extending in a direction (diagonal direction) different from the specific direction (horizontal direction). Alternatively, wiring patterns may be formed on the mounting surface and the soldering surface, and linear wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) may be alternately formed on the mounting surface and the soldering surface. Also in such a configuration, a specific wiring pattern (data bus) can be divided into straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) with a simple structure.

In the game control board of the present embodiment, the specific wiring pattern (data bus) is different from the specific wiring pattern (data bus) between one wiring pattern extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) and the other wiring pattern. It is characterized by branching into According to such a configuration, the specific wiring pattern (data bus) can be preferably branched by utilizing the space between one wiring pattern extending in the specific direction and another wiring pattern.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the straight wiring pattern extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) has an antenna length corresponding to the maximum frequency (maximum frequency assumed as a bus clock) of each specific signal (input data, output data) It is characterized in that it is formed shorter than a specific length (λ/2). According to such a configuration, since the length of the straight wiring pattern extending in the specific direction (horizontal direction) is shorter than the antenna length corresponding to the maximum frequency of the specific signal (input data, output data), It is possible to prevent unintended radio waves from being emitted even if a signal is transmitted by

In the game control board of this embodiment, the straight wiring pattern extending in a specific direction has a specific length (λ/2), which is the antenna length corresponding to the frequency (bus clock) of the specific signal (input data, output data). It is characterized in that the length is not 1/2 (λ/4). According to such a configuration, the straight wiring pattern extending in the specific direction (horizontal direction) is 1/2 of the specific length (λ/2), and strong resonance occurs due to reflection from the surface of the substrate. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unintended emission of radio waves.

(Effect 3)
The game control board of the present embodiment includes a first electronic component (low voltage component) to which a wiring pattern for transmitting a signal of a first voltage (Vcc (+5V)) is connected, and a second voltage (VDL (+24V)). A second electronic component (high-voltage component) to which a wiring pattern for transmitting a signal of is connected is mounted, the first electronic component (low-voltage component) is connected to the first ground area, and the second electronic component ( The high voltage component) is characterized by being connected to a second ground area separated from the first ground area by an insulator. According to such a configuration, the first electronic component (low voltage component) to which the wiring pattern through which the signal of the first voltage (Vcc (+5V) is transmitted) is connected is connected to the first ground area, and the second voltage is A second electronic component (high-voltage component) to which a wiring pattern for transmitting a signal of (VDL (+24V)) is connected is connected to a second ground region separated from the first ground region by an insulating portion (insulating region). Therefore, it is possible to prevent an unintended reverse flow of current through the ground.

In addition, in the game control board of the present embodiment, the first electronic component (low voltage component) to which the wiring pattern for transmitting the signal of the first voltage (Vcc (+5V)) is connected is connected to the first ground area, A second electronic component (high-voltage component), to which a wiring pattern that transmits a signal of a second voltage (VDL (+24 V)) is connected, is connected to a second ground region separated from the first ground region by an insulating portion. Regarding the configuration, in a configuration in which there is a large difference in the current flowing through the wiring pattern that connects the first electronic component and the second electronic component, the first electronic component is connected to the first ground area, and the second electronic component is connected to the first ground area. It may be configured to be connected to a second ground region separated from the first ground region by an insulating portion. Even if the current difference between the patterns is large, the first electronic component is connected to the first ground area and the second electronic component is connected to the second ground area, so that an unintended reverse current flows through the ground. can be prevented.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that a capacitor is provided between the first ground area and the second ground area. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a current from flowing from one ground area to the other ground area even if a potential difference occurs temporarily between the first ground area and the second ground area due to the capacitor. .

In the game control board of the present embodiment, a first ground area is formed on one side (left side), a second ground area is formed on the other side (right side) opposite to one side, and a first electronic component (low voltage component ) is mounted in the first ground area, and the second electronic component (high voltage component) is mounted in the second ground area. According to such a configuration, since the first ground area and the second ground area are formed on the opposite sides of the game control board, they can be prevented from interfering with each other even if a potential difference occurs temporarily.

In the game control board of this embodiment, a non-wiring pattern area (insulating area) in which no wiring pattern is formed between the first ground area and the second ground area is formed on both the mounting surface and the solder surface. is characterized by With such a configuration, the insulation between the first ground region and the second ground region can be enhanced.

In addition, the game control board of this embodiment has a configuration in which a non-wiring pattern area (insulating area) is formed between the first ground area and the second ground area on both the mounting surface and the solder surface. Even in a configuration in which a non-wiring pattern area (insulating area) is formed between the first ground area and the second ground area on at least one of the mounting surface and the solder surface, the first ground area and the Insulation between the second ground regions can be enhanced.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the first ground area and the second ground area on the mounting surface and the first ground area and the second ground area on the solder surface are formed in areas corresponding to each other. and the non-wiring pattern area (insulating area) of the solder surface are also formed in corresponding areas. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent mutual interference even if a potential difference is temporarily generated from one surface of the mounting surface and the solder surface to the other surface.

(Effect 4)
The game control board of this embodiment is attached to the game machine while being housed in the board case, and connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) for attaching wiring from the outside of the game control board are mounted on the mounting surface. The terminals of (connectors CN1 to CN7) are characterized in that they are connected to wiring patterns formed on the solder surface. According to such a configuration, the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are connected not to the mounting surface on which the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are mounted, but to the wiring pattern formed on the opposite solder surface. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as short-circuiting or disconnection of wiring patterns connected to the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) from the periphery where the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are exposed from the board case.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the wiring connected to the connector (connectors CN1 to CN7) is connected to the wiring related to the advantage of the game (signal for changing the setting value to a changeable state, changing the setting value (wiring for inputting or outputting signals for displaying information advantageous to the player on an external display). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent cheating related to game advantage.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that information (connector number) on the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) is displayed around the mounting portions of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) on the mounting surface. According to such a configuration, the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are connected to wiring patterns formed on the solder surface, and wiring patterns are formed around the mounting portions of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) on the mounting surface. Since the wiring pattern is not formed, by displaying information (connector number) on the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) in this portion, the portion where the wiring pattern is not formed on the mounting surface can be effectively used.

In the game control board of the present embodiment, the board case has a covering portion covering the area around the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7), and the wiring patterns connected to the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are: It is characterized in that it is formed on the solder surface in the region covered by the covering portion. With such a configuration, wiring patterns connected to the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are not formed on the mounting surface even in the periphery of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7). (Connectors CN1 to CN7) can be reliably prevented from fraudulent actions such as short-circuiting or disconnection of wiring patterns connected to the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) from the exposed portions.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the wiring pattern connected to the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) is connected to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface at the point where it is first connected to the electronic component. . According to such a configuration, it is possible to connect to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface using the through holes for connecting to the electronic component.

(Effect 5)
In the game control board of this embodiment, a plurality of electronic components including a game control microcomputer having storage means (RAM) are mounted on the mounting surface, and no electronic components are mounted on the solder surface. The microcomputer for is capable of holding the stored contents of the storage means (RAM) by a specific power supply (backup power supply (VBB)) supplied by the wiring pattern, and the specific power supply (backup power supply (VBB)) is a game control microcomputer The wiring pattern (VBB) to be supplied to is characterized in that it is formed only on the solder surface. According to such a configuration, since the wiring pattern that supplies the specific power supply (backup power supply (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer is formed only on the solder surface on which electronic components are not mounted, it bypasses the electronic components. Since the distance of the wiring pattern can be shortened, it is difficult to receive noise from the outside, and it is possible to prevent the data stored in the storage means (RAM) from being damaged by the noise.

The game control board of the present embodiment is characterized in that the mounting surface side is attached so as to be placed on the side of the game components (liquid crystal display, effect control board for controlling effects, etc.) related to the game. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise emitted from the game parts on the wiring pattern (VBB) for supplying the specific power supply (backup power supply (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that it is attached so that the mounting surface side is arranged on the other game device (another game machine) side. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the wiring pattern (VBB) for supplying the specific power supply (backup power supply (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer from the influence of noise emitted from other game machines.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the area on the mounting surface side corresponding to the area provided with the wiring pattern (VBB) that supplies the specific power supply (backup power supply (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer on the solder surface is solid. A ground is formed. According to such a configuration, noise from the mounting surface side can be blocked by the solid ground formed on the mounting surface.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the wiring pattern (VBB) that supplies a specific power supply (backup power supply (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer is more It is characterized in that there are few intersections with the wiring pattern for transmitting signals in the corresponding area on the mounting surface side. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise from the wiring pattern for transmitting signals on the mounting surface side as much as possible.

Embodiment 1 of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, but the present invention is not limited to this embodiment, and modifications and additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. It goes without saying that

For example, in the present embodiment, an example in which the configuration according to the present invention is applied to a game control board for controlling a game has been described. The configuration according to the present invention may also be applied to a board for controlling game media and the provision of game values, a board for relaying between boards, and the like.

The structure of the game control board in Example 2 will be described. As in the first embodiment, the game control board has electronic parts mounted on one side, no electronic parts mounted on the other side, and terminals of the electronic parts are soldered. The configuration of the game control board in the second embodiment is basically the same as the configuration of the game control board in the first embodiment, and here, mainly the configuration different from the game control board in the first embodiment will be described. .

30-18 is a view showing the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1, and FIG. 30-19 is a view showing the soldering surface of the game control board in this example.

As shown in FIGS. 30-18 and 30-19, the game control board has a rectangular shape consisting of a pair of short sides extending in the vertical direction and a pair of long sides extending in the horizontal direction, and has an insulating printed board. Consists of A plurality of through holes are formed in the game control board, and a plurality of wiring patterns are formed in the mounting surface and the soldering surface of the game control board so as to appropriately connect the through holes. In addition, an insulating area and a ground area are formed in the area where the wiring pattern of the mounting surface and the soldering surface of the game control board is not formed.

Also in the game control board in the second embodiment, similarly to the game control board in the first embodiment, an input circuit and an output circuit are mounted. A concave notch is provided on one side, and the model number is printed on the surface, so that the orientation of the part can be specified by the direction of the notch and the direction of printing the model number. The input circuit is arranged so that the cutout is on the left side in the figure and the model number is printed from left to right, while the output circuit is arranged so that the cutout is on the right side in the figure and the model number is printed. It is arranged so that the printing direction is from right to left, and it is possible to identify whether these electronic components are input circuits or output circuits by the position of the notch and the printing direction of the model number. there is

FIG. 30-20 is a diagram showing the configuration of the data bus formed on the soldering surface of the game control board in this embodiment, and FIG. It is a figure which shows the wiring pattern which branched.

The game control board is formed with a data bus that is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and transmission of output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. The data bus formed on the game control board of this embodiment is composed of eight wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction formed on the solder surface, and as shown in FIGS. It consists of eight wiring patterns formed so as to extend laterally toward the right side from through holes to which terminals of a game control microcomputer mounted on the left side are connected. As shown in FIG. 30-21, the data bus, the input circuit and the output circuit are connected by a wiring pattern formed to branch to the mounting surface side through the through hole and extend vertically in the vertical direction. .

When connecting the game control microcomputer and the laterally separated input and output circuits via the data bus, first, the terminal of the game control microcomputer extends in the lateral direction on the data bus on the solder surface. at the position where the input circuit or output circuit is mounted, branch to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side extending in the vertical direction toward the input circuit or output circuit through the through hole, and connect to the input circuit or output circuit becomes. Therefore, there is no need to bypass the wiring pattern branched from the data bus, and the game control microcomputer can be efficiently connected to the laterally separated input and output circuits. In addition, since the wiring pattern forming the data bus is formed on the solder surface on which electronic components are not mounted, the data bus is less susceptible to noise from the electronic components. are connected by wiring patterns branched to the mounting surface side through through-holes, the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side is shortened and is less susceptible to noise from the electronic components during this period.

Also, as shown in FIG. 30-22, the data bus is connected to the noise elimination circuit at a position closer to the game control microcomputer than any input circuit or output circuit connected to the data bus. This makes it difficult for noise on the data bus to affect the game control microcomputer.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 30-20, on the game control board, connectors CN10 to CN17 for connecting wires from the outside of the game control board are mounted in the vicinity of the upper side in the figure, and a data bus is installed. The wiring pattern is formed in an area near the lower side of the game control board in the figure, that is, in an area near the other side opposite to the one side on which the connectors CN10 to CN17 are mounted. For this reason, a wide area for mounting electronic parts such as input circuits and output circuits is ensured between the data bus and the connectors CN10 to CN17 for signal input/output with electronic parts outside the game control board. It's becoming

As shown in FIGS. 30-20 and 30-21, the game control board has an input signal from the first input component, which has relatively low importance among the input components used for game control (not triggering the lottery). A first input circuit that detects the input of a sensor or switch detection signal, etc.), an input signal from a second input component that is more important than the first input component (sensor or switch detection signal that triggers the lottery, an advantageous A second input circuit that detects input such as a detection signal that changes the set value that defines the speed, based on the output data from the game control microcomputer, the operation of the movable parts such as solenoids and motors according to the progress of the game Based on the output data from the first output circuit that outputs the output signal to the first output component that performs the game control microcomputer, various displays, LEDs, etc., the second output that displays according to the progress of the game A second output circuit that outputs output signals to parts, based on the output data from the game control microcomputer, is mounted on the game control board, and the payout rate when playing the game for a certain period of time, etc. A third output circuit is implemented for outputting an output signal to a performance indicator for displaying performance.

A first output circuit, a first output circuit, a second output circuit, and a third output circuit among these input circuits and output circuits are connected to a data bus, and transmission of input data and transmission of output data are performed via the data bus. is done.

As shown in FIG. 30-20, the wiring pattern that constitutes the data bus connected to the terminal of the game control microcomputer on the solder surface branches to the mounting surface side through through holes at multiple points, and is vertically mounted on the mounting surface. It is connected to the wiring pattern formed in the direction. As shown in FIG. 30-21, the wiring pattern branched to the mounting surface side through the through hole at the position M in the figure is connected to the terminal of the first input circuit. A wiring pattern branched to the mounting surface through a through hole at a position N in the figure is connected to a terminal of the third output circuit. Wiring patterns branched to the mounting surface through through holes at positions O and P in the figure are connected to the terminals of the first output circuit. Further, the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side connected through the through hole at the position Q in the drawing is connected to the terminal of the second output circuit and branches on the mounting surface. The remaining wiring pattern is connected to the wiring pattern on the solder side once through the through hole at the position R in the figure, and is connected to the wiring pattern on the mounting side through the through hole again at the position S in the figure. and connected to the external output terminal.

As shown in FIGS. 30-20 and 30-21, the input circuit of the input circuit and output circuit connected by a shared data bus has a wiring pattern length from the output circuit to the game control microcomputer. It is connected to the data bus so that it is short. Therefore, the input data used for game control is less susceptible to noise and the like.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 30-20 and 30-21, among a plurality of output circuits connected by a shared data bus, an output signal is output to a first output component that operates a movable portion according to the progress of the game. has a shorter wiring pattern length to the game control microcomputer than the second output circuit that outputs the output signal to the second output component that displays according to the progress of the game. are connected to the data bus so that Therefore, it is possible to prevent the output data from being affected by noise or the like, which affects the operation of the movable portion according to the progress of the game.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 30-20 and 30-21, among the plurality of output circuits connected by the shared data bus, the third output circuit that outputs the output signal to the performance indicator is Data so that the length of the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the second output circuit that outputs the output signal to the display (second output component) that performs display according to the progress of the game Connected to a bus. For this reason, it is difficult to tamper with the contents of the performance display by arranging illegal parts or the like.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 30-21, the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side, which is connected through a through-hole at the position Q in the drawing, from the wiring pattern constituting the data bus on the soldering surface side, changes according to the progress of the game. It is connected to the terminal of the second output circuit that outputs the output signal to the second output component that outputs, and branches on the mounting surface, and the branched wiring pattern outputs the output signal according to the progress of the game to the external device It is connected to an external output terminal for outputting to. In this way, by utilizing the wiring pattern on the mounting surface connected through the through holes from the data bus formed on the soldering surface, the wiring pattern is connected to the second output circuit in order to output according to the progress of the game on the mounting surface side. and the wiring pattern connected to the external output terminal for outputting the output signal according to the progress of the game to the external device. Since it is not necessary to branch to the soldering surface side from the data bus formed on the mounting surface in order to branch to each wiring pattern connected to the wiring pattern, the wiring pattern is formed simply.

The wiring pattern on the mounting surface side, which is connected through a through hole from the wiring pattern constituting the data bus on the soldering surface side, outputs an output signal to a second output component that outputs according to the progress of the game. It may be configured such that it is connected to terminals of two output circuits, and branched on the mounting surface, and the branched wiring pattern is connected to an output circuit for outputting an output signal according to the progress of the game to an external device. Even with such a configuration, it is desirable to use the wiring pattern on the mounting surface connected through the through-holes from the data bus formed on the soldering surface, so that the output corresponding to the progress of the game can be performed on the mounting surface side. By branching the wiring pattern connected to the second output circuit and the wiring pattern connected to the output circuit for outputting the output signal according to the progress of the game to the external device, it is connected to a plurality of output circuits. Since it is not necessary to branch to the soldering surface side from the data bus formed on the mounting surface for branching to each wiring pattern, the wiring pattern can be formed simply.

Among the input circuits, the second input circuit is not connected to the data bus and transmits input data directly to the game control microcomputer without going through the data bus. As shown in FIG. 30-21, the wiring pattern connected to the terminal of the game control microcomputer on the mounting surface is connected to the wiring pattern on the solder surface side through the through hole once at the position of T in the figure, U in the figure It is connected to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side again through the through hole at the position of , and is connected to the terminal of the second input circuit.

Thus, the first input circuit for detecting the input of the input signal from the first input component, which is relatively less important among the input components used for game control, communicates with the game control microcomputer via the data bus. A second input circuit that is connected but detects an input of an input signal from a second input component that is more important than the first input component is not connected to the data bus and is directly connected without going through the data bus. It is designed to be connected to a game control microcomputer, and the input data based on the input signal from the second input component is transmitted through the data bus through which the input data from other input circuits and the output data to the output circuit are transmitted. Since it is transmitted to the game control microcomputer without intermediary, the input data based on the important input signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer without being affected by the input data from other input circuits or the output data to the output circuit. It will be transmitted.

(Effect 6)
In the game control board of this embodiment, a data bus is formed for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and transmission of output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. The input circuit is characterized in that it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the output circuit. According to such a configuration, the input circuit for transmitting the input data based on the input signal from the electronic component (input component) used for the control of the game control microcomputer to the game control microcomputer, the game control microcomputer Since it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the output circuit that outputs the output signal to the electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the input Data can be prevented from being affected by noise or the like.

The game control board of this embodiment is configured such that the input circuit is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the output circuit. It may be configured to be connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than, and with such a configuration, based on the output data transmitted from the game control microcomputer An output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) transmits input data based on an input signal from an electronic component (input component) used to control the game control microcomputer to the game control microcomputer. Since the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the input circuit, it is possible to prevent the output data from being affected by noise or the like.

In the game control board of this embodiment, a data bus is formed for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and transmission of output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. a first output circuit for outputting an output signal to a first output component that operates a movable portion according to the progress of a game based on output data transmitted from a game control microcomputer; a second output circuit for outputting an output signal to a second output component that displays according to the progress of the game based on the output data transmitted from the game control microcomputer, the first output circuit comprising: It is characterized in that it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the second output circuit. According to such a configuration, the first output circuit that outputs the output signal to the first output component that operates the movable portion according to the progress of the game outputs the second output that displays according to the progress of the game. Since the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the second output circuit that outputs the output signal to the part, the output data is affected by noise etc. It is possible to prevent the operation of the movable part according to the progress from being affected.

In addition, the game control board of the present embodiment is configured such that the first output circuit is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the second output circuit. The output circuit may be connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the first output circuit. A second output circuit that outputs an output signal to a second output component that performs display, and a first output circuit that outputs an output signal to a first output component that operates a movable portion according to the progress of a game. Also, since the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is connected to the data bus so as to be short, it is possible to prevent the output data from being affected by noise, etc., and affecting the display according to the progress of the game. can.

Also, like the game control board of the first embodiment, on the left side where the game control microcomputer is arranged, a first ground area where low voltage components are mounted is formed, and on the right side is a second ground area where high voltage components are mounted. When two ground areas are formed, the first output circuit that outputs an output signal to the first output component that operates the movable portion according to the progress of the game often belongs to the high voltage component. The second output circuit, which is mounted in the second ground area and outputs an output signal to the second output part that displays according to the progress of the game, is often mounted in the first ground area because it belongs to the low voltage parts. The Rukoto. In such a configuration, the second output circuit is configured to be connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the first output circuit, and the second output circuit is connected to the first ground. By mounting the second output circuit in the area, it is not necessary to mount the second output circuit, which is a low-voltage component, in the second ground area together with the first output circuit, which is a high-voltage component, thereby preventing a load from being applied to the second output circuit. can.

In the game control board of this embodiment, a data bus is formed for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and transmission of output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. Electronic parts are mounted only on the mounting surface, and a data bus is formed on the soldering surface, and the wiring pattern on the mounting surface connected from the data bus through through holes is used to output output according to the progress of the game on the mounting surface. The wiring pattern is branched into a wiring pattern connected to a second output circuit for playing the game and a wiring pattern connected to an external output terminal for outputting an output signal according to the progress of the game to an external device. According to such a configuration, the second output for outputting according to the progress of the game on the mounting surface side using the wiring pattern on the mounting surface connected through the through holes from the data bus formed on the solder surface. Since the wiring pattern connected to the circuit and the wiring pattern connected to the external output terminal for outputting the output signal according to the progress of the game to the external device are branched, in order to branch to each of these wiring patterns Since there is no need to branch from the data bus formed on the soldering surface to the mounting surface side, the wiring pattern can be formed simply.

In the game control board of this embodiment, a data bus is formed for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and transmission of output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. A first input circuit for transmitting input data based on an input signal from a first input component used for controlling the game control microcomputer to the game control microcomputer, and a first input circuit used for controlling the game control microcomputer A second input circuit that transmits input data based on the input signal from the 2 input components to the game control microcomputer, and a first output component and a second output component based on the output data transmitted from the game control microcomputer It includes a first output circuit and a second output circuit that output an output signal, and the first input circuit, the first output circuit and the second output circuit are connected to a game control microcomputer via a data bus. , the second input circuit is characterized in that it is connected to a game control microcomputer without a data bus. According to such a configuration, the input data based on the input signal from the second input component is used for game control without passing through the data bus through which the input data from other input circuits and the output data to the output circuit are transmitted. Since it is transmitted to the microcomputer, the input data based on the important input signal can be transmitted to the game control microcomputer without being affected by the input data from other input circuits or the output data to the output circuit. .

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that electronic components are mounted only on the mounting surface and a data bus is formed on the solder surface. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the data bus from being affected by noise from electronic components.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the data bus, the input circuit and the output circuit are connected to each other by a branched wiring pattern on the mounting surface opposite to the soldering surface on which the data bus is formed through through-holes. and According to such a configuration, since the distance of the wiring pattern from the data bus to the input circuit and the output circuit is shortened, the influence of noise can be reduced.

In the game control board of this embodiment, connectors (connectors CN10 to CN17) for attaching wiring from the outside of the board are mounted near one side (upper side), and the data bus faces one side of the game control board. It is characterized in that it is formed in a region closer to the other side (lower side) than the other side. According to such a configuration, an area for mounting electronic components such as an input circuit and an output circuit can be secured between the connectors (connectors CN10 to CN17) and the data bus, so that the substrate area can be effectively utilized. .

In the game control board of this embodiment, a performance indicator for displaying the performance of the gaming machine is mounted, and the third output circuit for outputting an output signal to the performance indicator outputs an output signal to another indicator. It is characterized in that it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the output second output circuit. According to such a configuration, the third output circuit that outputs the output signal to the performance display device, the second output circuit that outputs the output signal to the other display device to the game control microcomputer Since the wiring pattern is short, it is possible to make it difficult to modify display contents by arranging illegal parts.

The game control board of the present embodiment is characterized in that the input circuit and the output circuit are mounted so that the component orientations are different. According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily grasp the difference between the input circuit and the output circuit.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the data bus is connected to the noise elimination circuit at a position closer to the game control microcomputer than the input circuit and the output circuit. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise on the game control microcomputer.

Although the second embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to this second embodiment, and any modifications and additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. Needless to say. Also, the same or similar configuration as the first embodiment has the same effects as those described in the first embodiment. Further, the modified example exemplified for the first embodiment can also be applied to the second embodiment.

The structure of the game control board in Example 3 will be described. As in the first and second embodiments, the game control board has electronic parts mounted on one side, no electronic parts mounted on the other side, and terminals of the electronic parts are soldered. It should be noted that the game control board in Example 3 is characterized by the structure of the mounted electronic components and the through holes, and here, the structure of the electronic components and the through holes will be described.

30-23 are perspective views showing the structure of the specific electronic component mounted on the game control board in Example 3, (A) is a perspective view from above of the specific electronic component, and (B) is a , and a perspective view from below of the specific electronic component.

The specified electronic component is a relatively large electronic component such as a key switch, and below the specified electronic component, as shown in FIGS. For the purpose, fixing terminals 1 and 2 that are not used to propagate signals and power of the specific electronic component, connection terminals that are connected to the wiring pattern of the substrate and are used to propagate signals and power of the specific electronic component, is provided. Moreover, the model number of the specific electronic component is stamped or printed above the fixing terminals 1 and 2 on the side surface of the specific electronic component.

In this embodiment, a key switch having both a fixing terminal and a connection terminal is exemplified as the specific electronic component, but other electronic components may be applied as the specific electronic component. An electronic component having only connection terminals without fixing terminals may be applied as the specific electronic component.

The through-holes provided in the game control board consist of normal through-holes and specific through-holes. As shown in Fig. 30-24(A), a normal through-hole is plated with copper, which is a conductor, from the solder surface to the inner peripheral surface of the through-hole. It is a through hole that conducts at On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 30-24(B), a specific through-hole is a through-hole in which the inner peripheral surface of the through-hole is not copper-plated and the through-hole does not conduct between the mounting surface and the soldering surface. be.

Normally, when soldering to the through-hole from the solder side, as shown in FIG. Although it will flow up, when soldering to a specific through-hole from the soldering surface side, as shown in FIG. The solder does not flow up and the solder does not reach the mounting surface.

In this embodiment, the specific electronic component is fixed by inserting the fixing terminals 1 and 2 through the specific through holes, inserting the connection terminals through the normal through holes, and soldering them from the solder surface side.

In this way, the fixing terminals 1 and 2 are inserted through the specific through holes and fixed by soldering from the soldering surface side, so that the solder does not reach the mounting surface. It is possible to prevent troubles such as the model number printed or stamped above the fixing terminals 1 and 2 being hidden by the solder due to excessive rise to the mounting surface side where the component is mounted.

In particular, if the model number is hidden by solder, even if the part is illegally replaced, there is a risk that it will not be discovered. Also, if the model number is hidden in the model test, it will not be possible to specify the component configuration, and the test will not be approved. There is a risk that the terminal will not be able to receive the terminal, or that installation at the amusement arcade will not be approved because the model number cannot be confirmed at the time of installation at the amusement arcade. Such a problem can be prevented by fixing with .

On the other hand, since the fixing terminals 1 and 2 are terminals that are not used for transmitting signals or electric power of specific electronic components, problems arise even if the electrical connection is weakened when they are soldered to the specific through-holes. never On the other hand, the connection terminals are usually inserted through the through-holes and fixed by soldering from the solder surface side, so that the solder reaches the mounting surface to ensure electrical connection.

(Effect 7)
In the game control board of this embodiment, a plurality of electronic components are mounted on the mounting surface of the mounting surface and the soldering surface, and wiring patterns are formed on the mounting surface and the soldering surface. A specific through-hole is formed in which a specific electronic component among a plurality of electronic components is fixed by inserting a terminal into the through-hole penetrating the surface and the soldering surface and soldering the through-hole and the terminal, The specific through-hole is characterized in that the solder surface of the mounting surface does not conduct and the solder does not reach the mounting surface when the terminal of the specific electronic component is soldered from the solder surface. According to such a configuration, the specific through-hole does not provide electrical continuity between the mounting surface and the soldering surface, and when the terminal of the specific electronic component is soldered from the soldering surface, the solder does not reach the mounting surface. In this case, it is possible to prevent the solder from rising too much toward the mounting surface on which the electronic component is mounted and causing a problem.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the terminals for fixing the specific electronic parts (fixing terminals 1 and 2) are inserted into the specific through holes and soldered. According to such a configuration, the specific through-holes are soldered to the specific through-holes for fixing the specific electronic component (fixing terminals 1 and 2), so that the solder reaches the mounting surface. By not doing so, problems do not occur even if the electrical connection becomes weak.

In addition, the game control board of the present embodiment has a configuration in which the terminals (fixing terminals 1 and 2) for fixing the specific electronic parts are inserted into the specific through holes and soldered. Terminals (connecting terminals) that propagate signals and power of components may be inserted and soldered. It is possible to prevent problems caused by short-circuiting of a terminal that propagates a signal or power of a specific electronic component with another terminal.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the model number of the specific electronic component is displayed (printed or stamped) above the terminals (fixing terminals 1 and 2). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the model number of the specific electronic part from being hidden due to excessive solder rising to the mounting surface side where the electronic component is mounted.

Although the third embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to this third embodiment, and any changes or additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. Needless to say. In addition, the same or similar configurations as those of the first and second embodiments have the same effects as those described in the first and second embodiments. Moreover, the modifications illustrated in the first and second embodiments are also applicable to the third embodiment.

(Invention of characteristic part 053SG)
As described above, the characteristic portion 053SG includes the following inventions. That is, conventionally, for example, as described in JP-A-2016-93428, etc., game machines such as pachinko game machines and slot machines generally have a board on which electronic devices are mounted, A substrate of this type has been proposed in which data is input/output using a single data bus between control means such as a CPU and other electronic equipment. In this type of substrate, there are various problems regarding the design of wiring patterns. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a game machine in which the wiring pattern of the board is preferably formed, the game machine of (1) of the characteristic part 053SG is
A game machine capable of playing,
Control means (game control microcomputer) and electronic components (input components) used for controlling the control means (game control microcomputer) Input data based on input signals from the control means (game control microcomputer) ), and an output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer) is mounted. , equipped with a board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmission of output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit. including a data bus that
The input circuit is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means (game control microcomputer) is shorter than the output circuit.
According to this feature, the input circuit that transmits input data based on the input signal from the electronic component used for controlling the control means to the control means outputs to the electronic component based on the output data transmitted from the control means. Since the data bus is connected so that the wiring pattern to the control means is shorter than the output circuit for outputting the signal, it is possible to prevent the input data from being affected by noise or the like.

The gaming machine (2) of the characteristic part 053SG is the gaming machine according to (1),
The board (game control board) is characterized in that electronic components are mounted only on the first surface (mounting surface), and the data bus is formed on the second surface (solder surface).
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise from electronic components on the data bus.

The gaming machine of (3) of the characteristic part 053SG is the gaming machine according to (1) or (2),
The data bus, the input circuit, and the output circuit are connected through a through-hole to a surface (mounting surface) opposite to the surface on which the data bus is formed (solder surface) by a branched wiring pattern. Characterized by
According to this feature, since the distance of the wiring pattern from the data bus to the input circuit and the output circuit is shortened, the influence of noise can be reduced.
The gaming machine of (4) of the characteristic part 053SG is the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3),
Connectors (connectors CN10 to CN17) for attaching wiring from the outside of the board are mounted near one side (upper side) of the board (game control board), and the data bus is connected to the board (game control board). It is characterized in that it is formed in a region near the other side (lower side) facing the one side of the control board).
According to this feature, since an area for mounting electronic components such as an input circuit and an output circuit can be secured between the connector and the data bus, the board area can be effectively utilized.

The gaming machine of (5) of the characteristic part 053SG is the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4),
A performance indicator for displaying the performance of the game machine is mounted on the board (game control board),
The output circuit (third output circuit) that outputs an output signal to the performance indicator is more likely than the output circuit (second output circuit) that outputs an output signal to another indicator. (microcomputer) is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern is short.
According to this feature, the output circuit for outputting the output signal to the performance indicator has a shorter wiring pattern up to the control means than the output circuit for outputting the output signal to the other indicators. It is possible to make it difficult to illegally alter the display content by arranging the

The gaming machine of (6) of the characteristic part 053SG is the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5),
It is characterized in that the input circuit and the output circuit are mounted on the substrate so that the component directions are different.
According to this feature, it is possible to easily grasp the difference between the input circuit and the output circuit.

The gaming machine of (7) of the characteristic part 053SG is the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6),
The data bus is connected to the noise elimination circuit at a position closer to the control means (game control microcomputer) than the input circuit and the output circuit.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise on the control means.

The game machine of (8) of the characteristic part 053SG is
A game machine capable of playing,
Control means (game control microcomputer) and electronic components (input components) used for controlling the control means (game control microcomputer) Input data based on input signals from the control means (game control microcomputer) ), and an output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer) is mounted. , equipped with a board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmission of output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit. including a data bus that
The output circuit outputs to the first electronic component (first output component) that operates the movable portion according to the progress of the game based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer) A first output circuit (first output circuit) for outputting a signal, and a second electronic component (second a second output circuit (second output circuit) that outputs an output signal to the second output component),
The first output circuit (first output circuit) is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means (game control microcomputer) is shorter than the second output circuit (second output circuit) It is characterized by being
According to this feature, the first output circuit that outputs the output signal to the first electronic component that operates the movable portion according to the progress of the game is connected to the second electronic component that displays the display according to the progress of the game. On the other hand, since the wiring pattern to the control means is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means is shorter than that of the second output circuit for outputting the output signal, the output data is affected by noise and the like, so that the output data can move according to the progress of the game. It is possible to prevent the operation of the unit from being affected.

The game machine of (9) of the characteristic part 053SG is
A game machine capable of playing,
Control means (game control microcomputer) and electronic components (input components) used for controlling the control means (game control microcomputer) Input data based on input signals from the control means (game control microcomputer) ), and an output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer) is mounted. , equipped with a board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmission of output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit. including a data bus that
The board (game control board) has electronic components mounted only on the first surface (mounting surface), and the data bus is formed on the second surface (solder surface), and is connected from the data bus through through holes. The first wiring pattern (wiring pattern connected to the second output circuit) for outputting the wiring pattern on the first surface (mounting surface) according to the progress of the game on the first surface (mounting surface). and a second wiring pattern (wiring pattern connected to the external output terminal) for outputting an output signal according to the progress of the game to an external device.
According to this feature, the wiring pattern on the first surface connected to the data bus formed on the second surface through the through-hole is used to output the output according to the progress of the game on the first surface side. Since the output signal corresponding to the wiring pattern and the progress of the game is branched to the second wiring pattern for outputting to the external device, it is formed on the second surface to branch to the first wiring pattern and the second wiring pattern respectively. Since there is no need to branch from the data bus to the first surface side, the wiring pattern can be formed simply.

The game machine of (10) of the characteristic part 053SG is
A game machine capable of playing,
Control means (game control microcomputer) and electronic components (input components) used for controlling the control means (game control microcomputer) Input data based on input signals from the control means (game control microcomputer) ), and an output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer) is mounted. , equipped with a board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmission of output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit. including a data bus that
A first input for transmitting input data based on an input signal from a first electronic component (first input component) used for controlling the control means (game control microcomputer) to the control means (game control microcomputer) Input data based on input signals from a circuit (first input circuit) and a second electronic component (second input component) used for controlling the control means (game control microcomputer) is input to the control means (game control A second input circuit (second input circuit) to be transmitted to a microcomputer), and a third electronic component based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer) (first output component, second output an output circuit (first output circuit, second output circuit) that outputs an output signal to the component),
The first input circuit (first input circuit) and the output circuit (first output circuit, second output circuit) are connected to the control means (game control microcomputer) via the data bus,
The second input circuit (second input circuit) is connected to the control means (game control microcomputer) without the data bus.
According to this feature, the input data based on the input signal from the second electronic component is transmitted to the control means without passing through the data bus through which the input data from other input circuits and the output data to the output circuit are transmitted. Therefore, input data based on important input signals can be transmitted to the control means without being affected by input data from other input circuits or output data to the output circuit.

The game machine of (11) of the characteristic part 053SG is
A game machine capable of playing,
Control means (game control microcomputer) and electronic components (input components) used for controlling the control means (game control microcomputer) Input data based on input signals from the control means (game control microcomputer) ), and an output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer) is mounted. , equipped with a board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmission of output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit. including a data bus that
The output circuit is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means (game control microcomputer) is shorter than the input circuit.
According to this feature, the output circuit for outputting an output signal to the electronic component based on the output data transmitted from the control means outputs the input data based on the input signal from the electronic component used for controlling the control means. Since the wiring pattern to the control means is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means is shorter than the input circuit for transmission to the control means, it is possible to prevent the output data from being affected by noise or the like.

The game machine of (12) of the characteristic part 053SG is
A game machine capable of playing,
Control means (game control microcomputer) and electronic components (input components) used for controlling the control means (game control microcomputer) Input data based on input signals from the control means (game control microcomputer) ), and an output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer) is mounted. , equipped with a board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmission of output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit. including a data bus that
The output circuit outputs to the first electronic component (first output component) that operates the movable portion according to the progress of the game based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer) A first output circuit (first output circuit) for outputting a signal, and a second electronic component (second a second output circuit (second output circuit) that outputs an output signal to the second output component),
The second output circuit (second output circuit) is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means (game control microcomputer) is shorter than the first output circuit (first output circuit) It is characterized by being
According to this feature, the second output circuit for outputting an output signal to the second electronic component that performs display according to the progress of the game is connected to the first electronic component that operates the movable portion according to the progress of the game. On the other hand, since the wiring pattern to the control means is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means is shorter than the first output circuit for outputting the output signal, the output data is affected by noise and the like, so that the display corresponding to the progress of the game is displayed. can be prevented from affecting

In the above embodiment, the pachinko game machine 1 is exemplified as an example of the game machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. While the number of balls circulated and lent out in response to a player's request for lending and the number of prize balls awarded according to winning are added, the number of game balls used in the game is subtracted. The present invention can also be applied to a so-called enclosed game machine. Since scores and points are given to the player instead of game balls in these enclosed type game machines, the given scores and points correspond to the game value.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) is used as an example of the game medium, but the game medium is not limited to a spherical game medium. It may be a medium.

Further, in the above embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine is used as an example of a gaming machine. In addition, one game is completed by deriving a variable display result to a variable display device capable of variable display of a plurality of types of individually identifiable symbols, and according to the variable display result derived to the variable display device. It can also be applied to slot machines in which prizes can be generated.

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to enclosed gaming machines, slot machines, etc., in which game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winnings. Also, the game machine capable of playing a game is at least one that performs a game, and is not limited to a pachinko game machine or a slot machine, and may be a general game machine.

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiments described later, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if it is modified or added without departing from the scope of the present invention.

Further, all or part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, and the configurations shown in later-described embodiment examples and each modified example may be arbitrarily combined.

In addition, it should be considered that the above-mentioned embodiment disclosed this time and the below-mentioned form are examples in all respects, and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of the claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention also performs variable display of a plurality of types of performance identification information (eg, decorative symbols) including specific performance identification information (eg, pseudo-continuous symbols) to derive and display display results, A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player, and a storage section (for example, sphere tank forming portion 201), a payout portion (for example, payout device 200) capable of paying out game media, and a guide passage (for example, , a first guiding passage and a second guiding passage) and a part of the upper surface of the guiding passage forming portion (for example, the first guiding passage forming portion 202 and the second guiding passage forming portion 204) A cover part (for example, the first cover body 310, the second cover body 320, and the third cover body 330) is provided so as to cover the cover part, and the screw member (for example, , screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) are provided with predetermined restricting portions (for example, long holes 316A to 316C, grooves 326A to 326C, recesses 336) for restricting the falling of the guide passage forming portions ( 22 and 24), the guide passage forming portion is provided with a specific restricting portion (for example, holes 271A to 271H) for restricting the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion to the dispensing portion. 11, 12, and 27), and the predetermined restriction portions (for example, long holes 316A to 316C, grooves 326A to 326C, and recess 336) can Furthermore, as a variable display, the specific effect identification at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the effect identification information to the derivation and display of the display result. A specific effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. portion), and a suggestive effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that can execute a suggestive effect (for example, a temporary stop suggestive effect) that suggests that the specific effect identification information will temporarily stop a part that executes the effect processing), and a notification effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 shown in FIG. 40 , wherein the suggestive effect execution means increases the visibility of the effect identification information different from the specific effect identification information by displaying the effect display as the suggestive effect. After once lowering to the first low visibility state, it is possible to perform an effect to lower the visibility to a second low visibility state that is even lower than the first low visibility state (for example, FIGS. 41-33 and 41- As shown in 34, after lowering the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns by displaying the concentrated lines with the density D1 on the image display device 5, the left and right decorative patterns are displayed by displaying the concentrated lines with the density D2. part that further reduces the visibility of), the notification effect execution means can execute an effect that makes the effect identification information different from the specific effect identification information invisible as the notification effect (for example, FIG. 41- 34 and FIGS. 41 to 35, the effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5 to make the left and right decorative patterns invisible), the suggestive effect execution means , even if the specific effect identification information does not temporarily stop, the suggestive effect can be executed, and if the temporary stop does not occur, the effect display can be continuously displayed for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing ( For example, as shown in FIGS. 41 to 44, when the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed and the pseudo continuous symbols are not temporarily stopped, the concentration line continues even after the pseudo continuous symbols are hidden on the image display device 5. The portion displayed as ) gaming machines can be mentioned.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen on the cover portion from falling into the guide passage forming portion. Further, it is possible to prevent the threaded member that has entered the guide passage forming portion from entering the delivery portion. In addition, since the game medium does not stay in the predetermined restricting portion and the screw member can be kept in a state where it can always stay, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen on the cover portion from falling into the guide passage forming portion. can do. In addition, it is possible to increase the expectation of the player for the temporary stop by the suggestive effect, and it is possible to increase the excitement of the temporary stop by executing the notification effect, and when the temporary stop is not performed, To make it easier for a player to recognize that a temporary stop was not made and to relieve the player's disappointment due to the fact that the temporary stop was not made by continuously displaying the effect display even after the predetermined timing of the temporary stop. Since it becomes possible to do so, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In other words, it is possible to make the game machine less likely to break down by preventing the screw member from falling and being mixed in the guide passage forming portion or the payout portion, and even if the specific effect identification information does not temporarily stop Since the effect display is continuously displayed for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing has passed, the suggestive performance can be strongly impressed on the player by the afterglow of the effect display, and the effect display is terminated immediately after the predetermined timing. It is possible to alleviate the player's discouragement. That is, it is possible to provide a game machine that is less likely to break down when installed in a game arcade and that easily attracts the interest of players.

Alternatively, the gaming machine of the present invention may also variably display a plurality of types of effect identification information (for example, decoration patterns) to derive and display the display result, thereby providing an advantageous state (for example, a big hit) to the player. a gaming machine (eg, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a gaming state), and includes a storage section (eg, ball tank forming section 201) capable of storing game media (eg, game balls P) and a game medium. A payout portion (e.g., payout device 200) that can be paid out, and a guide passage (e.g., first guide passage or second guide passage) that has an open upper surface and guides the game media in the storage portion to the payout portion and a guide passage forming portion (e.g., first guide passage forming portion 202 and second guide passage forming portion 204) that forms a cover portion (for example, a first cover body 310, a second cover body 320, and a third cover body 330), and screw members (for example, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) dropped onto the cover portion. Predetermined restriction portions (for example, long holes 316A to 316C, grooves 326A to 326C, recesses 336) are provided (see FIGS. 22 and 24) for restricting the fall of the guide passage forming portion, and the guide passage The forming portion is provided with a plurality of specific restricting portions (for example, holes 271A to 271H) for restricting the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the guiding passage forming portion to the dispensing portion (FIGS. 11 and 12). , FIG. 27), the predetermined restricting portion (eg, long holes 316A to 316C, grooves 326A to 326C, recess 336) allows game media falling on the cover portion to fall from the cover portion without staying there. Further, as a variable display, special identification information different from the effect identification information (for example, pseudo A specific effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. part to be executed), and a suggestive effect execution means (for example, a variable display shown in FIG. a part that executes middle effect processing), and a notification effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that can execute a notification effect (for example, a temporary stop notification effect) for notifying that the special identification information has temporarily stopped , and the suggestive effect execution means temporarily changes the visibility of the effect identification information to a first low visibility state by displaying an effect display as the suggestive effect. After lowering it, it is possible to execute an effect that lowers it to a second low visibility state that is even lower in visibility than the first low visibility state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 41-33 and 41-34, the image After lowering the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns by displaying the concentrated lines with the density D1 on the display device 5, the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is further reduced by displaying the concentrated lines with the density D2. part), the notification effect execution means can execute an effect that makes the effect identification information invisible as the notification effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. by displaying the effect image in the entire display area of the image display device 5 to make the left and right decorative patterns invisible), the suggestive effect execution means performs the suggestive effect even when the special identification information does not temporarily stop can be executed, and if the temporary stop is not performed, the effect display can be continuously displayed for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing (for example, as shown in FIGS. 41 to 44, the temporary stop suggestion effect When the pseudo consecutive symbols are not temporarily stopped by execution, the central lines are continuously displayed even after the pseudo consecutive symbols are hidden on the image display device 5).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen on the cover portion from falling into the guide passage forming portion. Further, it is possible to prevent the threaded member that has entered the guide passage forming portion from entering the delivery portion. In addition, since the game medium does not stay in the predetermined restricting portion and the screw member can be kept in a state where it can always stay, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen on the cover portion from falling into the guide passage forming portion. can do. In addition, it is possible to increase the expectation of the player for the temporary stop by the suggestive effect, and it is possible to increase the excitement of the temporary stop by executing the notification effect, and when the temporary stop is not performed, To make it easier for a player to recognize that a temporary stop was not made and to relieve the player's disappointment due to the fact that the temporary stop was not made by continuously displaying the effect display even after the predetermined timing of the temporary stop. Since it becomes possible to do so, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In other words, it is possible to make the game machine less likely to break down by preventing the screw member from falling or being mixed in the guide passage forming portion or the payout portion, and even if the special identification information does not temporarily stop, the predetermined Since the effect display is continuously displayed for a predetermined period after the timing has passed, the suggestive effect can be strongly impressed on the player by the afterglow of the effect display, and the effect display is terminated immediately after the predetermined timing. can also relieve the player's disappointment. That is, it is possible to provide a game machine that is less likely to break down when installed in a game arcade and that easily attracts the interest of players.

Further, as an example of a form of a game machine capable of preventing the screw member from falling and being mixed in the guide passage forming portion and the payout portion, and also capable of improving the amusement of the game, specific performance identification information (for example, pseudo-continuous symbol ) including a plurality of types of performance identification information (for example, decorative patterns) are variably displayed to derive and display display results, and a gaming machine (for example, , a pachinko game machine 1) wherein, as a variable display, the specific effect identification information is temporarily stopped at a predetermined timing from when the variable display of the effect identification information is started until the display result is derived and displayed, and then the variable display is performed. Specific effect execution means (for example, a portion in which the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 40) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, pseudo-continuous effect) that restarts the specific effect identification information Suggestion effect execution means (for example, a portion in which the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect process during variable display shown in FIG. 40) capable of executing a suggestive effect suggesting a temporary stop (for example, a temporary stop suggestive effect); A notification effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that can execute a notification effect (for example, a temporary stop notification effect) for notifying that the specific effect identification information has temporarily stopped (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 40 part), wherein the suggestive effect executing means temporarily lowers the visibility of the effect identification information different from the specific effect identification information to a first low visibility state by displaying an effect display as the suggestive effect. Later, it is possible to execute an effect that lowers the visibility to a second low visibility state that is even lower than the first low visibility state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 41-33 and 41-34, the image display device 5 After reducing the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns by displaying the concentrated lines with a density of D1, the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is further reduced by displaying the concentrated lines with a density of D2), The notification effect execution means is capable of executing, as the notification effect, an effect in which effect identification information different from the specific effect identification information is made invisible (for example, as shown in FIGS. 41-34 and 41-35 , a part that makes the left and right decoration patterns invisible by displaying an effect image for notifying temporary stop in the entire display area of the image display device 5), and the suggestive effect execution means prevents the specific effect identification information from being temporarily stopped. Even in such a case, the suggestive effect can be executed, and if the temporary stop is not performed, the effect display can be continuously displayed for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing (for example, as shown in FIGS. 41 to 44 , If the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed and the pseudo continuous symbols are not temporarily stopped, the concentration line is continuously displayed even after the pseudo continuous symbols are hidden on the image display device 5). mentioned.

Alternatively, as an example of a form of a game machine capable of preventing the screw member from falling and being mixed in the guide passage forming portion or the payout portion, and also capable of improving the amusement of the game, a plurality of types of presentation identification information (for example, ornaments) are provided. A game machine (e.g., a pachinko game machine 1) capable of performing variable display of symbols) to derive and display a display result, and controllable to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot game state) advantageous to a player, wherein the variable display is At a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the performance identification information to the derivation and display of the display result, the special identification information (for example, pseudo-continuous pattern) different from the performance identification information is temporarily stopped and then variably displayed. specific effect executing means (for example, a part in which the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 40), and the special identification information is temporary Suggestive effect execution means (for example, a part in which the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect process during variable display shown in FIG. 40) capable of executing a suggestive effect that suggests stopping (for example, temporary stop suggestive effect); Notification effect execution means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect process during variable display shown in FIG. 40) capable of executing a notification effect (for example, temporary stop notification effect) for notifying that the identification information has temporarily stopped and, as the suggestive effect, the suggestive effect executing means temporarily lowers the visibility of the effect identification information to a first low visibility state by displaying an effect display as the suggestive effect, and thereafter, from the first low visibility state. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 41-33 and 41-34, the image display device 5 displays concentrated lines with a density of D1. After reducing the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns by displaying the central lines at the density D2, the part that further reduces the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns), the notification effect executing means As an effect, it is possible to execute an effect that makes the effect identification information invisible (for example, as shown in FIGS. The part where the left and right decorative patterns are made invisible by displaying ), the suggestive effect execution means can execute the suggestive effect even when the special identification information does not temporarily stop, and when the temporary stop is not performed , the effect display can be continuously displayed for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing (for example, as shown in FIGS. , the part where the concentration line is continuously displayed even after the pseudo consecutive symbols are hidden on the image display device 5) game machine. An example of the form of these gaming machines will be described below as another form.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 31 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 constituting a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

In addition, the "variable display" of the special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are displayed in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronism with the first special game or the second special game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, vertically direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the variable display of the special game and the decoration pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to simply as the variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also referred to as the total reserved memory number.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2, a first suspension indicator 25A and a second suspension indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. The first pending display 25A displays the first pending memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second pending display 25B displays the number of second pending memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 33). The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable winglets. comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and the closed state in which the game balls do not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening (second start It is also said that the prize-winning mouth is open.). When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to a device provided with an electric tulip-shaped accessory.

Predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 31, three positions on the lower left side of the game area and one position above the variable winning ball device 6B) are always kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiving members. A general winning opening 10 is provided. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable prize winning ball device 7 has a special prize winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 33), and the special winning prize opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the special prize winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning gate door is in the ON state, the big winning gate door opens the big winning gate, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big winning gate. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize in a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 31, the left lower part of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Below the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above structure, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstructing nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at upper left and right positions of the frame 3 for a game machine. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the game machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided to the left and right of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the game area. Furthermore, an attacker lamp 9c is provided at a position near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2. As shown in FIG.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (a position above the image display device 5 in FIG. 31), a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided. Further, the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable body lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the attacker lamp 9c are collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9 in some cases. The main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d include LEDs.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area by the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). In addition to the upper tray, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout portion (hit ball supply tray) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 33).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 33).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

32 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. A main substrate 11 housed in a substrate case 201 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁A setting key 51 and a setting switch 52 are provided on the main substrate 11 . The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as the probability of winning a big hit and the rate of winning balls in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11 , such as at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17 .

A display monitor 29 is arranged in the center of the back surface of the main board 11 , and a display changeover switch 31 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29 . The display monitor 29 may be configured using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when viewing the back side of the game board 2 with the gaming machine frame 3 opened.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive ratios, role ratios, and bases. Consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls in the big prize opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. The role ratio is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls awarded to the second starting prize opening (electric chew) and the number of prize balls awarded to the large prize opening (attacker). The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. The display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko game machine 1 when it is in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. The display monitor 29 only needs to be able to display setting values to be changed or checked when in the setting change state or setting confirmation state.

The setting key 51 and the setting switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 when the game machine frame 3 is closed. A glass door frame 3a having a glass window is rotatably provided in the game machine frame 3, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular frame. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 50A covers the right side of the board case 201 including the setting keys 51 and the setting changeover switches 52 from the rear side. The security cover 50A is a substantially L-shaped member including short pieces 50Aa and long pieces 50Ab, and may be made of transparent synthetic resin.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotation operation of a ball hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern winning pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern winning". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern lost pattern) other than the normal pattern winning pattern is stop-displayed as the fixed normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern lost". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special game is running or during the period when it is controlled to the jackpot game state described later (starting winning occurs, but it is based on the starting winning If the special game cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, when a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol varies depending on the type of the big hit to be described later) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" and a big winning symbol. If a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing". Incidentally, the "loss" in the pachinko game machine 1 includes a "time-saving loss" that is controlled from the next variable display to a high base state (time-saving state) without going through the jackpot game.

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is the timing of the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until whichever comes first. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the big winning slot can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc.) are prepared, and the jackpot type is set according to these It is As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type with which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type with few prize balls, or a jackpot type with which few prize balls can be obtained.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a predetermined return after power-on, such as when the system is reset) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

In addition, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.
(Progress of production, etc.)

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are provided. lighting or extinguishing, the movement of the movable body 32, or a performance using any performance device including a part or all of these.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R provided on the image display device 5, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) is a "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of the ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to the variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special game is "lost", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" (Also referred to as non-reach lost") may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach lost"). In addition, when the display result is "lost", after the mode of variable display of decorative patterns becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of variable display of decorative patterns is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("no reach") that is not a big hit combination. ”) is stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes “reach lost”).

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed.

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. In addition, various substrates such as a payout control substrate, an information terminal substrate, and a launch control substrate are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 . Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductive patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but are also configured to implement specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on electronic circuit boards. It is a concept that includes an electronic circuit mounting board that has been manufactured.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17 , and by operating the power switch 91 (turning it on), power from an alternating current power supply such as AC 100 V in an external power supply such as a commercial power supply is switched to the power supply board 17 . It can be supplied to electrical parts including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12 from the. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage into a specific DC voltage (eg, 12 V DC or 5 V DC), and the like. I have.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches for game ball detection (gate switch 21, starter switch (first starter switch 22A and second starter switch 22B), count switch 23) (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The switch circuit 110 takes in a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100 . The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of the control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either the power supply monitoring circuit, the IC with built-in watchdog timer, or the system reset IC. I wish I had. The power-off signal turns off when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and turns on when the period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is equal to or less than the predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on, for example, when a clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed.

Solenoid circuit 111, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82), to the solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door transmit.

A display monitor 29 , a display changeover switch 31 , a setting key 51 , a setting changeover switch 52 , and a door open sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11 . The door open sensor 90 detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes voice output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main process. FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 34, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is in the OFF state, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, for example, if a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, a clear signal in an ON state is input to the game control microcomputer 100 . If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the restoration condition is not satisfied. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102 serving as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether or not the recovery condition can be established.

If the restoration condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), after executing the restoration process (step S4), the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed. The work area is set based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 by the recovery process in step S4. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state when the power supply is stopped can be restored. It is sufficient if the pattern variation can be restarted.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), the initialization process (step S6) is performed, and then the setting change process (step S7) is performed. The initialization processing in step S6 includes clear processing for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear processing.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether or not a predetermined setting confirmation condition is satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is established, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is ON and the setting key 51 is ON when the power supply is started. The setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed when the recovery condition including the clear signal being in the OFF state is satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the fact that the clear signal is in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation process of step S5, the setting confirmation state is entered in which the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed, and the main board 11 sets the performance control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29 . When ending the setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 .

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be in a game stop state to stop the progress of the game. When the game is in the stopped state, shooting of game balls by operating the batted ball operation handle, detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbols are stopped. The display device 20 may be controlled so as to stop display of the winning symbols or the like, or display corresponding to the game stop state different from the losing symbols. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state associated therewith should also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether or not a predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is in the ON state and the setting key 51 is turned ON when power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is on.

When the setting change condition is satisfied in the setting change process of step S7, the setting change state is set in which the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed, and the main board 11 sets to the effect control board 12. A change start command is sent. In the setting change state, the setting values are displayed on the display monitor 29, and each time the operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, the numerical values displayed on the display monitor 29 are sequentially updated and displayed. After that, when the setting key 51 is turned off by an operation by a game hall staff member or the like, the set value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is updated. turn off the When ending the setting change state, a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 .

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be put in the game stop state as in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the game stop state associated therewith should also end.

On the effect control board 12 side, when a setting confirmation start command or a setting change start command is received, control may be performed to notify that the setting is being checked or that the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light-emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 may emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by pressing a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17, for example. Therefore, if the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on when the power supply is started, and if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 and the step The setting change process of S7 is executed to enable control to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed together with the recovery process of step S4 to enable control to the setting confirmation state. If the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is off when the power supply is started, or if the setting key 51 is off, and if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 is executed. On the other hand, it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery processing of step S4 is executed, but it is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10 ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability change information (information indicating the number of times the odd state has occurred, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, execution and suspension management of the special symbol game, control of the jackpot game state, control of the game state, and the like are realized.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 35 as the special symbol process processing. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting prize determination process, the process of detecting the occurrence of the starting prize, storing pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the number of pending memories is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of pre-reading and judging the display result and the variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination is performed on the effect control board 12. will be The effect control command at the time of start winning set to be transmitted in this manner is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

After executing the starting prize determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is to be a "big hit" and the type of the big hit in the case of a "big hit" are determined by the display result. is determined (predetermined) before is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (either a big hit symbol or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the start condition of the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". This variation pattern setting process includes a process of determining one of a plurality of variation patterns using a random number value for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination of whether or not the display result is a "big hit". It is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of variable display of decorative patterns), the form of variable display of decorative patterns (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of decorative patterns. It specifies the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". When the display result is "missing", when it is controlled to the time saving state or the variable probability state, and when the end of the number of cuts is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting a round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is a "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is completed.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning hole, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the big winning hole is counted. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit execution count, and a jackpot gaming state when the upper limit execution count is reached. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending production is executed as a production operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the probability of winning a jackpot and the rate of winning balls are changed according to the set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the probability of winning a big hit and the rate of winning balls are changed. For example, the setting value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, and 6 is the highest probability of winning the big win, and the probability of winning the big win decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 as the value decreases. In this example, when 6 is set as the setting value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the lower the advantage in stages. . If the winning probability of the big win changes according to the set value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the winning probability of the big win is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the big win game state may change according to the set value. The pachinko game machine 1 may be configured so as to be able to set one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player. The set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 are notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the main board 11 side to the effect control board 12 side.

FIG. 37 shows a configuration example of a display result determination table. Figure 37 (A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special figure used when the variation special figure is the first special figure, and Figure 37 (B) shows that the variation special figure is the second special figure. It shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used when it is a figure. A display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101 . In the display result determination table, the hit determination value compared with the random value MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbols, according to the set value. The random number MR1 is a random number for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated within the range of 0-65535. As the display result determination table, a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

As shown in FIG. 37 (A), when the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 1, and if the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, in the range of 0 to 65535 It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit", and 65317 to 65535 are "with time saving "missing" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". In addition, when the set value is 1 and the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss" assigned. It should be noted that when the set value of the first special figure is 2 to 6 and the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is as shown in FIG. 37(A).

As shown in FIG. 37 (B), when the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, when the set value is 1 and the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, in the range of 0 to 65535 It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit", and 65317 to 65425 are "with time saving "missing" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". In addition, when the set value is 1 and the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss" assigned. In addition, for the case where the variable special figure has a set value of 2 to 6 in the second special figure and the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is as shown in FIG. 37 (B).

Here, focusing on the numerical range of the hit determination value assigned to "big hit" or "loss with time reduction" in each display result determination table, as shown in FIG. In the first special figure display result determination table, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set to the common numerical range of the big hit determination values for determining the big hit regardless of the set value.

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range from 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range from 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range from 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, if the setting value is 1, the hit determination value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, common While only numbers within the numerical range (1020-1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", if the set value is 2 or more, the non-common numerical range is added to the common numerical range among the jackpot determination values. A number within the range is assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot reference value). go.

Furthermore, in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 65317 to 65535 of the hit determination values determines the time saving loss regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the deviation judgment value with time saving. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, and with time saving The deviation judgment value is a numerical range different from the range of the jackpot judgment value (1020 to 1346) of the previous set value 6, with 65317 as a reference value for loss with time reduction (reference value for loss with time reduction), in the range of 65317 to 65535 Since it is set, it is prevented that the numerical range of the loss determination value with time saving is overlapped with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. Set to a common numeric range.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 to setting In the case of value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the setting value 3, the range 1347 to 1487 for the setting value 4, and the range 1347 to 1556 for the setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is a variable probability state, if the set value is 1, the common numerical range ( 1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot determination values, the common numerical range plus the non-common numerical range A numerical value is assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1347 as the reference as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot reference value). go.

In the second special figure display result determination table in the case where the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the big hit regardless of the set value. is set to a common numeric range for

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range from 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range from 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range from 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

In other words, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, when the set value is 1, the value can be in the range of 0 to 65535 Of the hit judgment values, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, the common numerical range Numbers within the range plus the non-common number range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot reference value). go.

Furthermore, in the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 65317 to 65425 of the hit determination values determines the time saving loss regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the deviation judgment value with time saving. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, and with time saving The deviation determination value is in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value of the setting value 6 (1020 to 1346), with 65317 as a reference value for loss with time reduction (reference value for loss with time reduction), in the range of 65317 to 65425 Since it is set, it is prevented that the numerical range of the loss determination value with time saving is overlapped with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the common numerical value of the jackpot determination value for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. set in the range. The characteristics of the other second special figure display result determination table are the same as those of the first special figure display result determination table.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, regardless of the set value, 65317 to When the range of 65535 is set in the common numerical range with time reduction and the deviation is the second special symbol, when the game state is the normal state and the time reduction state, the set value Regardless, the range of 65317 to 65425 is set as a common numerical range for time saving. In other words, when the game state is the normal state and the time saving state, the rate at which the variable display result is not with the time saving is a common rate for any set value, so the gambling property depending on the set value can be prevented from becoming excessively high. In addition, for time-saving loss to which a common judgment value number is assigned for each set value, since it is set in a continuous numerical range from 65317, which is the time-saving loss reference value, in any setting value, variable display It is possible to reduce the processing load of the CPU 103 regarding the determination of the result as being out of time saving.

In this pachinko game machine 1, the number of setting values that can be set is 6 from 1 to 6, but the number of setting values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. . Also, the smaller the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player.

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios depending on the set value based on the assignment of the determination value in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The variation pattern may be determined at different ratios according to the set values based on the assignment of the determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined with a common ratio regardless of the set value. A set value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are performed by having the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach differ according to a set value. Alternatively, regardless of the setting value, the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach may be common. In addition, it may be possible to execute arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different ratios according to the set values.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 39 is executed. When the production control main processing shown in FIG. Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeated and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but when using a CPU that does not automatically enter an interrupt prohibition state, interrupt It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main board 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 39 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 40, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S170 to S175 as described below according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and outputting commands (illumination signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effects are controlled during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving a performance control command designating the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4". Further, when the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed without receiving the command designating the start of the jackpot game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "lost", and the production process flag is set. is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. Further, in the big-hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is changed to "5", which is the value corresponding to the ending production process. ”, and ends the effect processing during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the big win game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the big win game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating display and extinguishing of the pattern. Further, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted to set a predetermined number of bets. A slot machine capable of executing a game (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as a slot machine equipped with one or more bonuses, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to being distributed/provided on a detachable recording medium to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be distributed by being installed in a storage device possessed by the software. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) indicate that one is a ratio of “0%”. may contain. For example, one of them may have a ratio of “0%” and the other may have a ratio of “100%” or less than “100%”.

(Description of characteristic portion 193SG in the embodiment of the present invention)
Next, the characteristic portion 193SG (hereinafter abbreviated as the characteristic portion 193SG) in the embodiment of the present invention will be described.

The game machine of form A1 is
A plurality of types of performance identification information (for example, decorative patterns) including specific performance identification information (for example, pseudo consecutive patterns) are variably displayed to derive and display the display results, and an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game) that is advantageous to the player. state) controllable gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1),
As the variable display, a specific effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous a specific effect executing means (for example, a part in which the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 40) capable of executing the effect);
Suggestive effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120 that can execute a suggestive effect suggesting that the specific effect identification information will temporarily stop (for example, temporary stop suggestive effect) executes the effect process during variable display shown in FIG. part) and
A notification effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that can execute a notification effect (for example, a temporary stop notification effect) for notifying that the specific effect identification information has temporarily stopped executes the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. part) and
with
The suggestive effect executing means temporarily lowers the visibility of the effect identification information different from the specific effect identification information to a first low visibility state by displaying an effect display as the suggestive effect, and then the first low visibility state. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 41-33 and 41-34, in the image display device 5, the concentration lines are reduced to the density D1. After lowering the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns by displaying the central lines with a density of D2, the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is further reduced),
The notification effect execution means is capable of executing, as the notification effect, an effect in which effect identification information different from the specific effect identification information is made invisible (for example, as shown in FIGS. 41-34 and 41-35 , a portion where the left and right decoration patterns are rendered invisible by displaying the effect image for notifying the temporary stop in the entire display area of the image display device 5),
The suggestive effect executing means is capable of executing the suggestive effect even when the specific effect identification information does not temporarily stop, and when the temporary stop does not occur, the effect display is performed for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing. Continuous display is possible (for example, as shown in FIGS. 41 to 44, if the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed and the pseudo continuous symbols are not temporarily stopped, after the pseudo continuous symbols are hidden on the image display device 5 also the part where the saturated lines are continuously displayed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the temporary stop by the suggestive effect, and to increase the excitement of the temporary stop by executing the notification effect, and to increase the temporary stop. If not, the effect display is continuously displayed even after the predetermined timing of the temporary stop, thereby making it easier for the player to recognize that the temporary stop was not made and the player's disappointment at the fact that the temporary stop was not made. Since the feeling can be softened, the amusement of the game can be improved.

The game machine of form A2 is
A game machine (e.g., pachinko game) capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of performance identification information (e.g., decoration patterns) to derive and display display results, and control to an advantageous state (e.g., jackpot game state) for the player. machine 1),
As the variable display, special identification information (for example, pseudo-continuous pattern) different from the effect identification information is temporarily stopped at a predetermined timing from when the variable display of the effect identification information is started until the display result is derived and displayed. a specific effect execution means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect process during variable display shown in FIG. 40) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous effect) for restarting the variable display later;
Suggestive effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that can execute a suggestive effect suggesting that the special identification information will temporarily stop (for example, a temporary stop suggestive effect) executes the effect process during variable display shown in FIG. part) and
A notification effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that can execute a notification effect (for example, a temporary stop notification effect) for notifying that the special identification information has temporarily stopped executes the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. part) and
with
The suggestive effect executing means temporarily lowers the visibility of the effect identification information to a first low visibility state by displaying an effect display as the suggestive effect, and then increases the visibility further than the first low visibility state. It is possible to execute an effect that lowers to a low second low visibility state (for example, as shown in FIGS. After reducing the visibility of the decoration pattern, the visibility of the left and right decoration patterns is further reduced by displaying the concentrated lines with a density of D2),
The notification effect execution means can execute an effect that makes the effect identification information invisible as the notification effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 41-34 and 41-35, an effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5 to make the left and right decorative patterns invisible),
The suggestive effect executing means is capable of executing the suggestive effect even when the special identification information does not temporarily stop, and when the temporary stop does not occur, the effect display is continued for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 41 to 44, if the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed and the pseudo continuous symbols are not temporarily stopped, even after the pseudo continuous symbols are hidden on the image display device 5 The part where the saturated lines are continuously displayed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the temporary stop by the suggestive effect, and to increase the excitement of the temporary stop by executing the notification effect, and to increase the temporary stop. If not, the effect display is continuously displayed even after the predetermined timing of the temporary stop, thereby making it easier for the player to recognize that the temporary stop was not made and the player's disappointment at the fact that the temporary stop was not made. Since the feeling can be softened, the amusement of the game can be improved.

The game machine of form A3 is
When the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) does not temporarily stop, the suggestive effect execution means is configured to temporarily stop the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) in the case of temporary stop. moving the effect display toward the position (for example, as shown in FIGS. 41-48 as modification 193SG-1, the part where the concentration line is moved and displayed toward the center of the image display device 5),
The gaming machine according to mode 1 or mode 2, characterized by:
According to this feature, since the predetermined position can be identified by the effect display, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the specific effect identification information (or special identification information) has not temporarily stopped.

The game machine of form A4 is
The effect display has higher transparency after the predetermined timing than before the predetermined timing (for example, as shown in FIGS. Before the switching timing, the saturated lines are displayed with the density D2, and after the display image data switching timing, the saturated lines are displayed with the density D1. The part where the left and right decorative patterns are more visible after the switching timing of the image data),
The gaming machine according to any one of modes A1 to A3, characterized by:
According to this feature, the specific effect identification information (or special identification information) is not temporarily stopped by increasing the transparency of the effect display after the predetermined timing when the specific effect identification information (or special identification information) is temporarily stopped. By making the player aware of this fact and increasing attention to the background image that is easy to see through the effect display, the game against the fact that the specific effect identification information (or special identification information) did not temporarily stop It can ease a person's frustration.

The game machine of form A5 is
The suggestive effect execution means places the effect display at a predetermined position where the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) temporarily stops when the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) temporarily stops, Any effect identification information (or effect identification information) different from the specific effect identification information is erased before it is stopped and displayed (for example, as shown in FIGS. , in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C, the concentration line is hidden before the decorative patterns of numbers other than "1", which is a winning combination, or "1", which is a losing combination, stop. part),
The gaming machine according to any one of modes A1 to A4, characterized by:
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the stop of the effect identification information from being mistaken for the temporary stop.

The game machine of form A6 is
When the notification effect is executed, the temporarily stopped specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) is transformed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 41-35 (G) to 41-35 (H) 2, the part where the pseudo-ream pattern is cracked and explodes),
When the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) is temporarily stopped, at a effect position (for example, the first effect position) that overlaps at least a part of the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) An operable movable body (for example, a second movable body 193SG033) is provided,
The gaming machine according to any one of modes A1 to A5, characterized by:
According to this feature, it is possible to further impress the player that the game has temporarily stopped due to the action of the movable body and the deformation of the specific effect identification information (or special identification information).

The game machine of form A7 is
The movable body is
The area overlapping the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) is smaller than that of the first action (for example, movement from the retreat position shown in FIG. 41-2 to the first effect position) and the first action. It is possible to perform a second action (for example, moving from the retracted position to the second effect position shown in FIG. 41-2),
In the notification effect, the first action is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 41-35 (F), the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retracted position to the first effect position during the temporary stop notification effect. ),
The game machine according to form A6, characterized by:
According to this feature, it is possible to impress the player that the game has been temporarily stopped while preventing the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) from becoming difficult to see due to the movable body.

The game machine of form A8 is
The movable body has a light-emitting part capable of emitting light (for example, the second movable body LED193SG034),
In the first operation, the light emitting unit emits light in a manner corresponding to the effect display (for example, as shown in Modification 193SG-2, the second movable body LED 193SG034 is temporarily stopped during the temporary stop notification effect. The part that emits light in the color of the concentration line displayed in the suggestive effect),
The game machine according to form A7, characterized by:
According to this feature, the light-emitting section emits light in a mode corresponding to the effect display, so that the presentation effect can be improved.

The game machine of form A9 is
The first action of the movable body ends before the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) is erased (for example, FIGS. 41-35 (F) and 41-35 (G) 2, the part where the second movable body 193SG033 is moved from the first effect position to the retracted position before the pseudo-continuous pattern is hidden on the image display device 5),
The game machine according to form A7 or form A8, characterized by:
According to this feature, the player can easily recognize that the specific effect identification information (or special identification information) is erased.

The game machine of form A10 is
When the notification effect is executed, the temporarily stopped specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) is transformed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 41-35 (G) to 41-35 (H) 2, the part where the pseudo-ream pattern is cracked and explodes),
After the specific effect identification information is temporarily stopped, display corresponding to the specific effect (for example, display of “x2”, “x3”, “x4”, etc.) suggesting that the N+1th variable display will be executed. Display means corresponding to a specific effect that can be displayed (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect process during variable display shown in FIG. 40),
a movable body (for example, a second movable body 193SG033) that can move to an effect position (for example, a first effect position) that overlaps at least part of the specific effect corresponding display displayed by the specific effect corresponding display means;
comprising a
The gaming machine according to any one of modes A1 to A9, characterized by:
According to this feature, the action of the movable body can increase attention to the display corresponding to the specific effect, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

The game machine of form A11 is
The movable body has a light-emitting part capable of emitting light (for example, the second movable body LED193SG034),
The light-emitting unit emits light in a manner corresponding to the display corresponding to the specific effect (for example, as the first variable display start count notification effect, blue when displaying "x2", and when displaying "x3") is green, and when displaying "x 4", the second movable body LED 193SG034 is illuminated in red),
The gaming machine according to mode A10, characterized by:
According to this feature, since the light emitting section emits light in a manner corresponding to the display corresponding to the different variable display, it is possible to encourage attention to the display corresponding to the specific effect, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

The game machine of form A12 is
When the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) does not temporarily stop after the suggestive effect is executed, the special effect (for example, the part where the temporary stop suggestive image is displayed in the central part of the image display device 5) (for example, the part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect process during variable display shown in FIG. 40),
with
When the suggestive effect is executed, the effect display of the suggestive effect is displayed prior to the variable display of the effect identification information during the suggestive effect (for example, instead of the normal decorative pattern, a pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed. A portion that is moved and displayed from the top to the bottom of the image display device 5),
The special effect executing means, as the special effect, a first effect period (for example, FIG. 41- 33, the period before the display image data switching timing in the temporary stop suggesting effect) and the predetermined position because the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) did not temporarily stop at the predetermined timing. (for example, as shown in FIGS. 41-33, the period after the display image data switching timing in the temporary stop suggestion effect), and the effect related to the transition can be executed (for example, As shown in FIGS. 41-33, 41-35, and 41-44, the central portion of the image display device 5 displays a temporary stop suggesting image while displaying a concentration line),
The gaming machine according to any one of modes A1 to A11, characterized by:
According to this feature, the display control in the suggestive effect becomes easy, and the special effect makes the transition to the second effect period unnatural when the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) does not temporarily stop. You can prevent it from getting lost.

The game machine of form A13 is
The special effect executing means, as the special effect, adds the second effect at a position different from the predetermined position to the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) temporarily stopped at the predetermined position. It is possible to execute an effect that overlaps and displays the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) in a semi-transparent state at a position corresponding to the period (for example, a temporary stop suggesting image is displayed in the center of the image display device 5 is displayed),
The gaming machine according to mode A12, characterized by:
According to this feature, the transition to the second presentation period can be made more natural.

The game machine of form A14 is
The image display means is capable of synthesizing and displaying displays drawn on a plurality of drawing layers (for example, as shown in FIGS. 41-3 and 41-4, image data 1, image data 2, image Data 3 and data drawn as image data 4 are synthesized and displayed on the image display device 5),
A drawing layer in which the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) and the effect display of the special effect are drawn is different from a drawing layer in which the effect display of the suggestive effect is drawn (for example, FIG. 41-3 , a temporary stop suggesting image is drawn as image data 1, a decoration pattern or a pseudo-continuous pattern is drawn as image data 2, and a concentration line is drawn as image data 4),
The gaming machine according to mode A12 or mode A13, characterized by:
According to this feature, the specific effect identification information (or special identification information) and the effect display of the special effect can be drawn separately from the effect display of the suggestive effect. ) and the degree of freedom of special effects can be increased.

The game machine of form A15 is
When the notification effect is executed, it is possible to execute an effect that the temporarily stopped specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) is deformed and then moved and erased (for example, FIG. 41-35 (G ) to Figures 41-35(H), 41-36(I), and 41-36(J), after the simulated consecutive symbols are cracked and exploded, they are moved and displayed toward the player side. hidden part),
After the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) is erased, a display corresponding to a specific effect (for example, "x2", "x3", " × 4” etc. display) can be displayed (for example, the part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect process during variable display shown in FIG. 40) is further provided,
The specific effect corresponding display means can move and erase the specific effect corresponding display (for example, as shown in FIGS. The part that is hidden after moving toward the player side),
The effect identification information in the N+1th variable display becomes visible after the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) is erased and before the display corresponding to the specific effect is erased (for example, FIG. As shown in 41-37(O), when 'x2', 'x3', 'x4', etc. are displayed on the image display device 5, left and right decorative patterns are visible to the player. part),
The gaming machine according to any one of modes A1 to A14, characterized by:
According to this feature, the effect of the notification effect and the display corresponding to the specific effect can be enhanced, and since the effect identification information can be visually recognized before the display corresponding to the specific effect is erased, the variable display can be restarted. can be easily recognized by the player.

The game machine of form A16 is
A notice effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. part),
The advance notice effect executing means limits the execution of the notice effect when the display corresponding to the specific effect is erased (for example, as shown in Modified Example 193SG-3, the first variable display start count notification effect is " When the display of "x2", "x3", and "x4" is moved and displayed (enlarged display) toward the player side, the part that limits the execution of the notice effect),
The gaming machine according to mode A15, characterized by:
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent a situation in which it becomes difficult to easily recognize that the variable display is restarted due to the execution of the advance notice effect.

The game machine of form A17 is
Both the movement of the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) and the specific effect corresponding display are movements toward the direction of the player who is playing the game (for example, the pseudo consecutive symbols explode and the game a portion where the display is moved toward the player side, and a portion where the display of "x2", "x3", "x4", etc. is moved and displayed toward the player side),
The gaming machine according to form A15 or form A16, characterized by:
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the impression given to the player and improve the performance effect.

The game machine of form A18 is
A special effect that makes it difficult to see the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) temporarily stopped by displaying a special image after the notification effect is executed (for example, the blast shown in modification 193SG-4 a portion that displays a visibility-impairing image such as an image) (for example, a portion in which the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 40),
The specific effect executing means makes the display corresponding to the resumption of the variable display visible after the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) is made invisible by the special effect (for example, modification 193SG -4, a portion that executes re-variable display after hiding the visibility-impairing image),
The gaming machine according to any one of modes A1 to A17, characterized by:
According to this feature, before the display including the effect identification information corresponding to the restart of the variable display is started, a special effect is executed in which the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) becomes difficult to see. It is possible to make it easy to understand that the variable display is restarted.

The game machine of form A19 is
an image display means (for example, an image display device 5) capable of displaying the variable display of the effect identification information and the effect display of each effect;
A plate member provided on the player side of the image display means and having transparency so that the display of the image display means can be visually recognized by the player, and the special image can be displayed by introducing light from the outer peripheral side surface. a light guide plate (for example, the light guide plate shown in Modification 193SG-4);
with
In the special effect, the special effect executing means makes the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) displayed on the image display means invisible by displaying the special image on the light guide plate. (For example, as shown in Modification 193SG-4, when the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped, the visibility impeding image is displayed on the light guide plate so that the player can see the pseudo consecutive symbols displayed on the image display device 5. part that is difficult to see),
The gaming machine according to mode A18, characterized by:
According to this feature, since the special image is displayed on the light guide plate, the player's impression can be enhanced, so that the effect of the special presentation can be enhanced.

The game machine of form A20 is
When the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) does not temporarily stop, the moving speed of the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) before the predetermined timing is Different from the movement speed of the effect identification information (or the special identification information) (for example, as shown in FIGS. The part where the moving speed of the pseudo-continuous pattern after the data switching timing is V3),
The gaming machine according to any one of Modes A1 to A19, characterized by:
According to this feature, the player can easily grasp whether the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) is before or after the predetermined timing of the temporary stop.

The game machine of form A21 is
When the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) temporarily stops, the moving speed of the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) to the predetermined position of the temporary stop before the predetermined timing is The specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) passing through the predetermined position after the predetermined timing is different from the moving speed when returning to the predetermined position (for example, as shown in modification 193SG-5, a pseudo Even if the continuous pattern does not temporarily stop at the central portion of the image display device 5, the pseudo continuous pattern once starts moving downward of the image display device 5 and then returns to the central portion of the image display device 5. In this case, the moving speed of the pseudo-continuous pattern before the display image data switching timing and the center of the image display device 5 after once passing through the center of the image display device 5 are set. The part that changes the moving speed of the pseudo-continuous pattern when returning to the part),
The gaming machine according to any one of modes A1 to A20, characterized by:
According to this feature, the player can easily grasp whether the movement is before passing the predetermined position or the movement back after passing.

The game machine of form A22 is
When the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) that has passed the predetermined position returns to the predetermined position, the suggestive effect execution means regulates the display of the effect display (for example, modification 193SG As shown in -5, when the pseudo continuous pattern once returns to the center of the image display device 5 after passing through the center of the image display device 5, the part where the concentration line is not displayed again),
The gaming machine according to mode A21, characterized by:
According to this feature, it is possible to make it easier to understand that the movement is returning after passing by.

The game machine of form A23 is
When the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) is temporarily stopped, the moving speed before the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) is temporarily stopped is the specified speed after the temporary stop. Different from the movement speed at which the effect identification information (or the special identification information) moves (for example, as shown in FIGS. However, the moving speed of the pseudo consecutive symbols after the temporary stop timing of the pseudo consecutive symbols is V2),
The gaming machine according to any one of Modes A1 to A19, characterized by:
According to this feature, the player can easily grasp whether the movement is before the temporary stop or after the temporary stop.

The game machine of form A24 is
The movement direction of the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) before the temporary stop is different from the movement direction of the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) after the temporary stop (for example, , As shown in FIGS. 41-34 and 41-35, the pseudo-continuous symbols before the temporary stop move downward, while the pseudo-continuous symbols after the temporary stop move toward the player side (front side). the part that moves with the
The gaming machine according to mode A23, characterized by:
According to this feature, it is possible to make it easier to understand that the vehicle is moving after the temporary stop, and to prevent misrecognition of the movement.

FIG. 41-1 is a configuration diagram showing a control board and the like in the characteristic portion 193SG. As shown in FIG. 41-1, the pachinko game machine 1 of the characteristic portion 193SG is provided with a second movable body 193SG033. The second movable body 193SG033 has a drive motor (not shown), and is operable under the control of the drive motor by the effect control CPU 120 . Further, a second movable body LED 193SG034 for causing the second movable body 193SG033 to emit light is built in the second movable body 193SG033. In addition, the second movable body LED193SG034 is connected to the lamp control board 14 .

As shown in FIG. 41-2(A), the second movable body 193SG033 in the non-operating state is positioned below the image display device 5 (retracted position) between the image display device 5 and the game board 2. ing. At the retracted position, most of the second movable body 193SG033 is hidden by the game board 2, so that it is difficult for the player to see the second movable body 193SG033.

The second movable body 193SG033 in the present characteristic portion 193SG is used as a jackpot notification during execution of a temporary stop notification effect and a first variable display start frequency notification effect, which will be described later, during variable display, and during a super reach effect, as shown in FIG. It operates upward from the retracted position shown in (A).

Of these, when the temporary stop notification effect and the first variable display start count notification effect are executed, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retracted position to the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 41-2(B). While moving (operating) to the first effect position, which is the front position, when executing the big hit notification in the reach effect of super reach, as shown in FIG. 41-2 (C), the second movable body 193SG003 It moves (moves) from the retracted position to the second effect position which is the front position of the image display device 5 and which is above the first effect position.

Although not shown, the second movable body 193SG033 that has moved to the first effect position or the second effect position returns to the retracted position again from the first effect position or the second effect position after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. It's becoming

Furthermore, in the present characteristic portion 193SG, the second movable body 193SG moves from the retracted position to the first effect position during the temporary stop notification effect, so that a part of the pseudo continuous symbol overlaps in front view. (See Figure 41-35(F)). On the other hand, the case where the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retracted position to the second effect position is limited only to the execution of the big hit notification during the super ready-to-win effect. In other words, the movement of the second movable body 193SG033 from the retracted position to the first effect position is also an action in which the area overlapping the pseudo consecutive symbols is larger than that of the movement from the retracted position to the second effect position.

Next, the display control section 123 in the characteristic section 193SG will be described. The CGROM in the display control unit 123 stores a plurality of types of image data for displaying images on the image display device 5 . The display control unit 123 can cause the image display device 5 to display a predetermined image based on one image data stored in the CGROM based on an instruction from the effect control CPU 120, and can display a plurality of types of image data. By arranging and displaying an image on the image display device 5, it is possible to display a predetermined effect screen. When the predetermined image is not to be displayed on the image display device 5, depending on the situation, other image data may be placed in front of the image data of the predetermined image with a transmittance of 0%. In the case of controlling so as not to display the image based on the data on the performance screen, and by displaying the image on the image display device 5 which created the display data not arranging the image data of the prescribed image, the prescribed image is not displayed on the performance screen. may be controlled as follows.

As shown in FIGS. 41-3(A) to 41-3(D) and FIGS. 41-4(A) to 41-4(D), for example, when displaying an image on the image display device 5, , an image is displayed on the image display device 5 based on display data created by arranging a plurality of image data including image data 1 to 4. FIG. Of these, FIG. 41-3 is image data immediately before the pseudo-continuous pattern temporarily stops as a temporary stop suggestion effect (see FIG. 41-35) in the present characteristic portion 193SG, and FIG. This is the image data when it did not stop.

As shown in FIG. 41-3(A), the image data 1 displays a pseudo-continuous symbol (this feature) in the central portion (the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C) of the image display device 5 during execution of the temporary stop suggestion effect. This is data drawn to display a temporary stop suggesting image that suggests stopping (temporary stopping).

The pseudo-continuous symbol in the characteristic portion 193SG is a special symbol that is displayed on the image display device 5 only during a temporary stop suggesting effect or a temporary stop notification effect, which will be described later, as a part of the decorative symbol. It is a pattern in which a re-variable display (pseudo continuous effect) of the decoration pattern is executed by temporarily stopping the pattern. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pseudo-continuous symbol is a symbol different from the decoration symbol, and is displayed on the image display device 5 only during a temporary stop suggesting effect or a temporary stop notification effect, which will be described later. may be

Further, in the present characteristic portion 193SG, a form in which the pseudo consecutive symbols are a part of the decorative symbols and are displayed on the image display device 5 only during the temporary stop suggestion effect or the temporary stop notification effect is exemplified. The invention is not limited to this, and the pseudo-continuous symbol may be a symbol that is displayed as a part of the variable display together with the normal ornamental symbol during the temporary stop suggesting effect or the temporary stop notifying effect.

Furthermore, when the pseudo-continuous pattern is a pattern different from the decoration pattern, the normal decoration pattern (characteristic part "1" to "9" number patterns) is temporarily stopped at the central portion of the image display device 5. After that, a case may be provided in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed by changing the temporarily stopped decorative symbol to a pseudo-continuous symbol.

As shown in FIGS. 41-3(B) and 41-4(A), the image data 2 shows the above-described pseudo consecutive symbols directed downward from above the image display device 5 during execution of the temporary stop suggestion effect. In addition to being data drawn to display the movement display of , immediately after the temporary stop suggesting effect is completed without the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stopping, instead of the pseudo consecutive symbols, from the top to the bottom of the image display device 5 This data is drawn to display a variable display of normal ornamental patterns (symbols "1" to "9" in this characterizing portion 193SG) toward the .

In the image data 2, when the temporary stop suggesting effect is executed, the ornamental symbols are displayed in the “left” and “right” ornamental symbol display areas 5L and 5R, respectively, while the temporary stop suggesting effect is not executed. It is also image data for displaying variable display of decorative patterns in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R at the time of execution.

As shown in FIG. 41-4(B), the image data 3 is a simulated image from the central portion of the image display device 5 toward the lower side immediately after the temporary stop suggestion effect ends without the simulated continuous symbols temporarily stopping. This data is drawn to display the moving display of consecutive symbols.

As shown in FIGS. 41-3(C) and 41-4(C), the image data 4 is distributed from the outer peripheral edge of the image display device 5 to the central portion of the image display device 5 ("middle" decoration pattern display). This is data drawn to display a saturated line toward the area 5C).

As shown in FIGS. 41-3 and 41-4, these image data 1 to 4 are set with display priorities for displaying images on the image display device 5. FIG. Image data 1 is set to have the highest display priority. The display priority of image data 2 is set lower than that of image data 1, and the display priority of image data 3 is set lower than that of image data 2. FIG. The lowest display priority is set for image data 4 (image display priority in image display device 5: image data 1>image data 2>image data 3>image data 4). That is, in the image display device 5, the image based on the image data 1 is displayed as the uppermost image, the image based on the image data 2 is displayed as the lower image than the image based on the image data 1, and the image based on the image data 3 is displayed. The image is displayed as a lower image than the image based on the image data 1 and the image based on the image data 2, and the image based on the image data 4 is displayed based on the image data 1, the image based on the image data 2, and the image data 3. It is designed to be displayed as an image in a lower layer than the image.

In addition to the image data 1 to image data 4, the image data in the characteristic portion 193SG includes image data 5 drawn to display a background image on the image display device 5, although not shown. . The display priority of the image data 5 is set lower than that of the image data 4 . That is, in the characteristic portion 193SG, among the images displayed on the image display device 5, the background image is displayed as the lowest layer data.

Therefore, when the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed, as shown in FIG. The image based on the image data 1 (temporary stop suggestion image) is displayed with priority over the image based on the image data 2 and the image based on the image data 4. As shown in FIG. 41-4(D), the image based on the image data 3 (from the center of the pseudo-continuous symbol to The image based on the image data 4 (concentrated line) is displayed with priority over the image based on the image data 4 (moving display toward the bottom), and the image based on the image data 2 (moving display from the top to the bottom of the decorative pattern) is displayed as the image data. The image based on the image data 3 and the image based on the image data 4 are preferentially displayed.

Incidentally, the transmittance of the concentrated line in this characteristic portion 193SG is set to be high (for example, 50%). For this reason, as shown in FIGS. 41-3(C) and 41-4(D), during execution of the temporary stop suggesting effect, the player can see decorative symbols, pseudo consecutive symbols, and temporary stop suggesting effects through the concentration line. The image is visible.

In particular, in this characteristic portion 193SG, during execution of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) displays the image data shown in FIG. The player is made to pay attention to whether or not the symbols are temporarily stopped. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123), in the variable display for executing the temporary stop suggestion effect, temporarily stops the pseudo continuous symbols regardless of whether or not the pseudo continuous symbols are temporarily stopped at the start timing of the variable display. The variable display is executed by setting image data to be stopped. Then, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) changes the image data to be displayed on the image display device 5 at the display image data switching timing (see FIGS. 41 to 33) of the temporary stop suggestion effect in which the pseudo continuous symbols are not temporarily stopped. The image data (FIG. 41-3) in which the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped is switched to the image data (FIG. 41-4) in which the pseudo-continuous pattern shown in FIG. 41-4 is not temporarily stopped.

FIG. 41-5(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in this characterizing portion 193SG. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, where the first byte indicates MODE (class of command) and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The leading bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the leading bit of EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 41-5(A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 41-5 (A), the command 8001H is the first variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A. . Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special design in the special game. It is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) such as a design (also referred to as a production design). Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value that is arbitrarily set according to the contents of instructions by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data are set according to the specified variation pattern.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special design or a decorative design. In the variable display result specifying command, for example, as shown in FIG. 41-5(B), it is determined whether the variable display result (also referred to as variable display result) is "loss", "big hit" or "minor hit". Different EXT data are set according to the result (predetermined result) or the determination result (jackpot type determination result) of a plurality of types of jackpot types when the variable display result is "big hit".

Among the variable display result specifying commands, for example, as shown in FIG. 41-5(B), the command 8C00H is the first variable display result specifying command indicating the predetermined result that the variable display result is "no". . The command 8C01H is a second variable display result specification command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "unprobable variable big hit". The command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result will be a "minor hit".

The command 8F00H is a pattern confirmation command that designates stoppage (confirmation) of the decorative patterns in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5 . The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state designation command corresponding to the game state (low probability low base state, normal state) in which neither the time saving control nor the probability variation control is performed, and the command 9501H is the time saving control. It is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state (low probability high base state, short working time state) in which probability variation control is not performed while it is performed. In addition, the command 9502H is the third game state designation command corresponding to the game state (high probability low base state, time saving no probability change state) where the time saving control is not performed while the probability change control is performed, and the command 9503H is time saving control and probability change It is a fourth game state designation command corresponding to the game state (high-probability-high base state, time-saving probability-variable state) in which control is performed together.

The command A0XXH is a winning start designation command (also referred to as "fanfare command") for designating display of an effect image indicating the start of a big winning game or a small winning game. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening open notification command for notifying that the large winning opening is in an open state in the jackpot gaming state. The command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for the big winning opening to notify that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big winning game state. The command A3XXH is a win end designation command for designating display of an effect image at the end of a big win game or a small win.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result designation command. . In the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, for example, corresponding to the number of rounds executed in the normal opening jackpot state and the high-speed opening jackpot state (for example, "1" to "10") to be described later, Different EXT data are set.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball passing through (entering) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) occurs. It is a first start winning designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball passing through (entering) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) occurs. , It is a second start winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number in order to be able to specify the special figure reserved storage number. Command C2XXH is a second pending storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure pending storage number in order to be able to specify the special figure pending storage number. The first pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied, when the first starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied, when the second starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . In addition, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserved memories decreases), the special game It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution or the like.

Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command may be used to report an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number.

The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (winning determination result specification commands) indicating the content of the winning determination result. Among them, the command C4XXH is a symbol designation command indicating whether or not the variable display result will be a "big hit" as a result of determination at the time of winning, the determination result of the big hit type (probable variation, non-probability variation, or sudden probability) and whether it will be a small hit. is. In addition, the command C6XXH is a variation category command indicating whether the random number for variation pattern determination is a variation pattern of "non-reach", "super reach", and "other" as a result of determination at the time of winning. is.

It should be noted that the commands shown in FIG. 41-5(A) are only examples, and some of these commands may be omitted, different commands may be used in place of these commands, and these commands may be used instead of these commands. You can add commands that are different from the commands in For example, a prize ball number notification command for specifying the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the game ball entering each prize hole, or a gate for notifying that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. You may make it provide the notification command etc. which notify the remaining frequency|count that a notification command of passage, probability variation control, and time saving control are performed is performed.

FIG. 41-6 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 41-6, in this characteristic portion 193SG, on the main board 11 side, the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination. , and the random number MR4 for judging the result of normal/universal figure display are controlled so as to be countable. Random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data representing part or all of these random numbers MR1 to MR4. For example, the CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in a game control counter setting unit (not shown), to update various numerical data by software, thereby setting the random numbers MR1 to MR4. You may make it count the numerical data which show a part.

The random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result is a random number used for determining whether or not to control the variable display result such as the special figure in the special figure game as "big hit" to the big win game state. It takes a value in the range from "1" to "65536". The random number MR2 for judging the type of jackpot is any one of "variable jackpot A", "variable jackpot B", "variable jackpot C", and "variable jackpot" when the variable display result is "jackpot". It is a random value used to determine the , and takes a value in the range of "1" to "100", for example.

The random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number used to determine one of a plurality of types prepared in advance for the variation pattern in the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols. 997”.

The random number MR4 for judging the result of normal pattern display is used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal pattern display device 20 in the normal pattern display is "win" or "lose". It is a random number that can be set, and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

FIG. 41-7 (A) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 1 stored in the ROM101. In this characterizing portion 193SG, as a special figure display result determination table, a common special figure display result determination table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure, but the present invention is not limited to this , Separate special figure display result determination tables may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

The special figure display result determination table 1 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the determined special symbol is derived and displayed, whether or not to control the variable display result as "big hit" to the big hit game state is determined based on the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination. It is a referenced table.

In the special figure display result determination table 1 in this characteristic portion 193SG, depending on whether the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state) or a probability variable state (high probability state), A numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment is assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot" or "loss".

In the special figure display result determination table 1, the table data showing the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment is whether or not to control the special figure display result as "big hit" to the big hit game state. It is judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result determination table 1 in this characteristic portion 193SG, when the gaming state is a variable probability state (high probability state), more determination values than when it is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), It is assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot". As a result, in the variable probability state (high probability state) in which the variable probability control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state. Then, compared to the determined probability (approximately 1/300 in this characteristic portion 193SG), the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as "big hit" to the big hit game state becomes higher (approximately 1 in this characteristic portion 193SG). /30). That is, in the special figure display result determination table 1, when the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a probability variable state (high probability state), it is determined to control to a big hit game state compared to when it is a normal state or a time saving state. Judgment data is assigned to the decision result as to whether or not to control to the jackpot game state so that the probability of winning is increased.

In addition, FIG. 41-7 (B) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 2 stored in the ROM101. The special figure display result determination table 2 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the determined special symbol is derived and displayed, it is determined based on the random number MR1 for special symbol display result determination whether or not to control the variable display result to a small winning game state as a "small win". is a table referenced for

In the special figure display result determination table 2 in the present characteristic portion 193SG, regardless of whether the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state) or a probability variable state (high probability state), A numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit".

In the special figure display result determination table 2, the table data showing the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination is whether or not to control the special figure display result to the small hit game state as "small hit". It is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result determination table 2 in the characteristic part 193SG, the number of determination values assigned to the "small hit" differs between the first special figure game and the second special figure. there is Specifically, in the case of the special game of the first special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the "small hit", but in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the "small hit". No judgment value is assigned. Therefore, as described later, the variable display of the second special figure is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special figure, and the second start winning prize formed by the variable winning ball device 6B by executing the time saving control In the high base state where the winning to the mouth occurs and the variable display of the second special figure is often executed, the "small hit" almost does not occur, and the second start formed by the variable winning ball device 6B In a high base state in which game balls are likely to enter the prize winning opening, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of small hits in which a large number of game balls cannot be acquired, thereby preventing the game interest from deteriorating.

FIG. 41-8(A) shows a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. The jackpot type determination table in the present characteristic portion 193SG selects any of a plurality of types of jackpot types based on the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined to control the special figure display result as "jackpot" to the jackpot gaming state. It is a table that is referenced to determine whether In the big hit type determination table, the special symbol for which variable display (variable display) is performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (second 2 Special symbol game by special symbol display device 4B), the numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR2 for judging the jackpot type is “non-probability variable jackpot”, “probability variable jackpot A”, “ It is assigned to a plurality of types of jackpots, such as "probability variable big hit B" and "probability variable big hit C".

Here, the jackpot type in this feature portion 193SG will be described with reference to FIG. 41-8 (B). "Probability variable jackpot A" and "probability variable jackpot B" that are executed and shift to a high-probability high base state, and high-probability low base state in which high-probability control is executed after the end of the jackpot game state but time-saving control is not executed. "Variable probability big hit C" to shift, and "non-variable big hit" to shift to the low probability high base state by executing only time saving control after the end of the big win game state are set.

The jackpot game state by the "probability variable jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated. On the other hand, the big-hit game state by the "probability variable big-hit B" is a normal open big-hit game in which five rounds (so-called five rounds) are repeated to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player. . In addition, the big win game state by the "non-probability variable big win" is a normal open big win in which 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated. . Therefore, the "variable probability big hit A" may be called a 10 round (10R) variable probability big hit, and the "variable probability big hit B" may be called a 5 round (5R) probability variable big hit. Furthermore, in the big-hit game based on the "probability-variable big-hit C", two rounds (so-called two rounds) of changing the special variable winning-ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated, and a special It is a high-speed opening jackpot in which the opening period of the variable winning ball device 7 is shorter than other jackpot games (for example, 0.1 seconds). In addition, during the jackpot game of any jackpot type, the variable probability control and the time saving control are not executed.

In addition, although not shown in the figure, the small winning game state in the characteristic portion 193SG changes the special variable winning ball device 7 twice to the first state that is advantageous for the player, and the opening time is the same as the probability variable big win C. It is an open period (0.1 seconds in this characteristic portion 193SG). In addition, after the end of the small winning game, the game state immediately before the small winning game is taken over.

In other words, in this characteristic portion 193SG, when it is determined to be "variable probability big hit C" or "small hit", variable display is executed with the same variation pattern (PC1-1 shown in FIG. 41-9) In addition, as a result of the variable display, the chance number is stopped and displayed, and furthermore, the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7 is the same. Since it is impossible to distinguish whether it is a ``variable probability big win C'' in which the variable probability control is executed or a ``minor win'' in which the previous game state is continued without executing the variable probability control, the variable probability big win C cannot be distinguished. After the end of the big win game or the small win game, the game can be continued while making the player expect that the variable probability control is executed.

The high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the big win game state of the variable probability big win A and the variable probability big win B are continuously executed until the big win occurs again after the end of the big win game state. Therefore, when the regenerated big win is the variable probability big win A or the variable probability big win B, the high probability control and the time saving control are executed again after the big win game state is ended, so that the big win game state does not go through the normal state. It becomes a so-called continuous state, which occurs continuously.

On the other hand, the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state by the "non-probable variable jackpot" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this feature section 193SG), or the special figure of the predetermined number of times The game ends when a big win game state is entered before the game is executed.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 41-8 (A), depending on whether the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure or the second special figure, "probability variable jackpot A", " Allocation of determination values to the jackpot types of "probability variable jackpot B", "probability variable jackpot C", and "non-probability variable jackpot" is different. That is, if the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure, the judgment value in the predetermined range (the value in the range of "81" to "100") has a small number of rounds "variable hit B" or "variable probability While assigned to the jackpot type of "jackpot C", when the special figure displayed variably is the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C" Not done. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the first start condition for starting the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A. When the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the second start condition for starting the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. , the ratio of determining the jackpot type to the "probability variable big hit B" or "probability variable big hit C" with a small number of rounds can be made different. In particular, in the special game using the second special figure, it is not determined that the jackpot type is controlled to the normal opening jackpot state or the high-speed opening jackpot state with a small number of rounds by setting the jackpot type to ``probable variable jackpot B'' or ``probable variable jackpot C''. Therefore, for example, by high opening control accompanying time saving control, in a game state in which game balls are likely to enter the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the frequent occurrence of a jackpot state in which the obtained prize balls are small is avoided. It is possible to prevent the game interest from being lowered.

In addition, in the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 41-8 (A), the allocation of the determination value for the "non-variable" jackpot type is the first special figure special figure game or the second special figure Since it is the same regardless of whether it is a non-variable jackpot or a definite variable jackpot, the probability is the same regardless of whether it is the first special game or the second special game. It is said that

Therefore, as described above, depending on whether the allocation of the determination value for "variable probability big hit B" or "variable probability big hit C" is different depending on whether it is a special game of the first special figure or a second special figure Then, the allocation of the judgment value for the "probable variable jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the special game of the first special figure or the second special figure. It is set to be easier to determine in the case of the special game of the special figure than in the case of the first special figure of the special game.

In addition, even in the case of the special game of the second special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range different from that of the special game of the first special figure is the "variable probability big hit B" or "variable probability big hit C". You may make it assign to a classification. For example, in the case of the special game of the second special, the judgment value less than that of the special game of the first special is the big hit type of "probable variable big hit B" or "probable variable big hit C". may be assigned. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data regardless of whether the game is the special game of the first special figure or the second special figure.

FIG. 41-9 shows the variation pattern in this characteristic portion 193SG. In this characteristic portion 193SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "loss", the variable A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance so as to correspond to cases where the display result is a "big win" or a "minor win". In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variation display mode of the decoration pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "lost" and the variation display mode of the decoration pattern is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach loss variation pattern"). Also, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss". A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern.

The jackpot variation pattern and reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach reach effect is executed. Although two types of normal reach variation patterns are provided in the present characteristic portion 193SG, the present invention is not limited to this, and three or more types of normal reach variation patterns may be provided, or one normal reach variation pattern may be provided. Only the type may be used. Moreover, even in the super reach variation pattern, a plurality of super reach variation patterns such as super reach α, super reach β, . . . may be provided.

In addition, the variation pattern in this characteristic portion 193SG includes a special winning variation pattern ( PC1-1) is also included.

As shown in FIG. 41-9, the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach in this characteristic portion 193SG is executed is set shorter than the super reach fluctuation pattern.

In addition, the normal reach variation pattern in the characteristic portion 193SG includes a variation pattern in which the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and re-variably displayed during variable display, and a pseudo-continuous effect is not executed, and a pseudo-continuous effect is executed once during variable display. There is a variation pattern. In addition, in the normal reach variation pattern, the variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is not executed during the variable display is set to have a special figure variation time shorter than the variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed once during the variable display.

Furthermore, as for the super reach variation pattern in the characteristic portion 193SG, there are a variation pattern in which pseudo-continuous effects are performed twice during variable display, and a variation pattern in which pseudo-continuous effects are performed three times during variable display. In addition, in the super reach variation pattern, the variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed twice during the variable display is set to have a special figure variation time shorter than the variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed three times during the variable display. .

In addition, in this characteristic portion 193SG, since the variable display result is set in order of super reach, normal reach, and non-reach so that the degree of expectation for a big hit becomes "big hit", in the normal reach fluctuation pattern and the super reach fluctuation pattern The longer the special figure fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

That is, with respect to the normal reach variation pattern and the super reach variation pattern in the present characteristic portion 193SG, the greater the number of times of simulated continuous effects executed during the variable display, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

In addition, in the present characteristic unit 193SG, as will be described later, the type of variation pattern is first determined, such as the type of non-reach, the type of normal reach, the type of super reach, etc. Then, the variation pattern to be executed is not determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type, but is determined using only the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern is provided, and from the random number for determining the type of variation pattern The type of variation pattern may be determined first, and then the variation pattern belonging to the determined type may be determined.

FIG. 41-10 is an explanatory diagram of the determination method of the variation pattern in the characteristic portion 193SG. In this characterizing section 193SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected is varied according to the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of pending memories.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 41-10, when the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot, the jackpot variation pattern determination table A is selected, and the jackpot variation pattern determination table A is used to determine the variation pattern. PB1-1 (variation pattern of normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (variation pattern of one-time jackpot of normal reach pseudo-continuous production), PB1-3 (variation pattern of two-time jackpot of super reach pseudo-continuous production), PB1-4 (super Reach pseudo continuous performance 3 times big hit variation pattern). Also, if the variable display result is the probability variable jackpot A or the probability variable jackpot B, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table B, and use the jackpot variation pattern determination table B to set the variation pattern to PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot). Variation pattern), PB1-2 (Normal reach pseudo continuous effect 1 time big hit variation pattern), PB1-3 (Normal reach pseudo continuous effect 2 times big hit variation pattern), PB1-4 (Normal reach pseudo continuous effect 3 times big hit variation pattern) ).

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 41-10, the big-hit variation pattern determination table A and the big-hit variation pattern determination table B have different decision ratios for PB1-1 to PB1-4. Specifically, in the big hit variation pattern determination table A, PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 30%, PB1-2 is determined at a rate of 45%, PB1-3 is determined at a rate of 20%, PB1-4 are determined at a rate of 5%. On the other hand, in the big hit variation pattern determination table B, PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 5%, PB1-2 is determined at a rate of 20%, PB1-3 is determined at a rate of 30%, and PB1- 4 is determined at a rate of 45%. That is, in the present characteristic portion 193SG, when the variable display result is the probability variable jackpot A or the probability variable jackpot B, the variable display result is determined to be the super reach variation pattern at a higher rate than when the variable display result is the non-probability variable jackpot. It's becoming Furthermore, focusing on the number of times the pseudo consecutive effects are executed, when the variable display result is the probability variable jackpot A or the probability variable jackpot B, more pseudo consecutive effects are performed during the variable display than when the variable display result is the non-probable variable jackpot. easier to implement. Therefore, in the present characteristic portion 193SG, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the variation pattern in the variable display and the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous effect.

Also, if the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot C or a small hit, select the special hit variation pattern determination table, and use the special hit variation pattern determination table to set the variation pattern to PC1-1 (special hit variation pattern). That is, in the present characteristic portion 193SG, the variable display is performed in the same variation pattern depending on whether the variable display result is the probability variable big hit C or the small hit, so that the player can perform the variable display from the variation pattern. It is difficult to specify whether the result is a variable probability big win C or a small win.

Also, when the variable display result is "missing" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 2 or less, select the variation pattern determination table A for loss, Using the fluctuation pattern determination table A for loss, the fluctuation pattern is PA1-1 (variation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (normal reach pseudo-continuous effect 1 time loss fluctuation pattern ), PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of missing two super ready-to-win pseudo-continuous performances), and PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of losing three times of super ready-to-win pseudo-continuous performance).

In addition, when the variable display result is "loss" in the normal game state (low base state), and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 3, the variation pattern determination table B for loss is selected, and the loss Using the fluctuation pattern determination table B, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-2 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (normal reach pseudo-continuous effect 1 time fluctuation pattern of loss ), PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of missing two super ready-to-win pseudo-continuous performances), and PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of losing three times of super ready-to-win pseudo-continuous performance).

In addition, when the variable display result is "loss" in the normal game state (low base state), and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 4, select the variation pattern determination table C for loss, and the loss Using the fluctuation pattern determination table C, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-3 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (normal reach pseudo-continuous effect 1 time fluctuation pattern of loss ), PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of missing two super ready-to-win pseudo-continuous performances), and PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of losing three times of super ready-to-win pseudo-continuous performance).

Also, if the variable display result is "loss" in the time saving state (high base state), select the variation pattern determination table D for deviation, and use the variation pattern determination table D for deviation to determine the variation pattern PA1-4 Determined from (shortening fluctuation pattern for non-reach loss) and PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss).

In other words, if the variable display result in the present characteristic portion 193SG is "missing", the number of pending storage of the variable special figure is 3 or 4, etc., or based on the time saving state, the special figure Since the rate of execution of variable display increases due to the shortening variation patterns (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4) whose variation time is shorter than the normal non-reach variation pattern (PA1-1), It is possible to shorten the period until the next variable display result becomes a big hit while preventing the game from being delayed.

The RAM 102 in the characteristic portion 193SG is provided with, for example, a game control data holding area (not shown) as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . The game control data holding area includes a first special figure reservation storage unit, a second special figure reservation storage unit, a general figure reservation storage unit, a game control flag setting unit, a game control timer setting unit, and a game control counter A setting unit and a game control buffer setting unit are provided.

In the first special figure reservation storage unit, the game ball passes (enters) the first start prize opening formed by the prize ball device 6A, and although the start prize (first start prize) has occurred, the special figure that has not yet been started It stores the pending data of the game (special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A). As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the first start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), and the establishment of the first start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and numerical data indicating random number MR3 for variation pattern determination extracted from random number circuit 104 etc. by CPU 103 based on is reserved data. , until the stored number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The suspension data stored in the first special figure suspension storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game ) to make it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

The second special figure reservation storage unit is a special feature that has not yet started although the game ball has passed (entered) the second start prize opening formed by the variable prize ball device 6B and the start prize (second start prize) has occurred. The pending data of the figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the second start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), and the establishment of the second start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and numerical data indicating random number MR3 for variation pattern determination extracted from random number circuit 104 etc. by CPU 103 based on is reserved data. , until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The suspension data stored in the second special figure suspension storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game ) to make it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

In addition, hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning hole, and the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning hole The suspension information (second suspension information) based on the establishment of the second starting prize by chance may be stored in association with the suspension number in the common suspension storage unit. In this case, starting opening data indicating which of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball passed through (entered) should be included in the holding information and stored in association with the holding number. .

The normal pattern reservation storage part stores the reservation information of the normal pattern game which is not yet started by the normal pattern display device 20 even though the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21.例文帳に追加For example, the general pattern reservation storage unit associates the game ball with the reservation number in the order in which it passed through the passage gate 41, and determines the general pattern display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game ball. is stored as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 and the like. For example, the game control flag setting section stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or the OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

Various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 are provided in the game control timer setting section. For example, the game control timer setting unit stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control counter setting unit stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the game random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update the game numbers by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit, a random number that is not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data representing the random numbers MR2 to MR4 is stored as a random count value, and periodically according to the execution of the software by the CPU 103. Numerical data indicating each random number is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be software for updating the random count value separately from the numeric data update operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be software extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control buffer setting unit stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In the RAM 122 mounted on the production control board 12 shown in FIG. 32, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the production operation, for example, production control data holding as shown in FIG. 41-11 (A) Area 193SG190 is provided. The production control data holding area 193SG190 shown in FIG. 41-11(A) includes a production control flag setting unit 193SG191, a production control timer setting unit 193SG192, a production control counter setting unit 193SG193, and a production control buffer setting unit 193SG194. I have it.

The effect control flag setting unit 193SG191 stores a plurality of types of effect operation states, such as the display state of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, and states that can be updated according to effect control commands transmitted from the main substrate 11, for example. is flagged. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 193SG191 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an ON state or an OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit 193SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as display operations of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 193SG192 stores data indicating the timer value of each of a plurality of types of timers.

The production control counter setting unit 193SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various production operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 193SG193 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 193SG194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 193SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this characterizing portion 193SG, the data constituting the start winning reception command buffer 193SG194A as shown in FIG. In the start winning command buffer 193SG194A, the storage area (buffer number "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special figure reserved memory Corresponding area) and a storage area corresponding to the first special figure being variably displayed (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") are provided. In addition, in the start winning reception command buffer 193SG194A, the storage area (buffer number "2-1" to "2-4 ”) and a storage area corresponding to the second special figure being variably displayed (area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”). When there is a start prize to the first start prize mouth or the second start prize mouth, start mouth prize designation command (first start mouth prize designation command or second start mouth prize designation command), pattern designation command, variation category designation Four commands, a command and a pending memory number notification command (first pending memory number notification command or second pending memory number notification command), are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage in the start winning reception command buffer 193SG194A are these starting entrance winning designation command, symbol designation command, variation category designation command, A storage area (entry) is reserved for storing the number of pending memories notification command in association with the first special figure pending memory and the second special figure pending memory.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) will be described later when the start condition is satisfied and variable display of the highest reserved storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started. , and the storage contents of the buffer number "1-0" or the buffer number "2-0" storing the contents of the reserved storage for which the start condition is satisfied are displayed in the variable display. It is designed to be cleared in the waiting process per special figure that is executed when ending the.

Further, in the start winning command buffer 193SG194A of the characterizing part 193SG, whether or not the display pattern has not been determined in the pre-reading notice setting process (FIG. 37). Or, in other words, due to the occurrence of a new start winning prize, the display pattern determination is undecided due to the newly stored starting entrance winning designation command, pattern designation command, variation category designation command, and pending memory number notification command. A display undecided flag indicating a, a pending display flag in which a flag value corresponding to the display pattern (display mode) of the pending memory display is set, and a first special figure pending memory and a second special figure pending memory Each corresponding to A storage area is secured for each storage area (entry) so that it can be stored in association with the buffer number.

In addition, in the reception command buffer 193SG194A at the time of start winning of this characteristic part 193SG, a storage area so that the effect limit flag can be stored in association with each buffer number corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage and the second special figure reservation storage is secured for each storage area (entry). It should be noted that the effect limit flag means that in the command analysis process (Fig. 41-18), the start winning occurred at the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening, but the symbol designation command, the variable category designation command, the number of reserved memories This is a flag indicating that the entry is not subject to the pre-reading notice effect when the notification command is not received within a first reserved storage number notification waiting time or a second reserved storage number notification waiting time, which will be described later.

It should be noted that the pending display flag stores "0" corresponding to the display pattern of the normal pending memory display when the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect is not determined in the pre-reading notice setting process to be described later. As a result, the reserved memory display in the normal display mode (for example, white circle) is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 193SG5D and the second reserved memory display area 193SG5U provided at the bottom of the image display device 5, When the execution of the reading notice effect is determined, a special mode different from the normal display mode (for example, a square (◇) or a star (☆)) corresponding to the display pattern of the pending memory display "1" (square (◇)) or "2" (star (☆)) is set, the reserved memory display in a special mode different from the normal display mode is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 193SG5D and the second reserved memory display area 193SG5U. , and in the variable display corresponding to the reserved memory display, it is announced that there is a high possibility of a big hit or a super reach.

The effect control CPU 120 stores the command at the time of starting winning to the first starting winning opening from the beginning (the entry with the smallest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage of the receiving command buffer 193SG194A at the time of starting winning. Then, at the time of starting winning to the second starting winning opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the entry with the youngest buffer number) in the free entry corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage of the reception command buffer 193SG194A at the time of starting winning. go. At the time of starting winning, from the starting mouth winning designation command to the reservation storage number notification command is sequentially transmitted. Therefore, if the command is received, the storage area corresponding to each of the end "1" to "4" of the buffer number corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage or the second special figure reservation storage, start opening winning designation command , symbol designating command, variation category designating command, and pending storage number notification command.

41-11(B), each time the variable display of the decoration pattern is started, the entry (buffer Entry number "1-0" or "2-0") is deleted, and the entry (buffer number "1-1" or "2-0") corresponding to the pending storage of the starting variable display is deleted. -1”) and the storage contents of the entries after the pending storage of the starting variable display are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 41-11 (B), when the variable display of the decoration pattern of the first special figure reservation storage is completed, each command stored in the buffer number "0" is deleted, and the buffer number Each command stored in "1" is shifted to buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" is shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "1". The commands shifted and stored in areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4" are shifted to areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, the buffer number "0" becomes an area (entry) for storing each command related to the pending storage that is variably displayed at that time.

Next, the start prize determination process of the characterizing portion 193SG executed in step S101 of FIG. 35 will be described based on FIG. 41-12. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether or not it is in the state (step 193SGS101). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is in the ON state (step 193SGS101; Y), the first special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure, is a predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether or not it has a value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 193SGS102). CPU103, for example by reading the 1st reservation memory number count value which is the storage value of the 1st reservation memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting section, it should be possible to specify the number of the first special figure reservation memory. At step 193SGS102, when the number of first special figure pending storage is not the upper limit value (step 193SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section is set to "1" (step 193 SGS 103).

When the first starting port switch 22A is off in step 193SGS101 (step 193SGS101; N), when the number of first special figure pending storage has reached the upper limit in step 193SGS102 (step 193SGS102; Y), variable Based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, it is determined whether the second starting opening switch 22B is in the ON state ( step 193 SGS 104). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is in the ON state (step 193SGS104; Y), the second special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether or not it has a value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 193SGS105). CPU103, for example by reading the second reservation memory number count value which is the stored value of the second reservation memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit, it is sufficient if it can identify the number of second special figure reservation memory. At step 193SGS105, when the number of second special figure pending storage is not the upper limit value (step 193SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section is set to "2" (step 193 SGS 106).

After executing either of the processes of step 193SGS103 and step 193SGS106, the number of special figure pending storage corresponding to the starting opening buffer value which is the stored value of the starting opening buffer is updated so as to add 1 (step 193SGS107). For example, when the starting buffer value is "1", the first reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting buffer value is "2", the second reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1. In this way, the first reserved memory number count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is established. Updated to increase. In addition, the second reserved memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total reserved storage number is also updated by adding 1 (step 193SGS108). For example, the total reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting section, may be updated so as to add 1.

After executing the processing of step 193 SGS108, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination and the jackpot type determination from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit Numerical data indicating the random number MR2 for the fluctuation pattern determination and the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern are extracted (step 193 SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number extracted in this way is stored by being set as suspension information at the beginning of the empty entry in the special figure suspension storage unit corresponding to the start buffer value (step 193SGS110). For example, when the start buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit, while when the start buffer value is "2", the first Numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the 2 special figure reservation storage unit.

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for judging the result of the special figure display and the random number MR2 for judging the type of the big hit determine whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is to be a "big hit", and whether or not the variable display result is determined. It is used to determine the jackpot type in the case of "jackpot". The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbols and decorative symbols. The CPU 103 executes the process of step 193 SGS109 to extract numerical data representing all of the random numbers used for determining the variable display mode including the result of variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols and the variable display time.

Following the processing of step 193SGS110, the transmission setting of the starting opening winning designation command according to the starting opening buffer value is performed (step 193SGS111). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. 12 for sending the first starting entry winning designation command. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer. Make settings for sending the second start winning designation command. The start opening winning designation command set in this way is sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. transmitted.

Following the processing of step 193SGS111, a winning random number value determination processing is executed (step 193SGS112). After that, for example, by storing the storage address of the pending storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, etc., the pending storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (Step 193SGS113). The reserved memory number notification command set in this manner is, for example, after the special symbol process process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. transmitted.

After executing the process of step 193SGS113, it is determined whether or not the starting buffer value is "1" (step 193SGS114). At this time, if the start buffer value is "1" (step 193SGS114; Y), the start buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to "0" (step 193SGS115). move on. On the other hand, when the start buffer value is "2" (step 193SGS114; N), the start buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to "0" (step 193SGS116). End the process. Thus, even when both the first starter switch 22A and the second starter switch 22B simultaneously detect valid starting winnings of game balls, processing based on the detection of both valid starting winnings can be reliably completed.

FIG. 41-13(A) is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step 193SGS112 of FIG. 41-13 as the winning random number determination process. In this characteristic portion 193SG, when variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, special symbol normal processing (step S110 in FIG. 35, FIGS. result) is regarded as "big hit", and it is determined whether or not to control to the big hit game state. Further, in the variation pattern setting process (step S111 in FIG. 35, FIG. 41-15), which will be described later, determination of a variation pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is performed. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, at the timing when the game ball is detected in the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening), the CPU 103 executes the random value determination process at the time of winning in step 193SGS112. By doing so, it is determined whether or not it is determined that the jackpot symbol is to be displayed as a special figure display result, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a predetermined display mode with super reach. As a result, before the start of the variable display of the special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the starting winning hole, that is, before the start of the variable display, it is decided whether or not to make a big hit. Before, it is determined that the special figure display result is "big hit" and which category the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is the variable display mode, and based on the determination result, the effect control CPU 120 etc. , as will be described later, a preview effect such as a pre-reading preview effect is executed.

In the winning random number value determination process shown in FIG. 41-13 (A), the CPU 103 first, for example, by checking the state of the time saving flag and probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit etc., Pachinko game machine 1 (step 193SGS121). The CPU 103 specifies that the variable probability flag is on when the variable probability flag is on, specifies that it is the time saving state when the variable probability flag is off and the time saving flag is on, and both the variable probability flag and the time saving flag are specified. When it is off, it should be specified that it is in the normal state.

Following the processing of step 193SGS121, the special figure display result determination table 1 shown in FIG. 41-7 is selected and set (step 193SGS122). After that, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination extracted at step 193SGS109 in FIG. 41-12 is within a predetermined jackpot determination range (step 193SGS123). In the big hit determination range, individual determination values assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" in the special figure display result determination table 1 selected by the processing of step 193SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 determines the random number MR1 and each determination It is only necessary to determine whether or not there is a determination value that matches the random value MR1 by comparing the values one by one. Alternatively, numerical values indicating the minimum (lower limit) and maximum (upper limit) of the determination values included in the jackpot determination range are set, and the CPU 103 determines the random number MR1 and the minimum and maximum values of the jackpot determination range. It is only necessary to determine whether or not the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range by comparison. At this time, by determining that the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the reserved data including the random number MR1 is determined to be a "big hit".

When it is determined that it is not within the jackpot determination range in step 193SGS123, that is, when it is determined that the variable display does not hit the jackpot (step 193SGS123; N), the special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 41-7 2 is selected and set (step 193SGS124). After that, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination extracted at step 193SGS109 in FIG. 41-12 is within a predetermined small hit determination range (step 193SGS125).

When the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 is within the predetermined small hit determination range, that is, when it is determined that the variable display will result in a small hit (step 193 SGS125; Y), the variable display result is "small hit". Execute the transmission setting of the sixth symbol designation command which is the symbol designation command according to the event (step 193SGS126), select and set the special hit variation pattern determination table (step 193SGS127), and proceed to step 193SGS138. .

When the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 is not within the predetermined small hit determination range, that is, when the variable display result is "loss" in the variable display, a pattern corresponding to the variable display result being "loss" Execute the transmission setting of the first symbol designation command, which is the designation command (step 193SGS128), and determine whether the time saving flag is on, that is, whether the current game state is the time saving state (step 193 SGS 129). If the time saving flag is off (step 193SGS129; N), select and set the change pattern determination table A for loss, and if the time saving flag is on (step 193SGS129; Y), change pattern determination for loss Table D is selected and set (step 193SGS131). Note that the deviation variation pattern determination table A is a deviation variation pattern determination table that is used when the number of pending memories is two or less. In addition, the variation pattern determination table for loss D is a variation pattern determination table for loss that is used when the game state is the high base state in which the time reduction control is executed.

In addition, in this characteristic part 193SG, in addition to these variation pattern determination table A for loss and variation pattern determination table D for loss, variation pattern determination table B for loss used when the number of pending memories is 3 , A deviation variation pattern determination table C that is used when the number of pending memories is 4 is prepared in advance. , For example, 498 (approximately 50%) determination values from 0 to 497 out of the range that can be taken by the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern are assigned to the non-reach variation pattern, and the deviation variation pattern In the determination table B, 598 (about 60%) determination values from 0 to 597 out of the range that the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take for the non-reach variation pattern are assigned. In the variation pattern determination table C, 698 (approximately 70%) determination values from 0 to 697 are assigned to the non-reach variation patterns in the range that the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination can take. On the other hand, in the fluctuation pattern determination tables A to C for loss, 100 (about 10%) judgment values from 898 to 997 out of the range that the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment can take for the super reach fluctuation pattern is assigned.

Therefore, in step 193SGS126, by determining the variation pattern using the variation pattern determination table A for loss, the determination of non-reach and super reach is always non-reach or super reach even if the number of pending storage changes after the determination Therefore, the variation pattern determination table A for loss is used for determination at the time of starting winning.

Further, when it is determined in step 193SGS123 that it is within the jackpot determination range, that is, when it is determined that a jackpot will be hit during variable display (step 193SGS123; Y), as shown in FIG. 41-13(A) , the jackpot type is determined based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination (step 193 SGS132). At this time, the CPU 103, according to the variable special figure ("first special figure" corresponding to "1" or "second special figure" corresponding to "2") specified corresponding to the start buffer value , select table data for big hit type determination from the table data constituting the big hit type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected table data for determining the jackpot type, it is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is determined.

In addition, the symbol designation command corresponding to the determined jackpot type, that is, the second symbol designation command in the case of the probability variation jackpot A, the third symbol designation command in the probability variation jackpot B, and the probability variation jackpot C in the case of the probability variation jackpot C Executes the transmission setting of the 4th symbol designation command, and if it is a non-variable jackpot, the transmission setting of the 5th symbol designation command (step 193 SGS133), and then determines whether the determined jackpot type is a non-probability variable jackpot (Step 193 SGS 134a). If the determined jackpot type is non-probable variable jackpot (step 193SGS134a; Y), select and set the jackpot variation pattern determination table A as a table for determining the jackpot variation pattern (step 193SGS135), and step Go to 193SGS138.

If the determined jackpot type is not the non-probability variable jackpot (step 193SGS134a; N), it is further determined whether the determined jackpot type is the probability variable jackpot A or the probability variable jackpot B (step 193SGS134b).

If the determined jackpot type is the probability variable jackpot A or the probability variable jackpot B (step 193 SGS 134b; Y), select and set the jackpot variation pattern determination table B as a table for determining the jackpot variation pattern (step 193SGS136), go to step 193SGS138.

If the determined jackpot type is not the probability variable jackpot A or the probability variable jackpot B (step 193 SGS134b; N), that is, if the determined jackpot type is the probability variable jackpot C, select and set the special winning variation pattern determination table. (step 193SGS137) and proceeds to step 193SGS138.

After executing any of the processing of step 193SGS127, step 193SGS130, step 193SGS131, step 193SGS135, step 193SGS136, and step 193SGS137, each variation pattern determination table set in each of these steps and the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination is used to determine a variation category according to the range of determination values including the random number MR3 (step 193SGS138). In this characteristic portion 193SG, as shown in FIG. 41-13 (B), at least when the variable display result is "miss", regardless of the total number of pending memories, the variable display mode of "non-reach" is common. A variable category that becomes a variable display mode of "super reach", and a variable category of "other" that becomes a variable display mode other than "non-reach" and "super reach" (for example, normal reach), It suffices if it can be determined whether or not it is determined to be in such a fluctuation category based on the random value MR3.

After that, after performing the setting for transmitting the variation category designation command according to the determination result by the process of step 193SGS138 to the effect control board 12 (step 193SGS132), the random value determination process at the time of winning is ended.

FIG. 41-14 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed at S110 of FIG. 36 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 41-14, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special symbol pending storage number is "0" (step 193SGS141). The number of second special symbol pending storage is the number of pending storage of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of step 193SGS141, it is sufficient to read out the second reserved storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting section and determine whether or not the read value is "0".

At step 193SGS141, when the number of second special figure pending storage is other than "0" (step 193SGS141; N), the second special figure pending storage unit holds data stored corresponding to the holding number "1" As such, the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for big hit type determination, and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination are read out (step 193 SGS142). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a variable random number buffer.

Subsequent to the processing of step 193 SGS142, by subtracting 1 from the second special figure pending memory number count value and the total pending memory number count value and updating the count value, subtract 1 from the second special figure pending memory number and the total pending memory number Update so as to allow, and update the data of the second special figure reservation storage unit. Specifically, the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the reservation number "1" in the second special figure reservation storage unit (for example, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers "2" to "4") are shown. The pending data is shifted upward one entry at a time (step 193SGS143).

Then, after updating the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value which is the storage value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer to "2" (step 193SGS144), it moves to step 193SGS149.

On the other hand, when the second special figure pending storage number is "0" at step 193SGS141 (step 193SGS141; Y), it is determined whether or not the first special figure pending storage number is "0" (step 193SGS145). . The number of the first special figure reserved memory is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the process of step 193SGS145, the game control counter setting unit reads out the first reserved memory number count value stored in the first reserved memory number counter, and determines whether or not the read value is "0". good. Thus, the processing of step 193SGS145 is executed when it is determined that the second special figure pending storage number is "0" at step 193SGS141, and the first special figure pending storage number is "0". Determine whether or not As a result, the special figure game using the second special figure is started to be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure.

In addition, the special game using the second special figure is not limited to being executed with priority over the special game using the first special figure. Execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) and the starting prize is generated. In this case, a table is provided for storing data capable of specifying the order in which the starting prizes are generated, and execution of the special figure game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started from the stored data. It should be possible to determine whether

When the first special figure pending storage number is other than "0" at step 193SGS145 (step 193SGS145; N), the pending data stored corresponding to the pending number "1" in the first special figure pending storage unit As such, the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for big hit type determination, and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination are read out (step 193SGS146). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a variable random number buffer.

Subsequent to the processing of step 193 SGS146, by subtracting 1 from the 1st special figure pending memory number count value and the total pending memory number count value and updating it, etc., subtract 1 from the 1st special figure pending memory number and the total pending memory number Update so as to allow, and update the data in the first special figure reservation storage unit. Specifically, the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the reservation number "1" in the first special figure reservation storage unit (for example, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers "2" to "4") are shown. The pending data is shifted upward by one entry (step 193SGS147).

Then, after updating the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value which is the storage value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer to "1" (step 193SGS148), it moves to step 193SGS149.

In step 193 SGS149, the special symbol display result judgment shown in FIG. Select and set Table 1. Subsequently, numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment stored in the variable random number buffer is compared with the judgment value assigned to each special figure display result of "big hit" or "loss" , determines whether the special figure display result is a "jackpot" or a "loss" (step 193SGS150a). In addition, in this step 193SGS150a, if the game state at that time is a high probability state (variable probability state) in which the variable probability flag is on, the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination is a high probability state (variable probability state ), it is determined as a “big hit” if it falls within the range of 10000 to 12180, and if not, it is determined as a “loss”. Also, if the probability variation flag is off and the low probability state, if the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination falls within the range of 1 to 219, it is determined as "big hit", and if not, it is determined as "off" judge.

Thus, in the special figure display result determination table 1 selected in step 193SGS149, different determination values corresponding to the game state at that time (high probability, low probability) are assigned to "jackpot". , in the process of step 193 SGS150a, depending on whether the gaming state when the variable display of the special game or the like is started is a high probability state, using different determination data (determination value) special figure display result is determined to be a ``big hit'', when the game state is a high-probability state, it is determined (determined) as a ``big hit'' with a higher probability than when it is a low-probability state.

When it is judged to be a "jackpot" at step 193SGS150a (step 193SGS150a; Y), the game control flag setting unit turns on the jackpot flag (step 193SGS152). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 41-8(A) is selected and set as a use table for determining one of a plurality of jackpot types (step 193SGS153). By referring to the jackpot type determination table set in this way, numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the variable random number buffer, and "non-probability variable jackpot", "probability variable jackpot" in the jackpot type determination table A”, “variable probability big win B”, and “variable probability big win C”, according to which one of the judgment values assigned to each jackpot type matches, it is determined which of a plurality of types the jackpot type should be (step 193 SGS 154 ).

By determining the jackpot type in the process of step 193 SGS154, the game state after the end of the jackpot game state is set to either a time-saving state or a probability variable state having a higher advantage for the player than the time-saving state. It is determined before deriving the fixed special symbol as a result of variable display whether to control to . Corresponding to the determined jackpot type, for example, by setting the jackpot type buffer value, which is the stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (step 193 SGS155), the determined jackpot type Remember. As an example, if the jackpot type is "non-probable variable big hit" corresponding to non-probable variable big hit, the jackpot type buffer value is set to "0", and if it is "probable variable A" corresponding to probability variable big hit A, it is set to "1". If it is "probability variable B" corresponding to B, it is set to "2", and if it is "probability variable C" corresponding to probability variable big hit C, it is set to "3".

On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not a "jackpot" at step 193SGS150a (step 193SGS150a; N), the process proceeds to S150b, and the special figure display result determination table 2 shown in FIG. 41-7 is selected and set. Subsequently, the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination stored in the variable random number buffer is compared with the judgment value assigned to each special figure display result of "small hit", and the special figure It is determined whether or not the display result is to be a "small hit" (step 193SGS150c). In addition, in step 193SGS150c, when the variable special figure is the first special figure, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is a "small hit" using the judgment value corresponding to the first special figure. , When the variable special figure is the second special figure, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is a "small hit" using the determination value corresponding to the second special figure.

When it is determined that the special figure display result is "small hit" in step 193SGS150c (step 193SGS150c; Y), the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting section is turned on (step 193SGS151).

On the other hand, when it is not determined that the special figure display result is "small hit" in step 193SGS150c (step 193SGS150c; N), the process proceeds to step 193SGS156.

In step 193 SGS156, whether or not to control to the big hit game state (whether the big hit flag is turned on) as a result of the prior determination, whether to control to the small hit game state (whether the small hit flag is turned on) Determined special symbols are set according to the result of prior determination of (whether or not the game is played) and the determination result of the jackpot type in the case of setting the jackpot game state. As an example, in response to the pre-determined result that the special figure display result is to be "missed", a special symbol indicating a sign of "-", which is a lost symbol, is set as a fixed special symbol. Also, when it is determined that the special figure display result is "big hit" at step 193SGS150a, if the big hit type at step 193SGS154 is "probability variable big hit A", a special symbol showing the number "7" is displayed. Set as a fixed special pattern. In addition, when the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot B", a special symbol indicating the number "5" is set as the fixed special symbol. In addition, when the jackpot type is "non-probability variable jackpot", a special symbol indicating the number "3" is set as a fixed special symbol. Further, when the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot C", the special symbol indicating the number "1" is set as the fixed special symbol. In addition, in response to the pre-determined result that the special symbol display result is "small hit", a special symbol showing the symbol "2", which is a small winning symbol, is set as a fixed special symbol. Incidentally, these confirmed special symbols are examples, and other confirmed special symbols may be set, or a plurality of kinds of symbols may be set as the confirmed special symbols.

After setting the fixed special symbol in step 193SGS156, after updating the value of the special symbol process flag to "1" which is the value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step 193SGS157), the special symbol normal process is terminated. .

It should be noted that when the reserved memory number of the special figure game using the first special figure in step 193SGS145 is "0" (step 193SGS145; Y), after performing a predetermined demonstration display setting (step 193SGS158), End the special symbol normal process. In this demonstration display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demo designation command) for designating a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 is transmitted from the main board 11 to effect control. It is determined whether or not the transmission to the substrate 12 has been completed. At this time, if the customer waiting demonstration specifying command has already been transmitted, the demonstration display setting is finished as it is. On the other hand, if the command has not been transmitted, the setting for transmitting the customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed, and then the demonstration display setting is completed.

FIG. 41-15 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S111 of FIG. 36 as the variation pattern setting process. In the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 41-15, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag is turned on (step 193SGS161). Then, if the jackpot flag is turned on (step 193SGS161; Y), the jackpot type is specified from the jackpot type buffer value (step 193SGS162).

Then, it is determined whether the specified jackpot type is "variable probability big hit C" (step 193 SGS163), and if it is not "variable probability big hit C", that is, "variable probability big hit A", "variable probability big hit B", "non- In the case of either "probability variable jackpot" (step 193 SGS163; N), the jackpot variation pattern determination table A or the jackpot variation pattern determination table B is selected and set according to the specified jackpot type. Specifically, when the specified jackpot type is "non-probability variable jackpot", the jackpot variation pattern determination table A is selected and set, and the specified jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot A" or "probability variable jackpot B". , the big hit variation pattern determination table B is selected and set.

On the other hand, when the identified jackpot type is "variable probability jackpot C" (step 193SGS163; Y), a special hit variation pattern determination table is selected and set (step 193SGS165).

In the judgment in step 193SGS161, if the big hit flag is not turned on (step 193SGS161; N), it is further judged whether or not the small hit flag is turned on (step 193SGS166). If the small hit flag is turned on (step 193SGS166; Y), select and set the special hit variation pattern determination table (step 193SGS167), and proceed to step 193SGS175.

On the other hand, when the small hit flag is off (step 193SGS166; N), by determining whether or not the time saving flag is turned on in the game control flag setting unit, the game state is a probability variable state or a time saving state. In step 193, SGS168, it is determined whether or not the time saving control is being performed. Then, if the time saving flag is turned on (step 193SGS168; Y), select and set the deviation pattern determination table D as a table to be used for determining one of a plurality of types of variation patterns ( step 193 (SGS 169).

On the other hand, when it is not during the time saving control, that is, when the time saving flag is not turned on (step 193 SGS168; N), for example provided in the game control counter setting unit, the storage value of the pending memory number counter of the variable special figure By reading, etc., specify the number of pending storage of the fluctuation special figure, and determine whether the specified number of holding storage of the specified fluctuation special figure is 1 or 2 (step 193SGS170).

If the number of pending memories of the specified fluctuation special figure is 1 or 2 (step 193 SGS170; N), the fluctuation pattern judgment table A for loss is used as a table used for determining one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns. Select and set (step 193SGS171).

In addition, when the reserved storage number of the specified fluctuation special figure is not 1 or 2 (step 193SGS170; N), it is further determined whether or not the reserved storage number of the specified fluctuation special figure is 3 (step 193SGS172 ).

If the number of pending memories of the specified fluctuation special figure is 3 (step 193 SGS172; Y), the fluctuation pattern judgment table B for loss is selected as a table used for determining one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns. (Step 193SGS173).

In addition, if the number of reserved storage of the specified fluctuation special figure is not 3, that is, if the number of reserved storage of the specified fluctuation special figure is 4 (step 193 SGS172; N), the variation pattern is any of a plurality of types Select and set the variation pattern determination table C for failure as a table used for determining .

After executing any one of the processes of step 193SGS164, step 193SGS165, step 193SGS167, step 193SGS169, step 193SGS171, step 193SGS173, and step 193SGS174, for example, the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination stored in the fluctuation random number buffer or the like Based on the numerical data indicating, by referring to any of the selected (set) variation pattern determination table for the big hit, the variation pattern determination table for the special hit, or the variation pattern determination table for the loss A to D, the variation pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step 193SGS175).

Incidentally, when the big hit flag is off, it is determined whether or not the variable display mode of the decoration pattern is set to "reach" by determining the variation pattern in the process of step 193SGS175. That is, the process of step 193 SGS170 includes the process of determining whether or not the variable display state of the decoration pattern should be the ready-to-win state when the variable display result is "loss".

After determining the variation pattern in step 193SGS175, according to the variation special symbol designation buffer value, the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B The setting for starting the variation of the special symbols is performed so as to start any one of the special symbols games using the second special symbol (step 193SGS176). As an example, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", the setting for transmitting the drive signal to update the display of the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is performed. On the other hand, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", the setting for transmitting the drive signal for updating the display of the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is performed.

Following the processing of step 193SGS176, settings are made for transmitting various commands to be used at the start of fluctuation of special symbols (step 193SGS177). For example, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103, from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, the game state designation command, the first variable display start command, the fluctuation pattern designation command, the variable display In order to sequentially transmit the result designation command and the first pending storage number notification command, the setting data indicating the storage address (head address) in the ROM 101 of the first fluctuation start command table prepared in advance, the game control buffer setting unit is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer provided in . On the other hand, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 sends the game state designation command, the second variable display start command, the fluctuation pattern designation command, and the variable display from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the result designation command and the second pending storage number notification command, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the second fluctuation start command table prepared in advance is provided in the game control buffer setting unit. Store in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer.

After executing the processing of step 193SGS177, the special figure fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol according to the determination result of the fluctuation pattern, is set (step 193SGS178). The special symbol fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the required time from the start of the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game until the fixed special symbol, which is the variable display result (special symbol display result), is stopped and displayed. It's time. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2" which is the value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step 193SGS179), and then the variation pattern setting process is terminated.

Based on the command transmission setting in step 193SGS177, every time the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. A designation command, a first variable display start command or a second variable display start command, a variation pattern designation command, a variable display result designation command, a first reserved memory number notification command or a second reserved memory number notification command are sequentially transmitted. It will be. The order in which these effect control commands are transmitted can be arbitrarily changed. The commands may be transmitted in the order of the designation command, the game state designation command, the first reserved memory count notification command, or the second reserved memory count notification command.

FIG. 41-16 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of FIG. 36 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 turns on the end flag referred to in the special symbol variation processing of step S112 to end the variation of the special symbols, and the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B The stop symbol is stopped and displayed (step 193SGS180). In addition, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "1" indicating the first special figure, the fluctuation of the first special design in the first special design display device 4A is ended, and the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is When it is "2" indicating the second special symbol, the variation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is terminated. In addition, the control which transmits the design decision command to production control board 12 is done (step 193SGS181). Then, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag is turned on (step 193SGS182), and when the big hit flag is turned off (step 193SGS182; N), the small hit flag is turned on. It is determined whether or not there is (step 193SGS183).

When the small hit flag is turned on, the performance control board 12 is set to transmit the hit start 5 designation command corresponding to the small hit (step 193 SGS190a). Then, a value corresponding to the small hit display time is set in the small hit display time timer (step 193SGS190b). In addition, the number of opening times (for example, two times) is set in the counter for the number of opening times of the big winning opening (step 193SGS190c). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "8" (step 193SGS190d), which is the value corresponding to the small hit opening preprocessing (step S118), and the special symbol stop process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the big hit flag is turned on (step 193 SGS182; Y), the CPU 103 clears the probability variable flag and the time saving flag and turns it off (step 193 SGS 184), hit start 1 designation command (probability variable jackpot A), hit start 2 designation command (probability variable jackpot B), hit start 3 designation command (probability variable jackpot C ), the setting for transmitting the hit start 4 designation command (non-probable variable) is performed (step 193 SGS 185).

Further, the CPU 103 performs setting for transmitting a game state specifying command indicating a normal state to the effect control board 12 (step 193SGS186).

Then, a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (time for notifying the occurrence of the jackpot on the image display device 5, for example) is set in the jackpot display time timer (step 193SGS187). In addition, the number of openings (for example, 10 times in the case of a non-probability variable jackpot or a probability variable jackpot A, 5 times in the case of a probability variable jackpot B, and 2 times in the case of a probability variable jackpot C) is set in the big winning opening opening counter. (Step 193SGS188). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4" corresponding to the jackpot opening preprocessing (step S114) (step 193SGS189).

On the other hand, when the small hit flag is off (step 193SGS183; N), at step 193SGS190, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the time saving number counter is "0". When the value of the time saving counter is "0" (step 193SGS190; Y), the process proceeds to step 193SGS196.

On the other hand, if the value of the time saving number counter is not "0" (step 193 SGS190; N), that is, if it is a high base state in which the number of time saving times remains, the value of the time saving number counter is decremented by -1 (step 193 SGS 191). Then, it is determined whether the value of the time saving number counter after subtraction is "0" (step 193SGS193), and if it is not "0" (step 193SGS193; N), the process proceeds to step 193SGS196, and the value of the time saving number counter is "0" (step 193SGS193; Y), in order to end the time saving control, after clearing the time saving flag to turn off (step 193SGS194), corresponding to the state of the probability variable flag or time saving flag After setting the transmission of the game state designation command corresponding to the game state (specifically, the low probability/low base) (step 193SGS195), the process proceeds to step 193SGS196.

In step 193SGS196, after updating the value of the special symbol process flag to "0" which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing, the special symbol stop processing is terminated.

FIG. 41-17 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in S117 of FIG. 36 as the jackpot ending process.

In the jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the jackpot end display timer is in operation, that is, the timer is counting (step 193SGS201). When the jackpot end display timer is not in operation (Step 193SGS201; N), the value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time (jackpot end display time) for displaying the jackpot end display on the image display device 5. is set (step 193SGS202), and the process ends.

On the other hand, when the jackpot end display timer is in operation (step 193SGS201; Y), the value of the jackpot end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step 193SGS203). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the big win end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the big win end display time has elapsed (step 193SGS204). If it has not passed, the process is terminated.

If the jackpot end display time has passed (step 193SGS204; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the stored jackpot type is non-probability variable jackpot (step 193SGS205).

If the stored jackpot type is not the non-variable probability jackpot (step 193SGS205; N), it is further determined whether or not the stored jackpot type is the variable probability jackpot C (step 193SGS206).

When the stored jackpot type is variable probability jackpot C (step 193SGS206; Y), after turning on the variable probability flag (step 193SGS210), the process proceeds to step 193SGS213.

On the other hand, when the stored jackpot type is not the variable probability jackpot C, that is, when the jackpot type is the variable probability jackpot A or the variable probability jackpot B (step 193SGS206; N), the variable probability flag is turned on (step 193SGS207), After turning on the time saving flag (step 193SGS208) and setting "0" to the time saving frequency counter (step 193SGS209), the process proceeds to step 193SGS213.

On the other hand, when the jackpot type is a non-probable variable jackpot (step 193SGS205; Y), by executing steps 193SGS211 and 193SGS212, the time saving flag is turned on and "100" is set to the time saving counter. After that, go to step 193SGS213.

In step 193SGS213, the jackpot flag is turned off, and transmission setting of a jackpot end designation command corresponding to the jackpot type is performed (step 193SGS214). Then, after setting the transmission setting of the game state designation command for notifying the effect control board 12 of the game state based on the probability variable flag and the time saving flag that are turned on (step 193 SGS215), the value of the special process flag is changed to a special It is updated to "0" which is a value corresponding to the symbol normal processing (step 193SGS216).

Next, the operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. FIG. 41-18 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S75 of FIG. 36 as the command analysis process. In the command analysis process shown in FIG. 41-18, the effect control CPU 120 first receives data from the main board 11 transmitted via the relay board 15 by checking the storage contents of the effect control command reception buffer. It is determined whether or not there is a command (step 193SGS221). At this time, if there is no received command (step 193SGS221; N), it is determined whether or not the first or second pending storage number notification waiting time set (set) at step 193SGS223 or step 193SGS225 described later has elapsed. (Step 193SGS237) If the first or second reserved storage number notification wait time has not elapsed (Step 193SGS2375; N), the command analysis process is terminated. On the other hand, if the first or second reserved memory count notification waiting time has passed, that is, the first reserved memory count notification command or the second reserved memory count notification command or the second When the pending storage number notification command is not received (step 193SGS237; Y), the display undecided flag of the entry for which the first pending storage number notification command or the second pending storage number notification command is not stored is turned on. At the same time, the effect restriction flag of the entry whose storage has not been completed is turned on (step 193SGS238), and the command analysis process is terminated.

If there is a received command in step 193SGS221 (step 193SGS221; Y), for example, by checking the MODE data of the received command, it is determined whether or not the received command is the first start winning prize designation command. (Step 193 SGS222). And, when it is the first start opening winning designation command (step 193SGS222; Y), the first reserved storage number notification waiting time is set (step 193SGS223). For example, in the process of step 193SGS223, the timer initial value predetermined corresponding to the reception waiting time of the first pending storage number notification command is set to the command reception control timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 193SG192 Just do it.

When the received command is not the first start winning designation command at step 193SGS222 (step 193SGS222; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is the second starting winning designation command (step 193SGS224). Then, when it is the second start opening winning designation command (step 193SGS224; Y), the second reserved storage number notification waiting time is set (step 193SGS225). For example, in the process of step 193SGS225, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the waiting time for receiving the second pending storage number notification command may be set in the command reception control timer.

In step 193SGS224, when the received command is not the second starting opening winning designation command (step 193SGS224; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is the design designation command (step 193SGS226). If the received command is not a design designation command at step 193SGS226 (step 193SGS226; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is a variation category command (step 193SGS227). If the received command is not a variable category command at step 193SGS227 (step 193SGS227; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is the first pending storage number notification command (step 193SGS228). Then, when it is the first reserved storage number notification command (step 193SGS228; Y), the first reserved storage number notification waiting time is cleared by, for example, initializing the timing operation by the command reception control timer (step 193SGS229). .

If the received command is not the first reserved storage number notification command at step 193SGS228 (step 193SGS228; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is the second reserved storage number notification command (step 193SGS230). Then, when it is the second reserved storage number notification command (step 193SGS230; Y), the waiting time for notification of the second reserved storage number is cleared by, for example, initializing the timing operation by the command reception control timer (step 193SGS231). .

After executing either of the processing of step 193SGS229 and step 193SGS231, the display undecided flag of the stored entry is turned on, and if there is an unreceived command, the production restriction flag is turned on (step 193 SGS232).

If the command received at step 193SGS226 is a pattern designation command (step 193SGS226; Y), or if the command received at step 193SGS227 is a variable category command (step 193SGS227; Y), or step 193SGS223, step 193SGS225, step 193SGS232 41-11, the received command is stored at the beginning of the empty area in the start winning received command buffer 193SG194A shown in FIG.

In addition, when the variable display start command (first variable display start command or second variable display start command) and the reservation storage number notification command (first reservation storage number notification command or second reservation storage number notification command) are received, , The pending storage number notification command may not be stored in the start winning reception command buffer 193SG194A. That is, the effect control commands received in response to the occurrence of the starting winning can be stored sequentially from the top of the empty area in the receiving command buffer 193SG194A at the time of starting winning.

If the received command in step 193SGS230 is not the second pending storage number notification command (step 193SGS230; N), settings are made according to other received commands (step 193SGS234). Then, it is determined whether or not the first or second reserved storage number notification waiting time set in step 193SGS223 or step 193SGS225 has passed (step 193SGS235), and the first or second reserved storage number notification waiting time has passed. If not (step 193SGS235; N), the process returns to step 193SGS221. On the other hand, if the first or second reserved memory count notification waiting time has passed, that is, the first reserved memory count notification command or the second reserved memory count notification command or the second If the pending storage number notification command is not received (step 193 SGS235; Y), the display undecided flag of the stored entry is turned on, and the effect limit flag of the corresponding entry that has not been stored is turned on. After that (step 193SGS236), the process returns to step 193SGS221.

FIG. 41-19 is part of a flow chart showing an example of the effect control process processing. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines the presence or absence of the pre-reading notice effect in the pre-reading notice setting process and determines the effect pattern of the pre-reading notice effect (the display pattern of the pending memory display) (S161), Next, a pending display update process for updating the pending memory display in the first pending memory display area 193SG005D and the second pending memory display area 193SG005U of the image display device 5 to the display according to the storage contents of the start winning command buffer 193SG194A. Execute (step 193SGS162).

FIG. 41-20 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S161 of FIG. 35 as the pre-reading notice setting process. In the pre-reading notice setting process shown in FIG. 41-20, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not variable display is being executed (step 193SGS240a). Whether or not variable display is being executed may be determined by whether or not the value of the effect control process flag is any one of 1-3.

If the variable display is not being executed (step 193SGS240a; N), the process proceeds to step 193SGS241, and if the variable display is being executed (step 193SGS240a; Y), it is during the execution period of the first variable display start frequency notification effect. (Step 193SGS240b). 41-29(E), 41-30(L), and 41-31(S), the first variable display start number notification effect is a pseudo continuous effect in which re-variable display starts. After that, it is an effect for notifying the number of times the variable display of the decoration pattern including the re-variable display is started during one variable display. Further, in step 193 SGS240a, it is possible to determine whether or not the execution period of the first variable display start times notification effect is being executed by referring to the process data of the variable display being executed.

If it is not during the execution period of the first variable display start count notification effect (step 193SGS240b; N), the process proceeds to step 193SGS241, and if it is during the execution period of the first variable display start count notification effect (step 193SGS240b; Y), step Proceeding to 193SGS 250 sets the pending display flag to "0", which corresponds to the normal display mode, as described below. In other words, during the execution period of the first variable display start frequency notification effect, the pre-reading notice effect is not executed.

At step 193SGS241, the effect control CPU 120 checks the reception command buffer 193SG194A at the time of start winning. Then, it is determined whether or not there is a new stored command at the time of starting winning by determining whether or not there is an entry whose display undecided flag is ON (set to "1") (step 193SGS242). .

If there is no entry whose display undecided flag is ON (step 193SGS242; N), the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated, and if there is an entry whose display undecided flag is ON (step 193SGS242; Y) , Whether the design designation command of the entry is the 4th design designation or the 6th design designation command, that is, it is determined whether the design designation command is a design designation command indicating a probability variation big hit C or a small hit ( Step 193 SGS 243a). If the symbol designation command is a symbol designation command indicating a variable probability big hit C or a small hit (step 193SGS243a; Y), by proceeding to step 193SGS250, as will be described later, "0" corresponding to the normal display mode is changed. , the pending display flag is set. In other words, the pre-reading announcement effect is not executed with respect to the holding memory for the probability variable big win C or the small win.

On the other hand, if the symbol designation command is not a symbol designation command indicating a probability variable jackpot C or a small hit, whether or not the symbol designation command of the entry is the first design designation command, that is, the symbol designation command is a command indicating loss. (Step 193SGS243b). If the symbol designation command of the entry is not the first symbol designation command, that is, if it is a command indicating a jackpot (either of probability variation jackpot A, probability variation jackpot B, or non-probability variation jackpot) (step 193 SGS243b; N), the entry The jackpot type is specified from the symbol designation command (step 193SGS244).

Then, for example, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the pre-reading notice effect extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit, etc. By referring to the effect determination table, it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect and the display pattern in the case of executing the pre-reading notice effect (step 193SGS245).

At step 193SGS245, for example, whether or not to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect and the display pattern (foreign notice type) are determined at a decision ratio as shown in FIG. 41-21(A). In the setting example of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 41-21(A), the determination ratio of the presence or absence of the pre-reading advance notice effect and the display pattern (notice type) is changed according to the jackpot type specified in the process of step 193SGS244. .

Specifically, two types of display pattern α and display pattern β are provided as the display pattern (preview type) of the pre-reading preview effect. Among these, when the display pattern of the pre-reading advance notice effect is determined to be the display pattern α, the reserved memory display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 193SG5D or the second reserved memory display area 193SG5U as a white square (◇). When the display pattern (notice type) of the pre-reading notice effect is determined to be the display pattern β, the reserved memory display is a white star (☆) in the first reserved memory display area 193SG5D or the second reserved memory display. Displayed in area 193SG5U.

In addition, when the variable display result is a big hit other than the probability variable jackpot C, there is no case where the pre-reading notice effect is decided not to be executed, and the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is always decided and the display pattern (notice type) Either the display pattern α or the display pattern β (announcement type) is determined.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 41-21 (A), when the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot A", the ratio of display pattern β to be determined as the display pattern (notice type) is determined by display pattern α. is set higher than the On the other hand, when the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot B" or "non-probability variable jackpot", the rate at which display pattern β is determined as the display pattern (notice type) is higher than the rate at which display pattern α is determined. set low.

With such a setting, when the variable display result is "big hit" and the display pattern β is displayed as the display pattern (notice type), the jackpot type is higher than when the display pattern α is displayed. is the variable probability big win A, and the player's expectation for the variable probability big win A can be increased.

In addition, in this characteristic part 193SG, when the variable display result is a "jackpot" other than the probability variable jackpot C, the pending memory display is displayed in a white square (◇) by always determining the execution of the pre-reading notice effect. Either the display pattern α or the display pattern β displayed in a white star (☆) is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even in cases other than "jackpot", it may be possible to determine non-execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect in the same manner as in the case where the variable display result is "loss".

Also, in step 193SGS243b, if the symbol designation command of the entry whose display undetermined flag is on is the first symbol designation command, that is, if it is a command indicating a failure (step 193SGS243b; Y), display undetermined The variation category indicated by the variation category designation command of the entry whose flag is on is specified (step 193 SGS247). Specifically, if the variation category designation command of the entry is C600H, it specifies that it is a category of "non-reach" variation pattern, and if it is C601H, it is a category of "super reach" variation pattern. If it is specified and C602H, it may be specified that it is a category of "other" fluctuation pattern including normal reach.

Then, for example, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the pre-reading notice effect extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit, etc., and the category of the fluctuation pattern specified in step 193 SGS247. Whether or not to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect and the display pattern (notice type) in the case of executing the pre-reading notice effect are determined by referring to the hourly pre-reading notice effect determination table (step 193 SGS248).

In step 193SGS248, for example, whether or not to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect and the display pattern (foreign notice type) are determined at a decision ratio as shown in FIG. 41-21(B). In the setting example of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 41-21(B), the determination ratio of whether or not to execute the pre-reading preview effect and the display pattern (preview type) is set according to the category of the variation pattern specified in the process of step 193SGS247. making it different.

Specifically, two types of display pattern α and display pattern β are provided as the display pattern (notice type). Among these, when the display pattern (notice type) is determined to be the display pattern α, the reserved memory display is a white square (◇), which is a specific mode, in the first reserved memory display area 193SG5D or the second reserved memory display area. 193SG5U, and when the display pattern (notice type) is determined to be the display pattern β, the reserved memory display is a white star (☆), which is a specific mode, in the first reserved memory display area 193SG5D or the second reserved memory display area 193SG5D. It is displayed in the memory display area 193SG5U. Incidentally, when the pre-reading advance notice effect is determined to be non-execution, the reserved memory display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 193SG5D or the second reserved memory display area 193SG5U in a round shape (○) which is a normal mode.

As shown in FIG. 41-21 (B), when the variable display result is "missing" and the category of the variation pattern is "other", the variable display result is "missing" and the category of the variation pattern is "non-reach", the rate at which the pre-reading forewarning effect is executed (the rate determined for other than "no forewarning effect") is set higher. In addition, when the variable display result is "missing" and the category of the variation pattern is "super reach", it is more likely than the case where the variable display result is "missing" and the category of the variation pattern is "others". The rate at which the pre-reading advance notice effect is executed (the rate at which other than "no notice effect" is determined) is set high.

When the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is determined when the variable display result is "miss", if the fluctuation category is "other", than if the fluctuation pattern category is "non-reach" Also, the rate at which the display pattern α is determined is set high. Further, when the category of the variation pattern is "super reach", the percentage of display pattern α determined is set higher than when the category of the variation pattern is "others". Furthermore, when the execution of the pre-reading announcement effect is determined when the variable display result is "miss", the category of the variation pattern is "non-reach" when the category of the variation pattern is "others". The percentage of display pattern β determined is set higher than in the case, and when the category of the variation pattern is "super reach", the display pattern is higher than when the category of the variation pattern is "other" The rate at which β is determined is set high.

In addition, when the variable display result is "miss", the rate at which the pre-reading notice effect is determined to be non-execution regardless of whether the category of the variation pattern is "non-reach", "other", or "super reach" is set to be the highest, and the rate at which the pre-reading advance notice effect is determined to be executed and the display pattern β is determined is set to be the lowest.

Further, as shown in FIG. 41-21(A), when the variable display result is "big win", the pre-reading notice effect is not determined to be non-execution (no notice effect), and the pre-reading effect The rate at which the advance notice effect is determined to be executed and the display pattern α or the display pattern β is determined is the display pattern α or the display pattern β in any of the variation pattern categories when the variable display result is "loss". is set higher than the

Furthermore, when the variable display result is "loss (non-reach)", "loss (super reach)", or "loss (other)", the display pattern α is set higher than the rate at which the display pattern β is determined. On the other hand, when the variable display result is "big hit (probability variable A)", when the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect is determined, the rate at which the display pattern β is determined is the rate at which the display pattern α is determined. is set higher than

With such settings, when the display pattern α or the display pattern β is executed (displayed) as the display pattern (notice type) of the pre-reading notice effect, the display pattern α or the display pattern β is not executed (displayed) There is a higher possibility that the variable display result will be a "big hit" than , especially when the display pattern β is executed (displayed), the variable display result is a "big hit" and the jackpot type is "probability variable big hit A". Since the ratio of , the expectation of the player can be increased.

After execution of step 193SGS248, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect is determined in step 193SGS247, that is, determines the display pattern (preview type) to be either the display pattern α or the display pattern β. (Step 193SGS249).

After step 193SGS245 is executed or if execution of the pre-reading notice effect is determined (step 193SGS249; Y), the flag value corresponding to the determined display pattern (preview type) is set to the pending display flag of the entry (step 193 SGS246). Specifically, if the display pattern (notice type) determined in step 193SGS245 or step 193SGS248 is the display pattern α indicating the pending storage display with "◇", the pending display flag of the entry is set to "1", and step If the display pattern (notice type) determined in 193SGS245 or step 193SGS248 is the display pattern β indicating the pending memory display with "☆", the pending display flag of the entry is set to "2", and then the process proceeds to step 193SGS251.

Further, in step 193SGS249, if the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect is not determined (step 193SGS249; N), after setting the pending display flag of the entry to "0" indicating a white "o" (step 193SGS250), go to step 193SGS251.

After executing step 193SGS246 or step 193SGS250, the effect control CPU 120 changes the value of the display undecided flag of the entry to "0" (step 193SGS251). Thereafter, the pending display is updated based on the stored contents of the receive command buffer 193SG194A at the time of start winning (step 193SGS252). As a result, the pending memory newly stored in the start winning command buffer 193SG194A is displayed in a display mode corresponding to one of "0", "1" and "2" set in the pending display flag. be. Further, even when the variable display is executed and the storage contents of the start winning command buffer 193SG194A are shifted, the image display device 5 is displayed according to the storage contents of the start winning command buffer 193SG194A after the shift. The pending display in the first pending storage display area 193SG5D and the second pending storage display area 193SG5U provided in the lower position is updated.

Specifically, if the number of the first special figure pending memory is one, one pending memory display is displayed. As the display mode of this reserved memory display, when the flag value of the reserved display flag corresponding to the reserved memory is "0", it is displayed in the display mode of "○", and the flag value of the reserved display flag is If it is "1", it is displayed in the display mode of "◇", and if the flag value of the pending display flag is "2", it is displayed in the display mode of "☆". In addition, if the number of the first special figure pending memory is two, two pending memory display is displayed, each pending memory display mode corresponding to the flag value set to the pending display flag of the corresponding pending memory is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 193SG5D. Also, if the number of the first special figure pending memory is three, three pending memory display is displayed, each pending memory display mode according to the flag value set to the pending display flag of the corresponding pending memory is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 193SG5D. Also, if the number of first special figure pending storage is four, four pending storage displays are displayed, each pending storage display mode according to the flag value set to the pending display flag of the corresponding pending storage is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 193SG5D.

In addition, if the second special figure pending memory number is one, one pending memory display is displayed. As the display mode of this reserved memory display, as in the case of the first special figure, when the flag value of the reserved display flag corresponding to the reserved memory is "0", it is displayed in the display mode of "○" When the flag value of the pending display flag is "1", it is displayed in the display mode of "◇", and when the flag value of the pending display flag is "2", "☆" is displayed. displayed in the form. In addition, if the number of second special figure pending storage is two, for example, two pending storage displays are displayed, and each pending storage display corresponds to the flag value set to the pending display flag of the corresponding pending storage For example, one reserved memory display is displayed in the display mode of "○", and one reserved memory display is displayed in the display mode of "☆" in the second reserved memory display area 193SG5U. Also, if the number of second special figure pending storage is three, three pending storage display is displayed, each pending storage display mode corresponding to the flag value set to the pending display flag of the corresponding pending storage is displayed in the second reserved memory display area 193SG5U. Also, if the number of second special figure pending storage is four, four pending storage displays are displayed, each pending storage display mode according to the flag value set to the pending display flag of the corresponding pending storage is displayed in the second reserved memory display area 193SG5U.

Then, each time the variable display is executed, the reserved memory display is also shifted in a predetermined shift direction (toward the center of the screen in this characteristic portion 193SG) in accordance with the decrease (consumption) of the reserved memory.

In other words, if the pending memory of the start winning command buffer 193SG194A is shifted by consuming the pending memory in the variable display start setting process to be described later, which is executed at the start of the variable display, the variable display starting time after the shift is shifted. Based on the pending memory of the received command buffer 193SG194A, the pending memory display in the first pending memory display area 193SG5D and the second pending memory display area 193SG5U is also shifted and displayed, and there is a new pending memory due to the start winning. , the display pattern of the reserved memory is determined and set to the reserved display flag, and the first reserved memory display area 193SG5D and the second reserved memory display area 193SG5D are displayed in a display mode according to the flag value set to the reserved display flag. It comes to be displayed in the storage display area 193SG5U.

In addition, in this characterizing section 193SG, the form of executing the processing of step 193SGS252 in the pre-reading notice setting processing is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first reserved storage display area 193SG5D And the process for updating the pending display of the second pending storage display area 193SG5U may be executed separately as a process (for example, pending display update process) different from the pre-reading notice setting process.

In addition, in this characteristic part 193SG, on the condition that there is a new storage of the command at the time of starting winning at step 193SGS242, execution or non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the holding storage at the starting winning is determined. New storage of the command at the time of starting winning in both the first special figure and the second special figure in step 193SGS242 due to the simultaneous occurrence of the starting winning to the first starting winning opening and the starting winning to the second starting winning opening If it is determined that there is, that is, if the entry whose display undecided flag is on exists in both the first special figure reservation storage and the second special figure reservation storage, both entries are pre-read notice It is a target for determining whether to execute the performance or not. Both the reserved memory in which the command at the time of starting winning in the first special plan is newly stored and the reserved memory in which the command at the time of starting winning in the second special plan are newly stored are stored depending on the execution and non-execution of the advance notice effect. In the case of a determination target, if there is no entry of the pending display flag of "1" or "2" indicating the execution of the pre-reading notice effect, the pending display of the pending storage of the first special symbol and the pending display of the second special symbol There is a case where the pre-reading forewarning effects are simultaneously executed in both displays.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 193SG, as described above, when the starting winning to the first starting winning opening and the starting winning to the second starting winning opening occur at the same time, the command at the time of starting winning in the first special figure is Both the newly stored pending memory and the newly stored pending memory command at the time of starting winning in the second special figure are subject to the determination of execution or non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect, but the present invention is this In such a case, the execution and non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the first special plan, the execution and non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the second special plan Only one of them may be determined to execute.

Specifically, when the game state is a normal state in which the high opening control is not performed, the determination of execution and non-execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect in the reserved storage in the first special symbol is suspended in the second special symbol. Priority is given to the determination of execution or non-execution of the pre-reading foretelling effect in memory. Then, when it is decided to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect in the reserved memory in the first special plan, the execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the second special plan is unambiguously determined to be non-execution, and the first special plan When it is decided not to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect in the reserved memory in the figure, it is sufficient to decide whether to execute the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the second special figure.

On the other hand, if the game state is a time-saving state in which high opening control is performed (high probability high base state/low probability high base state), execution and non-execution of pre-reading notice effect in pending storage in the second special figure is determined with priority over the determination of execution or non-execution of the pre-reading advance notice performance in the reserved storage in the first special figure. Then, when it is decided to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect in the reserved memory in the second special plan, it is unambiguously decided not to execute the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the first special plan, and the second special plan When it is determined not to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect in the reserved memory in the figure, it is sufficient to decide whether to execute the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the first special figure.

41-22 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable display start command reception flag is ON (step 193SGS271). If the first variable display start command reception flag is ON (step 193SGS271; Y), the buffer number "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure reservation storage in the start winning reception command buffer 193SG194A various command data and various flags stored in association with are shifted upward by one buffer number (step 193SGS272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

Specifically, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-1" of the first special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-0" Then, the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-1", Various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-3" of the 1 special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2", and the first special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "1-4" of the reserved storage are shifted so as to be associated with the buffer numbers "1-3" and stored.

If the first variable display start command reception flag is off at step 193SGS271 (step 193SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 193SGS273). If the second variable display start command reception flag is off (step 193SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 193SGS273; Y ), various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure reservation storage in the start winning command buffer 193SG194A, one buffer number It is shifted upward by minutes (step 193SGS274). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

Specifically, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-1" of the second special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-0" Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-2" of the second special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-1", Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-3" of the 2 special figure pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-2", and the second special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" of the reserved storage are shifted so as to be associated with the buffer number "2-3" and stored.

After executing step 193SGS272 or step 193SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 193SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop design) of the decorative design is determined according to the data stored in the display result designating command storage area (that is, the received display result designating command) and the variation pattern (step 193SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop pattern of the decorative pattern corresponding to the display result specified by the display result specifying command, and stores the data indicating the stop pattern of the determined decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area. do.

In addition, in the present characteristic portion 193SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot A, the effect control CPU 120, for example, determines that the three symbols are "7" as the stop symbols. ”Determines a combination of matching decorative patterns (jackpot pattern). Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot B, a plurality of combinations of odd-numbered symbols other than "7" (for example, "111", (combination of decorative patterns such as "333", "555", "999"). Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the fourth variable display result designation command corresponding to the variable probability big hit C, the stop symbols are "334" and "778" which are the same chance numbers as the small hit. decide from within. In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to the non-probability variable jackpot, the effect control CPU 120, for example, selects a decoration pattern in which 3 patterns are even-numbered patterns as the stop pattern. Determine the combination (jackpot pattern). Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the sixth variable display result designation command corresponding to the small hit, the stop symbols are "334" and "778" which are the same chance numbers as the probability variable big hit C. decide from within. Further, if the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to the loss and the variation pattern of the variable display is the non-reach variation pattern, the three symbols are irregular as the stop symbols. A combination of symbols other than the above-described chance symbols (lost symbols) is determined. Further, if the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to the loss and the variation pattern of the variable display is the reach variation pattern, the left and right symbols are the same as the stop symbol, but the middle A combination of reach-losses with different symbols (losing symbols) is determined.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to a numerical value matching the extracted random number.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern is a variation pattern for executing a pseudo continuous effect during variable display (step 193SGS277). If the variation pattern is a variation pattern for executing a pseudo-continuous effect during variable display (step 193 SGS277; Y), advance notice effect determination processing for variable display to execute a pseudo-continuous effect (for non-execution of pseudo-continuous effect) is executed to determine whether or not to execute the advance notice effect during the variable display and the advance notice effect to be executed (step 193SGS278).

After executing step 193SGS278, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern. If the variation pattern is the super ready-to-win variation pattern (193SGS279; Y), it is determined whether or not to execute a special temporary stop notification effect instead of the temporary stop notification effect based on the variable display result (step 193SGS280). . The temporary stop notification effect is an effect for notifying the player of the temporary stop of the decorative symbols by outputting a temporary stop notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R from the timing when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped as a pseudo continuous effect. , The special temporary stop notification effect is to temporarily stop the background image displayed on the image display device 5 in addition to outputting the temporary stop notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R from the timing when the decoration pattern is temporarily stopped as a pseudo continuous effect. The decoration pattern is temporarily stopped by updating the background image according to the number of times (first special background image if the number of times of temporary stop is 1, second special background image if it is 2, and third special background image if it is 3). is an effect for informing the player of

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the special temporary stop notification effect is determined (step 193SGS281). If it is decided to execute the special temporary stop notification effect (step 193SGS281; Y), a process table corresponding to the execution of the special temporary stop notification effect and the variation pattern is selected, and the process proceeds to step 193SGS287 (step 193SGS282).

When the variation pattern is the normal reach variation pattern (193SGS279; N) or when it is determined not to execute the special temporary stop notification effect (193SGS281; N), the temporary stop notification effect period is set to 2 seconds based on the variable display result. 1.5 seconds (step 193SGS283). Then, a process table is selected according to the temporary stop notification effect period and variation pattern determined in step 193SGS283, and the process proceeds to step 193SGS287 (step 193SGS284).

Further, if the variation pattern is a variation pattern that does not execute a pseudo-continuous effect during variable display (step 193 SGS277; N), a variable display announcement effect determination process that does not execute a pseudo-continuous effect is executed and variable display is being performed. It determines whether or not to execute the advance notice effect and the advance notice effect to be executed (step 193SGS285). After determining whether or not to execute the notice effect and the notice effect to be executed in step 193SGS285, a process table corresponding to the variation pattern is selected and the process proceeds to step 193SGS287 (193SGS286).

At step 193SGS287, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the process table selected at any one of 193SGS282, 193SGS284, and 193SGS286 (step 193SGS287).

The process table contains display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and data for controlling sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). there is

Next, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (image display as a component for effect) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as performance parts, speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (step 193SGS288). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the image display device 5 . It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, in this characteristic part 193SG, the production control CPU 120 controls so that the decorative pattern is displayed variably according to the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern designation command one-to-one. A variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of variation patterns corresponding to the specified command.

Then, a variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variation pattern designation command (step 193SGS289). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (step 193SGS290). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the effect control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses. A signal corresponding to the image data obtained is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing variable display (fluctuation) of the decoration pattern. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S172), and the variable display start setting process is terminated (step 193SGS291).

The effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the process timer by 1 each time the effect process during variable display is executed, and determines whether or not the process timer has timed out. If the process timer has not timed out, the effect device is controlled according to the content of the process data corresponding to the process timer, and if the process timer has timed out, the next process data is switched to and the next process is started again. By starting a timer and controlling the performance device according to the next process data, variable display of the decoration pattern is executed. Note that the effect control CPU 120 can execute a notice effect execution process for executing a notice effect in the effect process during variable display when execution of the notice effect is determined in the variable display start setting process. .

Next, the flow of variable display for executing the pseudo continuous effect will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 41-23(A), when the variation pattern is the normal reach variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed once during the variable display, first, the decoration pattern is temporarily stopped after reaching the reach. A suggesting temporary stop suggestion effect is executed. It should be noted that the temporary stop suggestion effect in this characterizing portion 193SG is such that after the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, the pseudo consecutive symbols are displayed in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. is a production that performs variable display at a slower speed than usual. The length of the temporary stop suggestion effect period differs according to the length of the temporary stop notification effect period determined in step 193SG283 of the variable display start setting process.

When the temporary stop notification effect period is determined to be the temporary stop notification effect period A (2 seconds), the temporary stop suggestion effect ends at the first temporary stop timing A, and the temporary stop suggestion effect is completed. A stop is executed and a temporary stop notification effect is executed for two seconds. Further, when the temporary stop notification effect period is determined to be the temporary stop notification effect period B (1.5 seconds), the temporary stop suggestion effect ends at the first temporary stop timing B, and the pseudo A temporary stop of consecutive symbols is executed, and a temporary stop notification effect is executed for 1.5 seconds. Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 41-23(A), the temporary stop notification effect period A and the temporary stop notification effect period B are at the same timing, that is, the temporary stop notification effect has effect periods of 1.5 seconds and 2 seconds. It is always set to end at a specific timing regardless of whether it is determined in seconds.

Then, when the temporary stop notification effect ends, the re-variable display notification effect is executed. In the re-variable display notification effect, in addition to outputting re-variable display notification sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R, a character image corresponding to the number of re-variable displays is displayed on the image display device 5 (if the number of re-variable displays is the first time, character A , the image of character B for the second time, and the image of character C for the third time) to inform the player that the re-variable display of the decoration pattern will be executed.

Note that the first re-variable display is executed during the re-variable display notification effect. When the re-variable display notification effect ends, the first variable display start frequency notification effect is executed from the end timing of the re-variable display notification effect. In the first variable display start number notification effect, the number of variable display times of the decoration pattern including the number of re-variable display times is displayed on the image display device 5, and effect images of colors corresponding to the number of variable display times are displayed on the left and right ends of the image display device 5. It is a production that displays In other words, the first variable display start number notification effect corresponding to the first re-variable display is to display "x2" on the image display device 5 and to display blue effect images on both the left and right ends of the image display device 5. In the first variable display start number notification effect corresponding to the second re-variable display, "x3" is displayed on the image display device 5, and green effect images are displayed on the left and right ends of the image display device 5. , and the first variable display start number notification effect corresponding to the third re-variable display is to display "x4" on the image display device 5, and red This is a production that displays an effect image.

Then, when the first variable display start frequency notification effect is completed, the second variable display start frequency notification effect is executed from the end timing of the first variable display start frequency notification effect. The second variable display start frequency notification effect is an effect for displaying the variable display frequency of the decoration pattern including the re-variable display frequency on the image display device 5 in a smaller size than the first variable display start frequency notification effect.

After the second variable display start frequency notification effect is completed, the ready-to-win state is reached again, and the temporary stop suggesting effect is executed. At this time, the ready-to-win performance of the normal ready-to-win is executed without temporarily stopping the pseudo-continuous symbols.

As shown in FIG. 41-23(B), when it is determined that the special temporary stop notification effect is not to be executed and the variation pattern is a super ready-to-win variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed twice during the variable display, As in the case where the variation pattern shown in FIG. 41-23 (A) is the normal reach variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed once during the variable display, after reaching the reach, the temporary stop suggestion effect and the first pseudo continuous effect Temporary stop and re-variable display of symbols, temporary stop notification effect, re-variable display notification effect, first variable display start frequency notification effect, second variable display start frequency notification effect, first temporary stop and re-variable display are executed. After that, it becomes reach again, and the temporary stop and re-variable display of the second pseudo-continuous pattern, temporary stop notification effect, re-variable display notification effect, first variable display start number notification effect, and second variable display start frequency notification effect are executed. be done. Then, after the second variable display start frequency notification effect is completed for the second time, the ready-to-win state is reached again, and the temporary stop suggesting effect is executed. At this time, the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win is executed without temporarily stopping the pseudo-continuous symbols.

If the first temporary stop notification effect is executed during the temporary stop notification effect period A (2 seconds), the second temporary stop notification effect is also executed during the temporary stop notification effect period A (2 seconds). , If the first temporary stop notification effect is executed during the temporary stop notification effect period B (1.5 seconds), the second temporary stop notification effect is also executed during the temporary stop notification effect period B (1.5 seconds). is executed.

Further, as described above, in the second re-variable display notification effect, the image of the character (character B) different from that in the first re-variable display effect is displayed on the image display device 5 . In addition, in the second variable display start frequency notification effect and the second variable display start frequency notification effect, the first variable display start frequency notification effect and the second variable display start frequency notification effect are performed on the image display device 5. In contrast, "x3" (in the second variable display start count notification effect, "x3" of a smaller size than the second variable display start count notification effect) is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 41-25, when it is determined that the special temporary stop notification effect is not to be executed and the variation pattern is a super ready-to-win variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed three times during variable display, FIG. 23(B) is the super ready-to-win variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed twice during the variable display, a temporary stop suggesting effect after reaching the ready-to-win, and the pseudo-continuous pattern up to the second time, respectively. Temporary stop and re-variable display, temporary stop notification effect, re-variable display notification effect, first variable display start frequency notification effect, and second variable display start frequency notification effect are executed. Then, after the second variable display start number of times notification effect is completed, the ready-to-win state is reached again. A first variable display start frequency notification effect and a second variable display start frequency notification effect are executed, and a super ready-to-win reach effect is also executed.

If the first and second temporary stop notification effects are executed during the temporary stop notification effect period A (2 seconds), the third temporary stop notification effect is also executed during the temporary stop notification effect period A (2 seconds). If the first and second temporary stop notification effects are executed during the temporary stop notification effect period B (1.5 seconds), the third temporary stop notification effect is also executed during the temporary stop notification effect period B ( 1.5 seconds).

Further, as described above, in the third re-variable display notification effect, the image of the character (character C) different from the first and second re-variable display effects is displayed on the image display device 5 . In addition, in the third variable display start count notification effect and the second variable display start count notification effect, the image display device 5 performs the second variable display start count notification effect and the second variable display start count notification effect. In contrast, "x4" (in the third second variable display start count notification effect, "x4" of a smaller size than in the third first variable display start count notification effect) is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 41-26, when execution of a special temporary stop notification effect has been determined and the variation pattern is a super ready-to-win variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed twice during variable display, the temporary stop is first performed. Suggestion production is executed.

In the variable display, when the first temporary stop timing A is reached, the temporary stop notification effect is completed, the temporary stop of the decoration pattern is executed, and the special temporary stop notification effect is executed for 2 seconds. . That is, in the variable display in which the special temporary stop notification effect is executed, unlike the variable display in which the special temporary stop notification effect is not executed (the temporary stop notification effect is executed), the temporary stop suggestion effect period and the special temporary stop notification The performance period remains unchanged.

After the end of the special temporary stop notification performance, the first re-variable display of the decoration pattern is executed without executing the re-variable display notification performance and the first variable display start frequency notification performance. In addition, after a while, the second variable display start count notification effect is executed. That is, in the variable display, after the first special temporary stop notification effect is executed, the image of the character (character A) is displayed as the first re-variable display notification effect, or the first variable display start frequency notification effect is displayed. The display of "x2" on the image display device 5 is not executed, and the image display device 5 as the second variable display start count notification effect displays "x2" in a size smaller than the first variable display start count notification effect. " is displayed only.

After the temporary stop and re-variable display of the first decoration pattern, the special temporary stop notification effect, and the second variable display start number notification effect are executed, the second temporary stop and re-variable display of the decoration pattern, special After the provisional stop notification effect and the second variable display start frequency notification effect are executed, the super ready-to-win reach effect is further executed.

As for the second variable display start frequency notification effect for the second time, the image display device 5 displays “×3” in a size smaller than the first variable display start frequency notification effect, as in FIG. 41-23(B). is executed.

As shown in FIG. 41-27, when the execution of the special temporary stop notification effect is determined and the variation pattern is the super ready-to-win variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed three times during variable display, FIG. 41-26 Similarly, after the temporary stop suggestion effect, the temporary stop and re-variable display of the decoration pattern up to the second time, the special temporary stop notification effect, and the second variable display start number notification effect are executed, the third decoration pattern provisional A stop and re-variable display, a special temporary stop notification effect, and a second variable display start times notification effect are executed, and a super ready-to-win reach effect is executed.

As for the third variable display start frequency notification effect, the image display device 5 displays "x4" in a size smaller than the first variable display start frequency notification effect, as in FIG. 41-23(B). is executed.

It should be noted that, as partially described above, as shown in FIG. 41-28, the temporary stop notification effect in the present characteristic portion 193SG is a temporary stop notification sound generated by the speaker 8L from the timing when the decoration pattern is temporarily stopped as a pseudo continuous effect. , 8R to inform the player that the decorative symbols have temporarily stopped, and is executed for 2 seconds or 1.5 seconds.

In the special temporary stop notification effect, a temporary stop notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R from the timing when the decoration pattern is temporarily stopped as a pseudo continuous effect, and in addition, the background image displayed on the image display device 5 is temporarily stopped. (1st special background image if the number of times of temporary stop is 1st, 2nd special background image if it is 2nd, 3rd special background image if it is 3rd) according to the temporary stop of the decorative pattern This is an effect to notify the player. Note that the special background image displayed on the image display device 5 as the special temporary stop notification effect is an image that is displayed until the next special background image is updated or until the variable display is completed. The sound output period (special temporary stop notification effect period) is 2 seconds, which is the same as part of the temporary stop notification effect.

The re-variable display notification effect is outputting a re-variable display notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R and displaying a character image corresponding to the number of re-variable displays on the image display device 5 (if the re-variable display count is the first time, the character A image, character B image for the second time, and character C image for the third time) to inform the player that the decorative symbols are re-variably displayed. Note that the duration of the re-variable display notification effect (the character image display period on the image display device 5 and the re-variable display notification sound output period from the speakers 8L and 8R) is 3 regardless of the number of times the re-variable display is performed. seconds. In addition, as described above, in the variable display that executes the pseudo-continuous effect, the larger the number of times of execution of the pseudo-continuous effect (the number of times of temporary stop/re-variable display), the higher the expectation of the big hit is set. As for the display/notification effect, the degree of expectation for the big win is set to be the highest when the image of the character C is finally displayed, and the degree of expectation for the big win is set to be the lowest when the image of the character A is finally displayed.

The first variable display start count notification effect is for notifying the number of times the variable display of decorative symbols including the re-variable display is started during one variable display after the re-variable display is started as a pseudo-continuous effect. The number of times the variable display of decorative patterns including these re-variable displays has been started on the image display device 5 ("x2" in the first variable display start number notification effect, and the second first variable display The effect is to display "x3" in the number-of-starts notification effect, and to display "x4" in the third-time variable-display start-numbers notification effect. It should be noted that the effect period of the first variable display start frequency notification effect is one second regardless of the number of variable display times of the decorative symbols including the re-variable display.

The second variable display start number notification effect is an effect for notifying the number of times the variable display of the decoration pattern including the re-variable display is started during the variable display of 1 after the first variable display start number notification effect. , the number of times the variable display of decorative patterns including these re-variable displays has been started on the image display device 5 ("x2" in the first variable display start number notification effect, the second first variable display start number notification effect This is an effect in which "x3" is displayed in the effect, and "x4" is displayed in the third time also in the first variable display start frequency notification effect in a size smaller than that of the first variable display start frequency notification effect. It should be noted that the effect period of the second variable display start frequency notification effect is two seconds regardless of the number of variable display times of the decorative symbols including the re-variable display.

FIG. 41-29(A) is a flow chart showing the advance notice effect determination process (for execution of the pseudo-continuous effect) of the variable display start setting process in FIG. 41-22. In the announcement effect determination process (for execution of the pseudo-continuous effect), the effect control CPU 120 first identifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (step 193SGS301). Then, a random value for determining the execution of the announcement effect is extracted, and the random value and a table for determining the announcement effect (not shown) are used to determine whether or not the announcement effect is executed in the variable display in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, and the announcement to be executed. An effect is determined (step 193SGS302).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 41-29(B), when the result of the variable display is a big hit, the non-execution of the notice effect is determined at a rate of 5%, and the execution of the cut-in notice effect is determined at a rate of 20%. , the execution of the group notice effect is decided at a ratio of 45%, and the execution of the cut-in notice effect and the group notice effect is decided at a ratio of 30%.

Note that the cut-in notice effect is a effect in which a cut-in image is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 41-29(F), and the group notice effect is shown in FIG. This is an effect in which a large number of characters are displayed across the display area of the image display device 5 as shown.

If the variable display result is out and the super reach variation pattern (super reach out) is determined, non-execution of the notice effect is decided at a rate of 40%, execution of the cut-in notice effect is decided at a rate of 30%, and the group The execution of the notice performance is determined at a rate of 25%, and the execution of the cut-in notice performance and the group notice performance is determined at a rate of 5%. In addition, if the variable display result is out and the normal reach variation pattern (normal reach out) is determined, the non-execution of the notice effect is determined at a rate of 90%, and the execution of the cut-in notice effect is determined at a rate of 8%. The execution of the notice performance is determined at a rate of 2%, and the execution of the cut-in notice performance and the group notice performance is determined at a rate of 0%.

In other words, in the variable display that executes the pseudo-continuous effect in the characteristic portion 193SG, the expectation for the big hit is set to the lowest when neither the cut-in notice effect nor the group notice effect is executed, and the cut-in notice effect is set as the notice effect. When only is executed, the expectation of a big hit is set higher than when neither the cut-in notice effect nor the group notice effect is executed, and when only the group notice effect is executed as the notice effect, the cut-in notice effect The expectation of a big hit is set higher than when only is executed, and the expectation of a big hit is set highest when both the cut-in notice effect and the group notice effect are executed as the notice effect (pseudo continuous Expectations for big hits related to advance notice effects in variable display that executes effects: cut-in advance notice effects + group advance notice effects>group advance notice effects>cut-in effects>non-execution).

After executing step 193SGS302, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the notice effect has been determined (execution of at least one of the cut-in notice effect and the group notice effect has been determined) (step 193SGS303). If execution of any of the advance notice effects has not been determined (step 193SGS303; N), the advance notice effect determination processing (for execution of pseudo continuous effects) is terminated, and execution of any of the advance notice effects is determined (step 193SGS303; Y) stores the determined announcement effect, sets the announcement effect start waiting timer, and ends the announcement effect determination process (for execution of pseudo continuous effect) (step 193SGS304, step 193SGS305).

Incidentally, as shown in FIGS. 41-32, the period during which these advance notice effects can be executed overlaps the re-variable display notification effect period and the first variable display start frequency notification effect period. In particular, when it is decided to execute both the cut-in notice effect and the group notice effect as the notice effect, these cut-in notice effect and the group notice effect are executed during the re-variable display notification effect period and the first variable display start times notification effect period. The production is performed in duplicate.

Further, in the present characteristic portion 193SG, when execution of any of the notice effects is determined in the notice effect determination processing (for execution of the pseudo-continuous effect), the same notice effect is executed in all the re-variable display notification effect periods. (See Figures 41-29 to 41-31).

FIG. 41-30(A) is a flow chart showing the advance notice effect determination process (for non-execution of the pseudo-continuous effect) of the variable display start setting process in FIG. 41-22. In the announcement effect determination process (for non-execution of the pseudo-continuous effect), the effect control CPU 120 first specifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (step 193SGS311). Then, a random value for determining the execution of the announcement effect is extracted, and the random value and a table for determining the announcement effect (not shown) are used to determine whether or not the announcement effect is executed in the variable display in which the pseudo-continuous effect is not executed, and the announcement to be executed. The effect is determined (step 193SGS312).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 41-30(B), when the result of the variable display is a big hit, the non-execution of the notice effect is determined at a rate of 5%, and the execution of the cut-in notice effect is determined at a rate of 30%. , and execution of the group announcement effect is determined at a rate of 65%.

If the variable display result is out and the super reach variation pattern (super reach out) is determined, non-execution of the notice effect is decided at a rate of 40%, execution of the cut-in notice effect is decided at a rate of 35%, and the group Execution of the advance notice effect is determined at a rate of 25%. In addition, if the variable display result is out and the normal reach variation pattern (normal reach out) is determined, the non-execution of the notice effect is determined at a rate of 90%, and the execution of the cut-in notice effect is determined at a rate of 8%. Execution of the advance notice effect is determined at a rate of 2%.

In other words, in the variable display in which the pseudo-continuous effect is not executed in the characteristic portion 193SG, the expectation for the big hit is set to the lowest when neither the cut-in notice effect nor the group notice effect is executed, and the cut-in notice effect is set as the notice effect. When only is executed, the expectation of a big hit is set higher than when neither the cut-in notice effect nor the group notice effect is executed, and when only the group notice effect is executed as the notice effect, the cut-in notice effect The expectation of big hit is set higher than when only is executed (expectation of big hit regarding advance notice effect in variable display for executing pseudo-continuous effect: group notice effect>cut-in effect>non-execution).

After executing step 193SGS312, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the advance notice effect is determined (step 193SGS313). If the execution of the notice effect has not been decided (step 193SGS313; N), the notice effect decision processing (for non-execution of the pseudo-continuous effect) is terminated, and if the execution of the notice effect has been decided (step 193SGS313; Y), The decided notice effect is stored, and the notice effect start waiting timer is set to end the notice effect determination process (for non-execution of pseudo continuous effect) (step 193SGS314, step 193SGS315).

In addition, when the notice effect is executed in the variable display in which the pseudo continuous effect is not executed, the notice effect may be executed during any period from the start timing of the variable display to the ready-to-reach timing.

FIG. 41-31(A) is a diagram showing the determination ratio when the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the special temporary stop notification effect at step 193SG280 in FIG. 41-22. At step 193SG280 in FIG. 41-22, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the special temporary stop notification effect (execute the temporary stop notification effect) at a rate of 20% if the variable display result is a big hit (super reach jackpot). Execution of the special temporary stop notification effect (non-execution of the temporary stop notification effect) is determined at a rate of 80%. On the other hand, if the variable display result is lost (super reach lost), non-execution of the special temporary stop notification effect (execution of the temporary stop notification effect) is determined at a rate of 80%, and execution of the special temporary stop notification effect ( non-execution of temporary stop notification effect) is determined at a rate of 20%.

That is, in the present characteristic portion 193SG, when the special temporary stop notification effect is executed in the variable display for executing the pseudo continuous effect (temporary stop notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in response to the temporary stop of the decorative symbol and the image When the special background image is displayed on the display device 5), when the special temporary stop notification effect is not executed (when the temporary stop notification sound is only output from the speakers 8L and 8R in response to the temporary stop of the decorative pattern; When the temporary stop notification effect is executed), the expectation of the big hit is set higher than .

Further, as described above, focusing on the case where the special temporary stop notification effect is executed, when the pseudo continuous effect is executed once during the variable display, the image is displayed in response to the first temporary stop of the decoration symbol. Although only the first special background image is displayed on the display device 5, when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed twice during the variable display, the image display device 5 is displayed in response to the temporary stop of the decoration symbol for the first time. After the first special background image is displayed on the second special background image, the second special background image is displayed on the image display device 5 in place of the first special background image (the first special background image ), and the third special background image is displayed on the image display device 5 in place of the second special background image (from the second special background image) in response to the third temporary stop of the decorative pattern. (updated to the third special background image).

In other words, regarding the variable display for executing the pseudo-continuous effect, the greater the number of pseudo-continuous effects executed during the variable display, the higher the expectation for the big hit is set. is the third special background image, the expectation for the big win is set to be the highest, and the expectation for the big win is the lowest for the background image finally displayed on the image display device 5 being the first special background image. The set (big hit expectation regarding the special background image finally displayed on the image display device 5 in the variable display that executes the pseudo continuous effect: 3rd special background image > 2nd special background image > 1st special background image ).

FIG. 41-31(B) is a diagram showing a determination ratio when the effect control CPU 120 determines the temporary stop notification effect period based on the variable display result in step 193SG283 in FIG. 41-22. At step 193SG283 in FIG. 41-22, if the variable display result is a big hit, the effect control CPU 120 determines the temporary stop notification effect period to be the temporary stop notification effect period A (2 seconds) at a rate of 60% and 40%. is determined to be the temporary stop notification effect period B (1.5 seconds). On the other hand, if the variable display result is incorrect, the temporary stop notification effect period is determined to be the temporary stop notification effect period A (2 seconds) at a rate of 40%, and the temporary stop notification effect period B (1 second) is determined at a rate of 60%. .5 seconds). That is, in the case where the special temporary stop notification effect is not executed in the variable display in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed, if the effect period of the temporary stop notification effect is set to 2 seconds, the effect period of the temporary stop notification effect is 1. The big hit expectation is set higher than when it is set to 5 seconds (the big hit expectation regarding the effect period of the temporary stop notification effect when the special temporary stop notification effect is not executed in the variable display that executes the pseudo continuous effect : Temporary stop notification effect period A (2 seconds) > Temporary stop notification effect period B (1.5 seconds)).

In addition, in this characteristic portion 193SG, the form in which the temporary stop notification effect period can be determined from 2 seconds and 1.5 seconds has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the temporary stop notification effect period is It may be determined uniquely in one period, or may be determined from three or more periods.

In addition, in this characteristic part 193SG, the longer the temporary stop notification effect period is, the higher the expectation of the big hit is than the short temporary stop notification effect period, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, a short temporary stop notification effect period may have a higher expectation for a big hit than a long temporary stop notification effect period.

Next, the output mode of sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R during variable display will be described. As shown in FIGS. 41-32, first, the speakers 8L and 8R are capable of outputting BGM (music) based on the progress of the variable display. The BGM is output during the variable display except for the re-variable display notification effect period. The speakers 8L and 8R are capable of outputting a temporary stop suggesting sound, a temporary stop notification sound, a re-variable display notification sound, and a first variable display start frequency notification sound. Of these, the temporary stop suggesting sound is output only during the temporary stop suggesting production period, the temporary stop information sound is output only during the temporary stop information production period, the re-variable display information sound is output only during the re-variable display information production period, The 1 variable display start count notification sound is output only during the first variable display start count notification effect period.

Further, the speakers 8L and 8R are capable of outputting a cut-in notice effect sound and a group notice effect sound. Of these, the cut-in notice effect sound is output only during the cut-in notice effect execution period when execution of the cut-in notice effect has been decided, and the group notice effect sound is output only when execution of the group notice effect has been decided. If there is, it is output only during the execution period of the group announcement effect.

That is, as shown in FIGS. 41-32, during the variable display in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed, the re-variable display notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. While the BGM output is limited, the BGM output from the speakers 8L and 8R is not limited during the variable display except for the re-variable display notification effect period. Furthermore, two types of sounds, BGM and temporary stop suggesting sound, are output from the speakers 8L and 8R during the temporary stop suggesting effect period, while the speakers 8L and 8R output the first variable display start frequency notification effect period. In addition to the first variable display start frequency notification sound, a maximum of four types of sounds including BGM, cut-in notice effect sound, and group notice effect sound are output.

Next, the display mode of each image on the image display device 5 during the temporary stop suggestion effect period will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 41 to 33, during the temporary stop suggestion effect period when the pseudo consecutive symbols are not temporarily stopped, the image display device 5 draws the image data 2 from the upper side to the lower side of the image display device 5. Moving display of pseudo consecutive symbols is executed. The moving display of the pseudo consecutive symbols is executed at a speed V1 from the start timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect period to the display image data switching timing. The pseudo-continuous pattern as the image data 2 is not drawn from the display image data switching timing, that is, the pseudo-continuous pattern as the image data 2 is not displayed from the display image data switching timing.

In addition, a temporary stop suggestion image is displayed on the image display device 5 by drawing with the image data 1 from the middle of the moving display of the pseudo consecutive symbols at the speed V1. The temporary stop suggesting image is displayed from the middle of the moving display of the pseudo continuous symbols at the speed V1 to the display image data switching timing period, and is not displayed (is hidden) during the other period.

Further, immediately before the display image data switching timing, the display of the pseudo-continuous pattern in the central portion of the image display device 5 is started by drawing with the image data 3 . The pseudo-continuous pattern drawn by the image data 3 does not move (at a speed of 0) until the display image data switching timing. The display is moved at a speed V3, which is higher than . The moving display of the pseudo-continuous pattern at the speed V3 by drawing the image data 3 is not displayed when the pseudo-continuous pattern moves out of the display area of the image display device 5 .

Further, from the display image data switching timing, by drawing with the image data 2, the moving display (variable display) of the decoration pattern from the top to the bottom on the image display device 5 is executed. The moving display (variable display) of the decoration pattern is executed at a speed V2 (speed: V3>V2>V1) which is higher than the speed V1 and lower than the speed V3 from the display image data switching timing. The moving display (variable display) of the decoration pattern continues until the start timing of the ready-to-win effect.

Then, from the start timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the image display device 5 displays the concentration line by drawing with the image data 4 . The display of the concentration line is displayed at a density (display density) of D1 for a certain period from the start timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect, and then displayed at a density D2 which is higher than D1. That is, the number of concentration lines displayed increases as a certain period of time elapses from the start of display on the image display device 5 . Then, the concentration lines are displayed at the density D1 again from the display image data switching timing, and then are not displayed.

Therefore, in the temporary stop suggesting effect period in which the pseudo continuous symbols are not stopped, from the start timing of the temporary stop suggesting effect to the display image data switching timing, the concentration lines are displayed at the density D1, thereby displaying the right and left decorations. The visibility of the patterns (decorative patterns displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R) is lower than the state (visibility: high) before execution of the temporary stop suggestion effect. (Visibility: Medium). Furthermore, the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns (the decorative patterns displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R) becomes lower due to the change in the concentration line density from D1 to D2. (Visibility: Low).

Further, from the timing of switching the display image data to the timing of ending the display of the concentrated lines, the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is higher than when the concentrated lines are displayed with the density D2 because the concentrated lines are displayed with the density D1. Higher (visibility: medium). After the display end timing of the concentrated line, the display of the concentrated line is finished (not displayed), so that the left and right decoration patterns have the highest visibility (visibility: high).

As shown in FIGS. 41 to 34, during the temporary stop suggestion effect period when the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped, the image display device 5 draws with the image data 2 so that the The moving display of the pseudo consecutive symbols is executed. The moving display of the pseudo continuous symbols is executed at a speed V1 from the start timing of the temporary stop suggesting effect period to the end timing of the temporary stop suggesting effect (temporary stop timing of the pseudo continuous symbols). The period required from the variable display start timing to the temporary stop timing of the pseudo continuous symbols is the period required from the variable display start timing to the display image data switching timing when the pseudo continuous symbols shown in FIGS. 41 to 33 are not temporarily stopped. are identical. Further, after the execution of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the temporary stop notification effect is executed, but during the temporary stop notification effect execution period, the pseudo continuous symbols are temporarily stopped (speed V0) in the "medium" decorative symbol display area 5C. hidden after

Further, from the start timing of the temporary stop suggesting effect, the image display device 5 executes the display of the concentration line by drawing with the image data 4 . As for the display of the concentration lines, the concentration line density (display density) is displayed at D2 from the start timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect to the end timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect (temporary stop timing of the pseudo continuous pattern). , is hidden from the end timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect.

Then, from the start timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the image display device 5 displays the concentration line by drawing with the image data 4 . The display of the concentration line is displayed at a density (display density) of D1 for a certain period from the start timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect, and then displayed at a density D2 which is higher than D1. That is, the number of concentration lines displayed increases as a certain period of time elapses from the start of display on the image display device 5 . Then, the concentration line is not displayed from the temporary stop timing of the pseudo continuous pattern.

Therefore, in the temporary stop suggesting effect period in which the pseudo continuous symbols are not stopped, from the start timing of the temporary stop suggesting effect to the display image data switching timing, the concentration lines are displayed at the density D1, thereby displaying the right and left decorations. The visibility of the patterns (decorative patterns displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R) is lower than the state (visibility: high) before execution of the temporary stop suggestion effect. (Visibility: Medium). Furthermore, the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns (the decorative patterns displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R) becomes lower due to the change in the concentration line density from D1 to D2. (Visibility: Low). Further, from the temporary stop timing of the pseudo-continuous pattern, display of the concentration line is finished (not displayed), so that the visibility of the left and right decoration patterns is highest (visibility: high).

Although not shown in FIGS. 41 to 34, after the end timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect, that is, during the period of the temporary stop notification effect, the pseudo continuous symbols are temporarily stopped, and the image data 1 is drawn to display the decorative symbols. is displayed around the pseudo-continuous pattern. The effect image for notifying the temporary stop of the decoration pattern is then switched to display in the entire display area of the image display device 5 (see FIGS. 41-35). It should be noted that the effect image for temporary stop notification in this characteristic portion 193SG is an image whose transmittance is set to 0%.

That is, during the temporary stop notification effect period, the visibility of the left and right decoration patterns is higher than during the temporary stop suggestion effect execution period (visibility: medium) due to the concentration line being temporarily hidden, but the image display device Due to the display of the temporary stop notification effect image in the entire display area 5, the left and right decoration patterns become invisible (visibility: invisible).

However, from the timing when the temporary stop display of the pseudo-continuous symbols in the image data 2 ends, the speed V2 of the pseudo-continuous symbols toward the player side (the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1) by drawing the image data 2 as well. movement display is executed. At this time, since the moving display (enlarged display) of the pseudo-continuous symbols is executed in the entire display area of the image display device 5, the left and right pseudo-continuous symbols become invisible again.

In the case where the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped in the temporary stop suggestion effect, the moving display of the pseudo consecutive symbols on the image display device 5 by drawing the image data 3 and the image display device 5 by drawing the image data 2 are performed. Movement display of the decoration pattern (variable display) is not executed.

Next, the display mode of the image display device 5 in the variable display for executing the temporary stop suggesting effect in the characteristic portion 193SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 41-35 to 41-47.

First, when it is decided not to execute the special temporary stop notification effect at the start of the variable display, as shown in FIGS. When the time elapses, the decoration symbols stop (swinging stop) in the "left" and "right" decoration symbol display areas 5L and 5C, and become ready-to-win. After that, as the first temporary stop suggesting effect, the pseudo consecutive symbols move downward from above in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C at a speed V1. At this time, on the image display device 5, a concentrated line is displayed from the peripheral portion of the image display device 5 toward the central portion of the image display device 5 (the "middle" decoration pattern display area 5C). The concentration lines are displayed with a density of D1 at the start of display, but the density changes to D2 after a certain period of time.

Then, when the variable display is a variable display based on the variation pattern PA2-1 of the normal reach out of which the pseudo-continuous effect is not executed, the pseudo-continuous symbols are not temporarily stopped, as shown in FIG. It moves downward on the image display device at a speed of V2 and disappears. At this time, the concentration line density displayed on the image display device 5 changes from D2 to D1. On the other hand, if the variable display is a variation pattern (either of PA2-2 to PA2-4 and PB1-2 to PB1-4) that executes a pseudo continuous effect, as shown in FIG. 41-35 (E) At the same time, the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped, and an effect image for notifying the temporary stop is displayed around the temporarily stopped pseudo consecutive symbols. Also, the saturated line is not displayed. At this time, a temporary stop notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R as a temporary stop notification effect. Further, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retracted position to the first effect position, and the built-in second movable body LED 193SG034 emits blue light.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 41-35(F) and 41-35(G), the effect image for temporary stop notification is switched to display in the entire display area of the image display device 5, so that left and right decorative patterns are displayed. It becomes invisible to the player, and blue light emission by the second movable body 193SG033 ends. At this time, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the first effect position to the retracted position.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 41-35 (G) and 41-35 (H), as the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the first effect position to the retracted position, a plurality of A crack is displayed. After that, an image is displayed in which the pseudo-ream pattern in which these cracks are displayed explodes, and the pseudo-ream pattern is formed as shown in FIGS. An image is displayed in which the characters (each alphabet of "NEXT" indicating that a pseudo-continuous effect is executed in the case of this characteristic portion 193SG) are diffused and moved toward the player side.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 41-37(K) to 41-37(P), the first re-variable display of the decoration pattern is started. Further, as a re-variable display notification effect, the image of the character A is displayed on the image display device 5, and re-variable display notification sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R. At this time, if execution of the cut-in notice effect or the group notice effect is determined at the start of the variable display, these cut-in notice effects and the cut-in notice effect are overlapped with the re-variable display notification effect and the first variable display start times notification effect. A group announcement effect is executed.

Then, when the re-variable display notification effect is completed, as the first variable display start frequency notification effect for the first time, an image of "x2" is displayed on the image display device 5, and both the left and right ends of the image display device 5 are displayed. , the blue effect image starts to be displayed. Also, at this time, the second movable body 193SG033 moves again from the retracted position to the first effect position and emits blue light.

It should be noted that the image of "x2" displayed on the image display device 5 as the first variable display start count notification effect for the first time is displayed once on the image display device 5, and then displayed in a larger size to be non-displayed. display (see FIGS. 41-37(O) and 41-37(P)).

When the first variable display start count notification effect ends, the blue light emission of the second movable body 193SG033 ends, and the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the first effect position to the retracted position. Also, as the first second variable display start count notification effect, an image of “×2” size smaller than the first variable display start count notification effect is displayed in the upper left part of the image display device 5 .

After a while after the first second variable display start count notification effect is completed, as shown in FIGS. In 5L and 5R, after the decorative symbols stop (swing stop) and become ready-to-win, as the second temporary stop suggestion effect, the pseudo-continuous symbols are displayed downward in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. It moves at speed V1. At this time, on the image display device 5, a concentrated line is displayed from the peripheral portion of the image display device 5 toward the central portion of the image display device 5 (the "middle" decoration pattern display area 5C). The concentration lines are displayed with a density of D1 at the start of display, but the density changes to D2 after a certain period of time.

Then, when the variable display is the variation pattern PA2-2 of the normal reach loss or the variation pattern PB1-2 of the normal reach jackpot in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed only once, as shown in FIG. 41-38 (U), The pseudo-continuous symbols are moved downward on the image display device at a speed V2 without being temporarily stopped, and are not displayed. At this time, the concentration line density displayed on the image display device 5 changes from D2 to D1. On the other hand, if the variable display is a variation pattern (any one of PA2-3, PA2-4, PB1-3, and PB1-4) in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed twice or more, FIG. 41-38 (V) , the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped, and an effect image for notifying temporary stop is displayed around the temporarily stopped pseudo consecutive symbols. Also, the saturated line is not displayed. At this time, a temporary stop notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R as a temporary stop notification effect. Further, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retracted position to the first effect position, and the built-in second movable body LED 193SG034 emits green light.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 41-38(W) and 41-38(X), the effect image for temporary stop notification is switched to display in the entire display area of the image display device 5, so that left and right decorative patterns are displayed. The green light emission by the second movable body 193SG033 ends as it becomes invisible to the player. At this time, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the first effect position to the retracted position.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 41-38 (X) and 41-38 (Y), as the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the first effect position to the retracted position, a plurality of A crack is displayed. After that, an image is displayed in which the pseudo-continuous pattern in which the plurality of cracks are displayed is exploded, and the pseudo-continuous pattern is configured as shown in FIGS. An image is displayed in which the characters (each alphabet of "NEXT" indicating that a pseudo-continuous effect is executed in the case of this characteristic portion 193SG) are diffused and moved toward the player side.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 41-40(b) to 41-40(h), the second re-variable display of the decoration pattern is started. Furthermore, as a re-variable display notification effect, the image of the character B is displayed on the image display device 5, and re-variable display notification sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R. In addition, when execution of the cut-in notice effect and the group notice effect is determined at the start of the variable display, these cut-in notice effect and the group notice effect are overlapped with the re-variable display notification effect and the first variable display start times notification effect. A preview effect is executed.

Then, when the re-variable display notification effect is completed, as the second first variable display start frequency notification effect, the image display device 5 displays an image of "x 3", and the left and right ends of the image display device 5 are displayed. , the green effect image starts to be displayed. Also, at this time, the second movable body 193SG033 moves again from the retracted position to the first effect position and emits green light.

It should be noted that the image of "x 3" displayed on the image display device 5 as the second first variable display start frequency notification effect is once displayed on the image display device 5, and then displayed in a larger size to be non-displayed. display (see FIGS. 41-40(f) and 41-40(g)).

When the first variable display start count notification effect is completed, a second variable display start count notification effect is displayed in the upper left part of the image display device 5, and a size of “×3” smaller than that of the first variable display start count notification effect is displayed. image is displayed.

Shortly after the second variable display start count notification effect is completed, the “left” and “right” decorative pattern display areas are displayed as shown in FIGS. In 5L and 5R, after the decorative symbols stop (swing stop) and become ready-to-win, as the third temporary stop suggestion effect, the pseudo consecutive symbols are displayed downward in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. It moves at speed V1. At this time, on the image display device 5, a concentrated line is displayed from the peripheral portion of the image display device 5 toward the central portion of the image display device 5 (the "middle" decoration pattern display area 5C). The concentration lines are displayed with a density of D1 at the start of display, but the density changes to D2 after a certain period of time.

Then, when the variable display is the variation pattern PA2-3 of the super reach losing which executes the pseudo continuous effect only twice or the variation pattern PB1-3 of the super reach jackpot, as shown in FIGS. Then, the pseudo-continuous pattern is moved to the lower part of the image display device at the speed V2 without being temporarily stopped and is not displayed. At this time, the concentration line density displayed on the image display device 5 changes from D2 to D1. On the other hand, if the variable display is a variation pattern (any one of PA2-3, PA2-4, PB1-3, PB1-4) in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed two or more times, FIG. 41-41(i) , the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped, and an effect image for notifying temporary stop is displayed around the temporarily stopped pseudo consecutive symbols. Also, the saturated line is not displayed. At this time, a temporary stop notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R as a temporary stop notification effect. Further, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retracted position to the first effect position, and the built-in second movable body LED 193SG034 emits red light.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 41-41(j) and 41-41(k), the effect image for temporary stop notification is switched to display in the entire display area of the image display device 5, so that left and right decorative patterns are displayed. The state becomes invisible to the player, and the second movable body 193SG033 stops emitting red light. At this time, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the first effect position to the retracted position.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 41-41(k) and 41-41(l), as the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the first effect position to the retracted position, a plurality of A crack is displayed. After that, an image is displayed in which the pseudo-continuous pattern in which the plurality of cracks are displayed is exploded, and the pseudo-continuous pattern is configured as shown in FIGS. An image is displayed in which the characters (each alphabet of "NEXT" indicating that a pseudo-continuous effect is executed in the case of this characteristic portion 193SG) are diffused and moved toward the player side.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 41-43(o) to 41-43(u), the third re-variable display of the decoration pattern is started. Further, as a re-variable display notification effect, the image of the character C is displayed on the image display device 5, and re-variable display notification sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R. In addition, when execution of the cut-in notice effect and the group notice effect is determined at the start of the variable display, these cut-in notice effect and the group notice effect are overlapped with the re-variable display notification effect and the first variable display start times notification effect. A preview effect is executed.

Then, when the re-variable display notification effect is completed, as the third first variable display start frequency notification effect, an image of "x4" is displayed on the image display device 5, and both the left and right ends of the image display device 5 are displayed. , the display of the red effect image is started. Also, at this time, the second movable body 193SG033 moves again from the retracted position to the first effect position and emits red light.

It should be noted that the "x4" image displayed on the image display device 5 as the third first variable display start count notification effect is displayed once on the image display device 5, and then displayed in a larger size. (See FIGS. 41-43(s) and 41-43(t)).

When the first variable display start count notification effect is completed, a third variable display start count notification effect is displayed in the upper left part of the image display device 5, and a size of “×4” smaller than that of the first variable display start count notification effect is displayed. image is displayed.

Here, the execution time of the temporary stop suggestion effect will be described. As shown in FIGS. 41-44(A) and 41-44(B), when the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed, the pseudo consecutive symbols are directed downward from above at the speed V1 on the image display device 5 as described above. , and the concentration lines are displayed at a density of D2. As the temporary stop suggesting effect progresses, the pseudo consecutive symbols approach the temporary stop position, and at the center of the image display device 5 (temporary stop position of the decorative symbol), the speed V1 A pseudo-continuous design (pseudo-continuous design drawn with image data 3) different from the pseudo-continuous design (pseudo-continuous design drawn with image data 2) moving with is displayed, suggesting a temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous design. be.

Then, when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the pseudo continuous symbols are temporarily stopped as shown in FIGS. The effect image for is displayed, and the second movable body 193SG033 that has moved from the retracted position to the first effect position is colored according to the number of temporary stops (pseudo consecutive times) (blue for the first temporary stop, blue for the second It emits light in green when it is temporarily stopped, and in red when it is temporarily stopped for the third time. Also, at this time, the concentration lines displayed on the image display device 5 are no longer displayed.

On the other hand, when the decorative symbols do not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggesting effect, the pseudo continuous symbols at the center of the image display device 5 as shown in FIGS. (Pseudo-continuous pattern drawn with image data 3) is hidden, and the pseudo-consecutive pattern (pseudo-continuous pattern drawn with image data 2), which had been moving from top to bottom at speed V1, is hidden. It passes through the temporary stop position at a speed of V2, moves downward on the image display device 5, and disappears. At the same time, moving display of normal decorative patterns is performed from the top to the bottom of the image display device 5 (variable display is performed).

The concentration lines displayed on the image display device 5 change in density from D2 to D1 (the number of displayed concentration lines decreases) from the timing when the pseudo continuous pattern starts to move at the speed V2. Then, the concentration lines after the density has changed to D1 are not displayed after a certain period of time after the pseudo continuous pattern is not displayed on the image display device 5 .

Incidentally, as shown in FIGS. 41-44 (F) and 41-44 (G), after the concentrated line is hidden, the decoration except for the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily displayed in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C. After the variable display is executed in the pattern, the ready-to-win effect is executed according to the variation pattern, and finally the decorative pattern indicating the big hit or the loss is derived and displayed. In the decorative pattern display area 5C, the decorative patterns of numbers other than "1" which is a winning combination or "1" which is a losing combination are stopped). That is, in the case where the pseudo consecutive symbols are not temporarily stopped in the temporary stop suggestion effect, the display of the concentration line continues even after the pseudo consecutive symbols are hidden from the image display device 5, but the concentration line is not displayed. The display is hidden before the decorative symbols stop with a combination of a big hit or a loss (more precisely, before the ready-to-win effect is started).

As described above, regarding the variable display when the special temporary stop notification effect is not executed, as shown in FIGS. During the temporary stop suggesting effect period, the concentration lines are displayed with a density of D1, so that the visibility of the displayed decoration pattern becomes lower than before the temporary stop suggesting effect is executed (visibility: low). . In addition, the left and right decorative patterns (the decorative patterns displayed in the “right” and “left” decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R) are further reduced in visibility (visual recognition gender: medium).

In addition, for the left and right decorative symbols during the temporary stop notification effect period, an effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed around the pseudo continuous symbol from the start timing of the temporary stop notification effect (temporary stop timing of the pseudo continuous symbol). Visibility is higher than during the temporary stop suggestion production period (visibility: medium).

In addition, after the effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5 during the temporary stop notification effect period, during the remaining temporary stop notification effect period (player side of the pseudo continuous symbol) It becomes invisible to the player during the moving display toward ) and the re-variable display notification effect period.

Then, from the start timing of the variable display start frequency notification effect, the left and right decoration patterns are displayed again on the image display device. At this time, these left and right decorative patterns are displayed in the center of the image display device 5, such as "x2", "x3", "x4", etc., by partially overlapping to provide a temporary stop notification effect. It has the same visibility (visibility: medium) as immediately after the start of

After that, the left and right decorative patterns are displayed in an enlarged manner (moving and displayed toward the player side) such as "x2", "x3", "x4", etc., so that they cannot be visually recognized by the player. After that, the display of "x2", "x3", "x4", etc. is switched to a small display in the upper left part of the image display device 5, so that the visibility is the highest (visibility: high). becomes.

41-36 to 41-37, 41-39 to 41-40, and 41-42 to 41-43, the execution period of the temporary stop notification effect and the Although the execution period of the re-variable display notification effect is different (the re-variable display notification effect is executed after the execution of the temporary stop notification effect) is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. The execution period of the stop notification effect and the execution period of the re-variable display notification effect may partially overlap. For example, as shown in FIGS. 41-36 and 41-37, when the pseudo consecutive symbols explode and are displayed moving forward on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop notification effect, a part of the pseudo consecutive symbols ( For example, the character "E") is erased after being displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5, while the character as a re-variable display notification effect on the back side of a part of the pseudo continuous pattern to start displaying the image of By doing so, the image of the character is gradually made visible to the player in the process of erasing the pseudo-continuous symbols, thereby improving the production effect. Therefore, it is possible to perform the transition of the image that is being displayed without a sense of incompatibility.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 41-35(H), etc., in the present characteristic portion 193SG, as a temporary stop notification effect, the image display device 5 displays an image in which the pseudo consecutive symbols are cracked, and the image itself explodes. Although the form of display has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the image with cracks and the image with explosion may be different images. For example, as a temporary stop notification effect, after displaying an image in which cracks appear in the pseudo consecutive symbols on the image display device 5, an image in which smoke or light is generated from these cracks is displayed. Then, the simulated consecutive symbols are made difficult for the player to see by the image of the smoke or light, and an image of explosion may be displayed instead of the simulated consecutive symbols. By doing so, it is also possible to shift the image displayed on the image display device 5 without a sense of discomfort.

Next, when the execution of the special temporary stop notification effect is determined at the start of the variable display, as shown in FIGS. Reach. Then, as the first temporary stop suggesting effect, the moving display of the pseudo-continuous symbols indicating the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect is executed at a lower speed (speed V1) than usual in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. Simultaneously with the termination of the temporary stop replay period, the pseudo continuous symbols are temporarily stopped. At this time, a temporary stop notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R as a temporary stop notification effect.

As shown in FIGS. 41-46(D) to 41-46(H), when the output of the temporary stop notification sound is completed, the display of the first special background image is started on the image display device 5, and the first special background image is displayed. The re-variable display of the decoration pattern of is started. At this time, when execution of cut-in notice effect and group notice effect is determined at the start of variable display, these cut-in notice effect and group notice effect are executed overlapping with re-variable display notification effect.

Then, when the cut-in effect and the group advance notice effect are completed, the first second variable display start frequency notification effect is executed without executing the first variable display start frequency notification effect.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 41-47 (I) to 41-47 (N), the first special background displayed on the image display device 5 by executing the temporary stop of the second decorative pattern While the image is displayed on the second special background image, the re-variable display of the decorative pattern, the cut-in notice effect, the group notice effect, and the second second variable display start number notification effect are executed, and the third decorative pattern is displayed. By executing the temporary stop, the second special background image displayed on the image display device 5 is displayed on the third special background image, and the re-variable display of the decoration pattern, the cut-in notice effect, the group notice effect, A third second variable display start count notification effect is executed. Then, the ready-to-win effect is executed and the decorative symbols are derived and displayed in a combination indicating a big hit or a loss.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present characteristic portion 193SG, as shown in FIGS. After the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is reduced by this, the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is further reduced by displaying the concentrated lines at a density of D2, so that the pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed by the temporary stop suggestion effect. It is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation for the temporary stop. As the temporary stop notification effect, the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped by displaying the effect image for the temporary stop notification in the entire display area of the image display device 5 to make the left and right decorative symbols invisible. It can increase the feeling of exaltation for

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 41 to 44, when the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed and the pseudo continuous symbols are not temporarily stopped, the concentration line continues even after the pseudo continuous symbols are hidden on the image display device 5. Therefore, when the pseudo continuous symbols are not temporarily stopped, the continuous display of the concentration line is continued even after the timing when the pseudo continuous symbols are supposed to be temporarily stopped, so that the pseudo continuous symbols are temporarily stopped. The player can easily recognize that the pseudo-continuous symbols did not stop temporarily, and the player's disappointment caused by the fact that the pseudo-continuous symbols did not temporarily stop can be alleviated, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 41 to 33, when the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, the concentrated lines are displayed at the density D2 before the display image data switching timing. Later, since the concentrated lines are displayed with the density D1, the visibility of the left and right decoration patterns is higher after the switching timing of the display image data than before the switching timing of the display image data. In other words, after the timing of switching the display image data, by increasing the transparency of the concentration lines, the player is made to recognize that the pseudo-continuous symbols will not temporarily stop, and attention to the background image is increased through the concentration lines. As a result, the player's disappointment over the fact that the pseudo-continuous symbols did not temporarily stop can be alleviated.

In addition, when the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion production, before the decorative pattern of the combination that becomes a big hit or loses in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C together with the left and right decorative patterns is stopped. Since the concentration line is hidden at the end, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the stop of the decoration pattern after the temporary stop of the pseudo continuous pattern is the temporary stop.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 41-35(G) to 41-35(H), when the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retracted position to the first effect position, Since the image display device 5 displays an image in which the pseudo consecutive symbols are cracked and exploded (an image in which the pseudo consecutive symbols move toward the player), the operation of the second movable body 193SG033 and the pseudo consecutive symbols are displayed. The player can be further impressed that the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped by the display of the explosion.

In particular, in the present characteristic portion 193SG, when the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retracted position to the first effect position as a temporary stop notification effect. Since a part of the second movable body 193SG033 overlaps, the second movable body 193SG033 prevents the pseudo consecutive symbols from becoming difficult for the player to visually recognize, and informs the player that the pseudo consecutive symbols have temporarily stopped. can impress.

In addition, in the present characteristic portion 193SG, as an example of deformation of the pseudo-continuous pattern, a mode in which the pseudo-continuous pattern explodes is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, the pseudo-continuous pattern may change to a specific shape (for example, a circle or triangle), or the size of the pseudo-continuous pattern may be different from that before the temporary stop.

Further, in this characteristic portion 193SG, when the pseudo symbol is temporarily stopped, the second movable body 193SG033 is moved from the retracted position to the first effect position, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, when the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped, in addition to or instead of the second movable body 193SG033, the movable body 32 is moved to the first effect position or a position different from the first effect position, when viewed from the front. may be moved to a position overlapping at least part of the pseudo-continuous pattern.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 41-35(F) and 41-35(G), in the temporary stop notification effect, the second movable body 193SG033 is moved before the pseudo continuous symbol is hidden on the image display device 5. Since the second movable body 193SG033 is moved from the first effect position to the retracted position, the player can easily recognize that the pseudo consecutive symbols are hidden from the image display device 5 by the movement of the second movable body 193SG033.

Further, in the variable display of the characteristic portion 193SG, the pseudo continuous effect can be executed up to three times. The image display device 5 displays "x2", "x3", "x4", etc. according to the number of re-variable displays as the 1-variable display start number notification effect. Further, as shown in FIG. 41-37(O), when the first variable display start count notification effect is executed, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retracted position to the first effect position, and the second movable body 193SG033 and Since some of the displays such as "x2", "x3", and "x4" are overlapped when viewed from the front, "x2", "x3", Attention can be drawn to the display of "x4" or the like, and the performance effect can be improved.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 41-37 (O), 41-40 (f), and 41-43 (s), the second movable The first variable display start count is obtained by making the body 193SG033 emit light in blue, the second movable body 193SG033 in green when displaying "x3", and the second movable body 193SG033 in red when displaying "x4". It is possible to prompt the player's attention to the display of the notification effect, and improve the effect of the effect.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 193SG, when the first variable display start count notification effect is executed, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retracted position to the first effect position, and the second movable body 193SG033 and "x2", " Although a part of the display such as "x3" and "x4" is overlapped when viewed from the front, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first variable display start count notification effect is executed. Sometimes, the display of the second movable body 193SG033 and "x2", "x3", "x4", etc. may completely overlap.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 41-33, 41-35, and 41-44, as a temporary stop suggesting performance, a pseudo continuous pattern is displayed as a temporary stop suggesting image in the central portion of the image display device 5, and a central line is displayed. is displayed, the display control of the temporary stop suggestion effect by the effect control CPU 120 is facilitated, and when the pseudo consecutive symbols are not temporarily stopped, the image data is switched at the display image data switching timing (shown in FIG. 41-3 It is possible to prevent the switching from the image data to the image data shown in FIG. 41-4 from becoming unnatural. Especially after the display image data switching timing, since the pseudo-continuous pattern moves downward from the central portion of the image display device 5, the pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed in the central portion of the image display device 5 in advance as a temporary stop suggesting image. By doing so, it is possible to switch the image data at the switching timing of the display image data in a different and natural manner that makes the player feel even more uncomfortable.

In addition, in the gaming machine of this characteristic portion 193SG, the effect control CPU 120 draws image data 1, image data 2, image data 3, and image data 4 as shown in FIGS. 41-3 and 41-4. An image can be displayed on the image display device 5 by synthesizing the data. In particular, a pseudo-continuous pattern as a temporarily stopped image is drawn as image data 1 with the highest display priority, and decorative patterns and pseudo-continuous patterns are drawn as image data 2 with a display priority lower than that of image data 1. Since the concentration line as the stop suggesting effect is drawn as the image data 4 with the lowest display priority, the decorative pattern and the pseudo continuous pattern during the moving display (during the variable display), the pseudo continuous pattern as the temporary stop suggesting image, the temporary It is possible to increase the degree of freedom of concentration lines as a stop-suggestion effect.

Further, in the characteristic portion 193SG, as shown in FIGS. 41-35(H), 41-36(I), and 41-36(J), a pseudo continuous symbol is displayed on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop notification effect. When it explodes and moves to the front side, while the left and right decorative patterns are invisible to the player, as shown in FIG. When "x2" or the like is displayed on the image display device 5, the left and right decorative patterns are visible to the player, so the temporary stop notification effect and the first variable display start count notification effect (especially (display of "x2", etc.) can be enhanced, and the left and right decoration patterns can be visually recognized by the player during the first variable display start frequency notification performance, so that the re-variable display is executed. can be easily recognized by the player.

41-35 (H), FIG. 41-36 (I), FIG. 41-36 (J), etc., where the pseudo consecutive symbols are exploded and displayed, and FIG. 41-37 (O), 41-37(P), etc., where displays such as "x2", "x3", and "x4" are moved and displayed are moving displays (enlarged displays) toward the player side. ), the effects of the temporary stop notification effect and the first variable display start frequency notification effect can be enhanced by these moving displays directed toward the player.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 41 to 33, in the case where the simulated continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, the moving speed of the simulated continuous pattern before the display image data switching timing is V1, but the simulated continuous pattern after the display image data switching timing is V1. Since the moving speed of the continuous symbols is V3, the player determines whether it is before or after the timing at which the pseudo continuous symbols are temporarily stopped (before the display image data switching timing) depending on the moving speed of the pseudo continuous symbols. later) can be easily grasped by the player.

In this characteristic portion 193SG, when the pseudo-continuous symbols do not temporarily stop, the moving speed of the pseudo-continuous symbols before the display image data switching timing is the moving speed of the pseudo-continuous symbols after the display image data switching timing. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be faster than the moving speed of the pattern.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 41 to 34, when the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped, the moving speed of the pseudo-continuous pattern before the timing of the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous pattern is V1, but the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped. Since the moving speed of the pseudo-continuous symbols after the timing is V2, the moving display of the pseudo-continuous symbols can be performed before or after the temporary stop depending on the moving speed of the pseudo-continuous symbols. can be easily understood.

In particular, in this characteristic portion 193SG, as shown in FIGS. 41-34 and 41-35, the pseudo consecutive symbols before the temporary stop move downward from above, but after the temporary stop, the pseudo consecutive symbols Since it moves toward the side (front side), it is possible for the player to more easily understand whether it is before the temporary stop or after the temporary stop depending on the moving direction of the pseudo consecutive symbols. Misidentification can be prevented.

In this characterizing portion 193SG, an example is given in which the moving direction of the pseudo consecutive symbols differs before and after the temporary stop of the pseudo consecutive symbols, but the present invention is not limited to this. The moving direction of the pseudo continuous symbols may be the same before and after the continuous symbols are temporarily stopped. Further, if the direction of movement of the pseudo-continuous symbols after the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbols is different from the direction of movement of the pseudo-continuous symbols before the temporary stop, the movement does not have to be toward the player side (front side). good.

In this characteristic portion 193SG, when the pseudo-continuous symbols do not temporarily stop, the moving speed of the pseudo-continuous symbols before the display image data switching timing is equal to the moving speed of the pseudo-continuous symbols after the display image data switching timing. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the case where the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, the image of the pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed before the display image data switching timing. and the number of display frames for displaying the pseudo-continuous pattern after the display image data switching timing may be different. In addition, when the pseudo consecutive symbols are not temporarily stopped, the period during which the pseudo consecutive symbols are displayed before the display image data switching timing (the effect period during which the pseudo consecutive symbols are displayed) and the display image data switching The period during which the pseudo consecutive symbols are displayed after the timing may be different. In other words, in the present invention, ``the movement speed at which the specific effect identification information (the pseudo-continuous pattern in the characteristic portion 193SG) moves differs'' means that the number of display frames for displaying the pseudo-continuous pattern is different, The period during which the symbols are displayed (demonstration period during which the pseudo-continuous symbols are displayed) is also included.

Although the characteristic portion 193SG of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these, and any changes or additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. .

For example, in the characteristic portion 193SG, by displaying a concentration line on the image display device 5 during the temporary stop suggestion effect, the pseudo continuous symbol is displayed in the central portion of the image display device 5 ("middle" decorative symbol display area 5C). Although the form in which the player pays attention to whether or not to temporarily stop has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification 193SG-1, FIGS. 41-48(A) to 41-48. As shown in (D), the concentration line is displayed on the image display device 5 during the temporary stop suggesting effect, and the temporary stop suggesting effect progresses (the pseudo continuous pattern is displayed moving toward the center of the image display device 5). ), the central line may be moved toward the center of the image display device 5 and displayed. By doing so, the player can specify that there is a possibility that the pseudo consecutive symbols will stop at the center of the image display device 5, so if the pseudo consecutive symbols do not temporarily stop, the game This makes it easier for the driver to recognize that the driver did not make the temporary stop.

Further, in the characterizing portion 193SG, a concentrated line is displayed on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop suggesting effect, and when the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped as a result of the temporary stop suggesting effect, a color corresponding to the number of temporary stops is displayed. , the second movable body 193SG033 (second movable body LED 293SG034) is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, the image display device 5 may display the concentration line in a color corresponding to the number of executions of the temporary stop suggesting effect. For example, the concentration line is displayed in blue when the temporary stop suggesting effect is executed for the first time, the concentration line is displayed in green when the temporary stop suggesting effect is executed for the second time, and the concentration line is displayed in red when the temporary stop suggesting effect is executed for the third time. . By doing so, when the second movable body 193SG033 is caused to emit light as the temporary stop notification effect, the second movable body 193SG033 emits light in the same color as the concentration line displayed as the temporary stop suggestion effect. can improve effectiveness.

In addition, in the characterizing part 193SG, the form in which the cut-in notice effect and the group notice effect can be executed as the notice effect suggesting that the variable display result will be a big hit during the variable display has been exemplified, but the present invention is limited to this. As a modification 193SG-3, as a notice effect, for example, the display mode of the decorative pattern is changed from the start timing of the variable display or the re-variable display timing when the pseudo continuous pattern is temporarily stopped. An effect or the like that changes the direction of display may be made executable.

In this way, when it is possible to change the display mode of the decorative pattern or change the direction of the variable display as the notice effect, the first variable display start number notification effect "x2", "x In the case where the display of "3" and "x4" is moved and displayed (enlarged display) toward the player side, the execution of the announcement effect may be restricted. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from not being able to recognize that the re-variable display will be executed due to the execution of the advance notice effect.

Further, in the characteristic portion 193SG, when the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped, the image display device 5 is configured to perform re-variable display without displaying an image that impairs the visibility of the pseudo consecutive symbols from the player. Although the present invention is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. As a modified example 193SG-4, when the pseudo continuous symbols are temporarily stopped, the visibility of the temporarily stopped pseudo continuous symbols on the image display device 5 is improved. A visibility-impairing image to be lowered (for example, an image of a blast, etc.) may be displayed, and after the visibility-impairing image is hidden, the variable display may be performed again. By doing so, the visibility impeding image is displayed before the re-variable display is performed, so that it is easy to understand that the re-variable display is performed.

Furthermore, a light guide plate, which is a plate material having transparency and is capable of displaying the above-described visibility-impaired image by introducing light from the outer peripheral side surface, is provided on the front side of the image display device 5 in the pachinko game machine 1 (image display device 5 and the player). In this way, when the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped, the visibility impeding image is displayed on the light guide plate to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the pseudo consecutive symbols displayed on the image display device 5. The impression can be enhanced, and the production effect of the visibility-impairing image can be enhanced.

Further, in the characteristic portion 193SG, when the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop at the central portion of the image display device 5, the pseudo-continuous pattern is always moved toward the lower part of the image display device 5 as it is and is not displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification 193SG-5, even if the pseudo continuous pattern does not temporarily stop at the center of the image display device 5, the pseudo A case may be provided in which the consecutive symbols once start moving downward on the image display device 5 and then return to the central portion of the image display device 5 and temporarily stop. In this case, the moving speed of the pseudo-continuous pattern before the display image data switching timing and the movement of the pseudo-continuous pattern when returning to the central portion of the image display device 5 after once passing through the central portion of the image display device 5 By making the speed and the speed different, it is easy for the player to grasp whether the pseudo consecutive symbols are before passing through the central portion of the image display device 5 or after passing through the central portion of the image display device 5 once. You may

Further, when the pseudo-continuous pattern returns to the central portion of the image display device 5 after once passing through the central portion of the image display device 5, the display of the concentration line may not be executed again. By doing so, it is possible for the player to more easily understand that the pseudo consecutive symbols return to the central portion of the image display device 5 after once passing through the central portion of the image display device 5 .

Further, in the characteristic portion 193SG, the pseudo-continuous effect can be executed up to three times during the variable display, and when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed three times during the variable display, the pseudo-continuous effect is executed twice. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the maximum number of pseudo continuous effects during variable display 3 times), a reach effect different from the case where the pseudo continuous effect is executed less than the maximum number of times during the variable display (for example, the ratio of the variable display result to a big hit than the reach effect of other super reach A high all-rotation reach effect, etc.) may be executed. It should be noted that when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed the maximum number of times during the variable display, even if the full-rotation ready-to-win effect is executed without going through the re-variable display notification effect after the temporary stop notification effect. good.

Further, in the characteristic portion 193SG, as a pseudo-continuous effect, a pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed in the center ("middle" decorative symbol display area 5C) in a state where symbols indicating the same numerical value are stopped in left and right decorative symbols (reach state). Although the form of temporary stop has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pseudo continuous symbols may be temporarily stopped in a state other than the ready-to-win state. Furthermore, as described above, as a pseudo-continuous effect, a decorative symbol different from the pseudo-continuous symbol may temporarily stop in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. As a pseudo-continuous effect, a decoration pattern different from the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. , and "334" and the like, a combination of so-called shift eyes, etc., the decoration design may be temporarily stopped in a specific combination.

(Description of characteristic portion 225SG in the embodiment of the present invention)
Next, the characterizing portion 225SG (hereinafter referred to as the main characterizing portion 225SG) in the embodiment of the present invention will be described. In addition, in this characterizing portion 225SG, the description of the portion having the same configuration as that of the pachinko game machine 1 of the characterizing portion described above is omitted.

The game machine of form 1 is
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) for a player,
Display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying effect images;
Suggestive effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, temporary stop suggestive effect) suggesting that the specific image displayed on the display means is controlled to the advantageous state a portion for executing the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 40);
with
The suggestion effect execution means is
a pre-stage effect for moving and displaying the specific image (for example, a temporary stop suggesting effect shown in FIGS. 42-4(C) to 42-4(E);
A first post-stage production (for example, as shown in Figs. the part that stops) and
A second post-stage production, which is a failure mode in which the moving display of the specific image is continued after the execution of the pre-stage production (for example, as shown in FIG. The part that is displayed and hidden by moving) and
This is the characteristic part.
According to this feature, it becomes easy to grasp the success or failure of the suggestive effect, and the interest of the suggestive effect can be improved.

The game machine of form 2 is
In the preceding stage production, a translucent effect display is displayed on the specific image (for example, as shown in FIG. is done) and
In the first post-stage effect, when the specific image is stopped and displayed, an opaque effect display is displayed to make the specific image temporarily difficult to see (for example, as shown in FIG. 42-4 (G) , the part where the effect image for temporary stop notification with a transmittance of 0% is displayed),
In the second stage effect, the opaque effect display is not displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 42-4 (F), when the pseudo continuous symbol does not temporarily stop, the effect image for notifying temporary stop is not displayed. part),
The game machine according to form 1, characterized by:
According to this feature, by displaying the translucent effect display, it is possible to improve the interest of the front-stage production in which it is unclear whether or not the specific image that is being moved and displayed will be statically displayed, and that the specific image is stopped. Since it becomes difficult to see when it is displayed, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity at the time of the stop display and to emphasize that the stop display has been performed.

The game machine of form 3 is
In the preceding stage effect, an effect display is displayed on the background side of the specific image (for example, as shown in FIG. displayed part),
When the first post-production is executed, the specific image is temporarily made invisible by displaying an opaque effect display when the first post-production is executed (for example, FIG. 42-6 As shown in (G), a portion where an effect image for temporary stop notification with a transmittance of 0% is displayed),
When the second stage effect is executed, the opaque effect display is not displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 42-6 (F), if the pseudo continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, the temporary stop notification effect part where the image is not displayed),
The game machine according to form 1, characterized by:
According to this feature, by displaying the effect display on the background side of the specific image, it is possible to improve the interest of the front-stage production in which it is unclear whether or not the specific image that is being displayed in a moving manner will be stopped and displayed. By making it difficult to see the image when it is statically displayed, it is possible to reduce discomfort during the static display and to emphasize the fact that the static display has been made, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the subsequent stage presentation.

The game machine of form 4 is
In the preceding stage effect, an effect display is displayed on the background side of the specific image (for example, as shown in FIG. displayed part),
In the second stage production, the effect display is displayed on the background side of the specific image before the failure mode, and the effect display is displayed for a predetermined period even after the specific image is erased. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 42-7 (F) to 42-7 (H) as modification 225SG-2, when the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, the image is displayed by moving and displaying the pseudo-continuous pattern The part where the concentration line continues to be displayed even after it is hidden by the device 5),
The game machine according to form 1, characterized by:
According to this feature, by displaying the effect display on the background side of the specific image, it is possible to improve the interest of the front-stage production in which it is unclear whether or not the specific image that is being displayed in a moving manner will be stopped and displayed. In the 2nd stage production as well, the interest of the latter stage production can be improved by displaying the effect display for a predetermined period from before the failure mode occurs until after the specific image is erased.

The game machine of form 5 is
In the preceding stage production, a translucent effect display is displayed on the specific image (for example, as shown in FIG. displayed part),
In the second post-stage production, a translucent effect display is displayed on the specific image before the failure mode occurs, and the effect display is displayed for a predetermined period even after the specific image is deleted. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 42-8(F) to 42-8(H) as modification 225SG-3, when the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, the image is displayed by moving the pseudo-continuous pattern. The part where the concentration line continues to be displayed even after it is hidden on the display device 5),
The game machine according to form 1, characterized by:
According to this feature, by displaying the translucent effect display on the specific image, it is possible to improve the interest of the front-stage production in which it is unclear whether or not the specific image that is being displayed in a moving manner will be stopped and displayed. In the second post-stage production as well, the interest of the post-stage production can be improved by displaying the effect display for a predetermined period from before the failure mode occurs until after the specific image is erased.

The game machine of form 6 is
In the preceding stage effect display, a semi-transparent and highly transparent highly transparent effect display is displayed on the specific image (for example, as shown in FIG. The part that is displayed with priority over the design),
In the first post-stage production, when the specific image is statically displayed, a low-transmittance effect display having a lower transparency than the high-transmittance effect display is displayed, thereby temporarily making the specific image difficult to see. (For example, as shown in FIG. 42-9 as a modified example 225SG-4, an effect image for temporary stop notification with a transmittance of 20% is displayed on the image display device 5 to display a decorative pattern or a pseudo continuous pattern. The part that is difficult to see from the player),
In the second post-stage production, the low-transparency effect display is not displayed (for example, if the pseudo consecutive symbols do not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion production, the image display device 5 may display an effect image for temporary stop notification. is not displayed),
The game machine according to form 1, characterized by:
According to this feature, by displaying the highly transparent effect display, it is possible to improve the interest of the front-stage production in which it is unclear whether or not the specific image that is being displayed in a moving manner will be statically displayed, and that the specific image is stopped. By displaying the low-transmittance effect display at the time of display, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity at the time of the stop display, and to emphasize that the stop display has been performed.

The game machine of form 7 is
The first post-stage effect includes an effect in which the size of the specific image is enlarged more than the size of the preceding stage effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 42-1 and 42-2, the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily If you do, the part where the pseudo-continuous pattern after the temporary stop is displayed in a larger size than the temporary stop),
The gaming machine according to any one of modes 2 to 6, characterized by:
According to this feature, it is possible to improve the visibility of the statically displayed specific image, and to further emphasize that it is statically displayed.

The game machine of form 8 is
The degree of emphasis of the effect display in the preceding stage production increases as the preceding stage production progresses (for example, as shown in FIGS. A portion where the concentration lines are moved and displayed toward the center of the image display device 5 according to
The gaming machine according to any one of modes 2 to 7, characterized by:
According to this feature, it is possible to heighten the sense of anticipation for the static display of the specific image, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the front-stage presentation.

The game machine of form 9 is
An announcement effect executing means capable of executing an announcement effect that foretells that a specific event will occur (for example, a portion for executing the effect process during variable display shown in FIG. 40 by the effect control CPU 120),
During the period in which the effect display is displayed in the first post-stage production and the second post-stage production, the execution of the announcement production is restricted (for example, as a modification 225SG-5, the image display device 5, when the effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed, the part that restricts the execution of the notice effect),
The game machine according to any one of Modes 2 to 8, characterized by:
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the effect from lowering the visibility of the notice effect and lowering the interest of the notice effect.

The game machine of form 10 is
The suggestion effect execution means is
As the suggestive effect, a first specific image (for example, an image having a left-right width dimension of L1 as a pseudo-continuous suggestive effect) is displayed on the display means, and the preceding stage effect and the first latter stage effect or the preceding stage effect and the above A first suggestive effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous suggestive effect shown in FIG. 42-11(C) as modification 225SG-5) that performs a second post-stage effect, and a display size smaller than the first specific image on the display means A second specific image (for example, an image of an arrow whose left-right width dimension is L2 (L1>L2) as an active display change suggesting effect) is displayed, and the front stage effect and the first rear stage effect or the front stage effect and the first stage effect are displayed. It is possible to execute a second suggestive effect (for example, the active display change suggestive effect shown in FIGS. 42-11(D) to 42-11(F) as modification 225SG-5),
When executing the first post-stage effect as the first suggestive effect, an opaque effect display or a low-transmissive effect display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 42-11 (B), the image display device 5 A portion that displays an effect image for temporary stop notification with a transmittance of 0% together with an image as a pseudo continuous suggestion effect),
When the first post-stage effect is executed as the second suggestive effect, the opaque effect display or the low-transmissive effect display is not displayed (for example, FIGS. 42-11 (D) to 42-11 (F) , the image display device 5 displays an arrow image as an active display change notice effect, but does not display an effect image for temporary stop notification with a transmittance of 0%),
The gaming machine according to any one of Modes 2 to 9, characterized by:
According to this feature, in the second suggestive effect, the opaque effect display or the low-transmissive effect display is not displayed when the first post-stage effect is executed. You can prevent things from getting worse.

First, the display control section 123 in the characteristic section 225SG will be described. The CGROM in the display control unit 123 stores a plurality of types of image data for displaying images on the image display device 5 . The display control unit 123 can cause the image display device 5 to display a predetermined image based on one image data stored in the CGROM based on an instruction from the effect control CPU 120, and can display a plurality of types of image data. By arranging and displaying an image on the image display device 5, it is possible to display a predetermined effect screen. When the predetermined image is not to be displayed on the image display device 5, depending on the situation, other image data may be placed in front of the image data of the predetermined image with a transmittance of 0%. In the case of controlling so as not to display the image based on the data on the performance screen, and by displaying the image on the image display device 5 which created the display data not arranging the image data of the prescribed image, the prescribed image is not displayed on the performance screen. may be controlled as follows.

As shown in Figures 42-1(A) to 42-1(C), Figures 42-2(A) to 42-2(C), Figures 42-3(A) to 42-3(C) In addition, for example, when an image is displayed on the image display device 5, the image is displayed on the image display device 5 based on display data created by arranging a plurality of image data including image data 1 to 4. Among them, FIG. 42-1 is the image data immediately before the pseudo-continuous symbols are temporarily stopped as the temporary-stop suggesting effect in the characteristic portion 225SG, and FIG. 42-2 is the image data when the pseudo-continuous symbols are temporarily stopped. FIG. 42-3 shows image data when the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop.

As shown in FIG. 42-2(A), the image data 1 is an effect image (temporary stop notification) for notifying that the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped in the entire display area of the image display device 5 as a temporary stop notification effect. This is the data drawn to display the effect image for

As shown in FIG. 42-1(A), the image data 2 moves from the outer peripheral edge of the image display device 5 to the central portion of the image display device 5 ("middle" decorative design display area 5C) as a temporary stop suggestion effect. This is the data drawn to display the saturated line toward .

As shown in FIGS. 42-1(B), 42-2(B), and 42-3(A), the image data 3 shows the pseudo consecutive symbols on the image display device 5 during execution of the temporary stop suggestion effect. This is the data drawn to display moving display from top to bottom. In addition, when the pseudo-continuous symbols are temporarily stopped, the temporarily-suspended pseudo-continuous symbols are larger in size than during the moving display (as shown in FIG. The width dimension is a and the vertical width dimension is b, but as shown in FIG. (y>b)). This data is drawn to display a variable display of normal decoration patterns (symbols "1" to "9" in this characterizing portion 225SG) from top to bottom.

As shown in FIG. 42-3(B), the image data 4 shows a pseudo continuous pattern downward from the central portion of the image display device 5 immediately after the temporary stop suggestion effect ends without the pseudo continuous symbols temporarily stopping. This data is drawn to display the moving display of consecutive symbols.

As shown in FIGS. 42-1 to 42-3, these image data 1 to 4 are set with display priorities for displaying images on the image display device 5. FIG. Image data 1 is set to have the highest display priority. The display priority of image data 2 is set lower than that of image data 1, and the display priority of image data 3 is set lower than that of image data 2. FIG. The lowest display priority is set for image data 4 (image display priority in image display device 5: image data 1>image data 2>image data 3>image data 4). That is, in the image display device 5, the image based on the image data 1 is displayed as the uppermost image, the image based on the image data 2 is displayed as the lower image than the image based on the image data 1, and the image based on the image data 3 is displayed. The image is displayed as a lower image than the image based on the image data 1 and the image based on the image data 2, and the image based on the image data 4 is displayed based on the image data 1, the image based on the image data 2, and the image data 3. It is designed to be displayed as an image in a lower layer than the image.

Therefore, when the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed, as shown in FIG. It is to be displayed with priority over moving display towards). Incidentally, since the concentration lines in the characteristic portion 225SG are set to have a high transmittance (for example, 50%), during execution of the temporary stop suggesting effect, the player can see decorative symbols and pseudo-continuous symbols through the concentration lines. It is visible.

Immediately after the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous pattern, as shown in FIGS. Based on the image (a pseudo-continuous pattern that has a larger size than during the moving display due to the temporary stop) is displayed with priority. It should be noted that the effect image for notifying temporary stop is not displayed when a predetermined period elapses before the start of the re-variable display.

It should be noted that the transmittance of the temporary stop notification effect image in the characteristic portion 225SG is set to 0%. That is, when the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped, as shown in FIGS. 42-2(C) and 42-2(D), the effect image for notifying the temporary stop is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5. As a result, the decorative symbols and the pseudo consecutive symbols become invisible to the player, but after a predetermined period of time has passed, the decorative symbols and the pseudo consecutive symbols become visible to the player.

As shown in FIG. 42-3(C), the image based on the image data 3 (variable display of a decoration pattern different from the pseudo consecutive symbols) is displayed immediately after the temporary stop suggestion effect is completed without the pseudo consecutive symbols being temporarily stopped. ) is displayed with priority over the image based on the image data 4 (moving display from the center of the image display device 5 of the pseudo-continuous pattern downward).

In particular, in this characteristic portion 225SG, during execution of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) displays the image data shown in FIG. The player is made to pay attention to whether or not the symbols are temporarily stopped.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123), in the variable display for executing the temporary stop suggestion effect, temporarily stops the pseudo continuous symbols regardless of whether or not the pseudo continuous symbols are temporarily stopped at the start timing of the variable display. The variable display is executed by setting image data to be stopped. Then, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) controls the image display device 5 at the display image data switching timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect in which the pseudo consecutive symbols are not temporarily stopped (see FIGS. The image data to be displayed in FIG. 42-3 is switched from the image data (FIGS. 42-1 and 42-2) in which the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped to the image data in which the pseudo-continuous pattern is not temporarily stopped as shown in FIG. 42-3.

Next, the display mode of the image display device 5 in the variable display that executes the temporary stop suggesting effect in the characteristic portion 225SG will be described with reference to FIG. 42-4.

First, as shown in FIGS. 42-4(A) to 42-4(C), when a certain period of time has passed since the start of the variable display, decorations are displayed in the "left" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L and 5C. The pattern stops (stops swinging) and becomes a reach. After that, as the first temporary stop suggesting effect, the pseudo consecutive symbols move downward in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. At this time, as shown in FIGS. 42-4(C) to 42-4(E), in the image display device 5, as the pseudo consecutive symbols are moved toward the center of the image display device 5, Then, the central line is moved and displayed toward the central portion of the image display device 5 .

Then, when the pseudo consecutive symbols do not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) switches the image data, so that as shown in FIG. 42-4(F), While the concentration line is hidden, the pseudo continuous pattern continues to move downward on the image display device without temporary stop and is hidden.

On the other hand, when the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped as a result of the temporary stop suggesting effect, the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped as shown in FIGS. 42-4(G) and 42-4(H). An effect image for notifying the temporary stop is displayed on the entire display area of the image display device 5 . As described above, the effect image for temporary stop notification is set to have a transmittance of 0%. The image makes the pseudo-continuous pattern invisible. Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbols, the effect image for the temporary stop notification is hidden, so that the player visually recognizes the pseudo-continuous symbols of a larger size than during the temporary stop notification effect. It becomes possible.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 225SG, the pseudo consecutive symbols are moved and displayed toward the center of the image display device 5 during the variable display of 1, and the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped. It is possible to execute a stop suggesting effect. Further, when the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped as a result of the temporary stop suggesting effect, the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped and an effect image for notifying the temporary stop is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5. If the temporarily stopped pseudo-continuous symbols are temporarily made invisible by the above, and if the pseudo-continuous symbols do not stop temporarily as a result of the temporary stop suggesting effect, the pseudo-continuous symbols are displayed as an image without displaying the effect image for notifying the temporary stop. Since the display is hidden after continuously moving toward the lower side of the display device 5, the player can see the success of the temporary stop suggesting effect (temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous pattern) and the failure of the effect (temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol). ) can be easily grasped, and the interest of the temporary stop suggestion effect can be improved.

In addition, during the temporary stop suggesting effect, a concentration line with high transmittance is displayed on the image display device 5, thereby making the player pay attention to whether or not the pseudo consecutive symbols being displayed in movement will be temporarily stopped. It can improve interest. Furthermore, when the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped, the image display device 5 displays an effect image for notifying the temporary stop with a transmittance of 0, thereby reducing the player's discomfort during the temporary stop. In addition, since it is possible to emphasize that the pseudo-continuous symbols have been temporarily stopped, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the temporary suspension of the pseudo-continuous symbols.

Further, when the pseudo-continuous symbols are temporarily stopped, the pseudo-continuous symbols at the time of the temporary stop are displayed in a size larger than that before the temporary stop (because the horizontal width dimension before the temporary stop is a and the vertical width dimension is b). On the other hand, the horizontal width dimension at the time of temporary stop is x (x>a), and the vertical width dimension is y (y>b)). A temporary stop can be emphasized more.

In addition, in the present characteristic portion 225SG, an example is shown in which the pseudo consecutive symbols are displayed in a size larger than before the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped from the timing when the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped, but the present invention is limited to this. The timing to display the size of the pseudo-pseudo continuous pattern larger than before the temporary stop is the timing immediately before the temporary stop, the timing after the temporary stop, such as the timing when the effect image for temporary stop notification is hidden. It can be timing.

Further, in the present characteristic portion 225SG, the temporary stop of the pseudo consecutive symbols is emphasized by displaying the pseudo consecutive symbols in a larger size than before the temporary stop of the pseudo consecutive symbols from the timing when the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, emphasizing that the pseudo continuous symbols are temporarily stopped by changing the shape or color of the pseudo continuous symbols from the timing at which the pseudo continuous symbols are temporarily stopped. You may

42-4(C) to 42-4(E), the characteristic portion 225SG displays concentration lines on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop suggesting effect, and also displays a temporary stop suggesting effect. By moving and displaying the concentration line toward the center of the image display device 5 according to the progress, the pseudo consecutive patterns are temporarily stopped by increasing the degree of emphasis on whether or not the pseudo consecutive patterns are temporarily stopped. It is possible to increase the expectation for the performance and improve the interest of the temporary stop suggestion production.

In this characteristic portion 225SG, by moving and displaying the concentration line toward the central portion of the image display device 5 according to the progress of the temporary stop suggesting effect, the degree of emphasis on whether or not the pseudo consecutive symbols will be temporarily stopped is increased. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible to change the color of the concentration lines or increase the number of lines to be displayed (increase the density of the concentration lines) according to the progress of the temporary stop suggestion effect. ), the degree of emphasis on whether or not the pseudo-continuous symbols are temporarily stopped may be increased.

Although the characteristic portion 225SG of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these, and any changes or additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. .

For example, as shown in FIG. 42-1, the characteristic portion 225SG draws concentrated lines as image data 2, and draws decorative patterns and pseudo-continuous patterns as image data 3. Although a mode in which concentrated lines are displayed with priority over decoration patterns and pseudo-continuous patterns has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and a modified example 225SG-1 is shown in FIGS. As shown in -5(C), by drawing a concentrated line as the image data 4, the image display device 5 displays decorative patterns and pseudo-continuous patterns with priority over concentrated lines (concentrated lines are displayed as decorative patterns and may be displayed as an image on the rear side of the pseudo consecutive symbol).

By doing so, as shown in FIGS. 42-6(A) to 42-6(H), during the temporary stop suggestion effect, the central line of the image display device 5 is drawn at the center of the image display device 5. By moving and displaying toward the part, it is possible to increase the degree of emphasizing whether or not the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped, and the concentration line makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize the decoration pattern and the pseudo-continuous pattern. can be prevented.

Incidentally, when the pseudo consecutive symbols do not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggesting effect, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) switches the image data so that as shown in FIG. 42-6(F), While the concentration line is hidden, the pseudo continuous pattern continues to move downward on the image display device without temporary stop and is hidden.

On the other hand, when the pseudo-continuous symbols temporarily stop as a result of the temporary-stop suggesting effect, the pseudo-continuous symbols temporarily stop as shown in FIGS. 42-6(G) and 42-6(H), An effect image for notifying the temporary stop is displayed on the entire display area of the image display device 5 . As described above, the effect image for temporary stop notification is set to have a transmittance of 0%. The image makes the pseudo-continuous pattern invisible. Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbols, the effect image for the temporary stop notification is hidden, so that the player visually recognizes the pseudo-continuous symbols of a larger size than during the temporary stop notification effect. It becomes possible.

As described above, by displaying the central line as an image on the rear side of the ornamental pattern and the pseudo-continuous pattern, it is possible to improve the interest of the temporary-stop-indicating effect suggesting that the pseudo-continuous pattern will be temporarily stopped. Furthermore, when the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped, the effect image for notifying the temporary stop is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5, so that the player's discomfort at the time of the temporary stop can be reduced, and the temporary stop can be reduced. It is possible to emphasize what has been done, and to improve interest in the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbols.

Further, in the modified example 225SG-1, when the pseudo continuous symbols do not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, after hiding the concentration line, the image display device is restarted without temporarily stopping the pseudo continuous symbols. Although the mode of continuously moving downward and hiding is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the modified example 225SG-2 is shown in FIGS. As shown in H), when the pseudo-continuous symbols do not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary-stop suggesting effect, the pseudo-continuous symbols are continuously moved downward on the image display device without being temporarily stopped, and are not displayed. On the other hand, the concentration line may be displayed continuously for a predetermined period of time until the stop timing of the variable display even after the pseudo continuous pattern is hidden.

By doing so, as in the modification 225SG-1, by displaying the concentration line as an image on the rear side of the ornamental pattern and the pseudo-continuous symbol, the temporary stop suggestion suggesting that the pseudo-continuous symbol will be temporarily stopped. You can improve the interest of the production. In the case where the pseudo-continuous symbols are not temporarily stopped, the pseudo-continuous symbols are also displayed continuously for a predetermined period of time after the pseudo-continuous symbols are not displayed on the image display device 5 . It is possible to improve interest in whether or not to make a temporary stop. It should be noted that although not shown in particular, when the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the entire display area of the image display device 5 is temporarily stopped when the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped, as in the characteristic portion 225SG. By displaying the effect image for notifying the stop, it is possible to reduce the discomfort of the player at the time of the temporary stop.

Further, in the modification 225SG-2, during the temporary stop suggesting effect, decorative patterns and pseudo-continuous symbols are displayed with priority over concentration lines, and pseudo-continuous symbols are not temporarily stopped as a result of the temporary stop suggesting effect. , the image display device 5 has exemplified a mode in which the concentration line is continuously displayed for a predetermined period after the pseudo continuous pattern is hidden, but the present invention is not limited to this. As shown in FIGS. 42-8(A) to 42-8(H), as a modified example 225SG-3, during the temporary stop suggesting effect, the concentration line is displayed with priority over the decoration pattern and the pseudo continuous pattern, In the case where the pseudo consecutive symbols are not temporarily stopped as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, even if the concentration line is continuously displayed for a predetermined period after the pseudo consecutive symbols are hidden in the image display device 5, good.

By doing so, similar to the characterizing portion 225SG, by displaying the ornamental pattern and the pseudo-continuous pattern as an image on the rear side of the central line, a temporary stop suggestion effect suggesting that the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped. can improve the interest of In the case where the pseudo-continuous symbols are not temporarily stopped, the pseudo-continuous symbols are also displayed continuously for a predetermined period of time after the pseudo-continuous symbols are not displayed on the image display device 5 . It is possible to improve interest in whether or not to make a temporary stop. It should be noted that although not shown in particular, when the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the entire display area of the image display device 5 is temporarily stopped when the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped, as in the characteristic portion 225SG. By displaying the effect image for notifying the stop, it is possible to reduce the discomfort of the player at the time of the temporary stop.

Further, in the characteristic portion 225SG, when the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped, an effect image for notifying the temporary stop is displayed as an image with a transmittance of 0% on the image display device 5, and the stopped pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily visually recognized. Although the form in which it is impossible is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIGS. is temporarily stopped, the image display device 5 may display an effect image for temporary stop notification as an image having a lower transmittance (for example, 20%) than the concentration line.

In other words, as shown in FIG. 42-10, during the period in which the concentration line is displayed as the temporary stop suggestion effect (the period until the temporary stop timing of the pseudo continuous symbols), the transmittance of the concentration line is high (for example, , 50% described above) allows the player to easily visually recognize decorative symbols and pseudo-continuous symbols through the concentration line, while the effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed as a temporary stop notification effect ( In the period after the temporary stop timing of the pseudo continuous pattern), the transmittance is lower than that of the concentrated line (for example, 20% as described above), so that the player can see the decorative pattern and the pseudo pattern more than the period when the concentrated line is displayed. It may be difficult to visually recognize the continuous pattern.

By doing so, similar to the characterizing part 225SG, during the temporary stop suggesting effect, a concentrated line with a relatively high transmittance is displayed, thereby providing a temporary stop suggesting effect suggesting that the pseudo consecutive symbols will be temporarily stopped. can improve the interest of Then, when the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stop as the effect result of the temporary stop suggestion effect (when the temporary stop notification effect is executed), the image display device 5 By displaying the temporary stop notification effect image in the entire display area, it is possible to reduce the discomfort of the player at the time of the temporary stop, and the fact that the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped is displayed through the temporary stop notification effect image. Since it can be emphasized, it is possible to improve interest in temporarily stopping the pseudo-continuous symbols.

Further, in the characterizing part 225SG, a form in which the temporary stop suggesting effect and the temporary stop notification effect can be executed as effects related to the pseudo-continuous effect during the variable display has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. During the variable display, as an effect different from the temporary stop suggestion effect and the temporary stop notification effect, a notice effect suggesting that the result of the variable display will be a big hit (see FIG. 41-29 in the characteristic part 193SG) may be executed. . Note that these advance notice effects can be executed when the concentration line is displayed on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop suggestion effect. When is displayed, the execution of the notice effect may be restricted. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the result of the variable display will result in a big win by executing the notice effect, and the effect image for notifying the temporary stop is displayed on the image display device 5. By restricting execution of the advance notice effect, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the notice effect from being lowered by the effect image for notifying the temporary stop and the interest of the notice effect being lowered.

In addition, as a notice effect that can be executed during the variable display, as shown in FIG. As a result of the pseudo-continuous suggestive effect, a pseudo-continuous suggestive effect that suggests that the pseudo-continuous symbol will be temporarily stopped, and a variable display that is being executed at a predetermined position of the image display device 5 (for example, the central lower part of the image display device) An active display area 225SG005F is provided for displaying the reserved storage display corresponding to the active display as an active display, and by changing the display mode of the active display, an active display notice effect suggesting that the variable display result will be a big hit, and the active display An active display change notice effect suggesting that the display mode will change may be made executable.

In this way, when the pseudo-continuous suggestive effect is executed as the advance notice effect, for example, as shown in FIGS. is temporarily stopped, an image having a horizontal width dimension of L1 is displayed on the upper part of the image display device 5 as a pseudo continuous suggestion effect, and a temporary stop notification is given when the transmittance is 0% on the image display device 5. The effect image for notifying the temporary stop is displayed, and the effect image for notifying the temporary stop is hidden after a predetermined period of time has passed since the temporary stop. In other words, the display of the image as the pseudo-continuous suggestive effect is started at the timing of the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol, but the image as the pseudo-continuous suggestive effect becomes visible to the player only when the effect image for the temporary stop notification is displayed. It is from the hidden timing.

On the other hand, when executing the active display change notice effect as the notice effect, as shown in FIGS. The effect image for notifying temporary stop is displayed on the image display device 5 from the timing of the stop, and the image of the active display change notice effect (in this modification 225SG-5, the image is displayed from the right part of the image display device 5 to the active display area 225SG005F An image of an arrow flying toward it and having a left-right width dimension of L2 (L1>L2)) is displayed.

When the display mode of the active display changes as a result of the active display change notice effect, as shown in FIG. 42-11(F), when the display mode of the active display changes and the display mode of the active display does not change as a result of the effect of the active display change notice effect, as shown in FIG. It is sufficient that the arrow coming from the right side passes through the left side of the image display device 5 without sticking into the active display, and then becomes non-display.

As described above, in this modification 225SG-5, when the pseudo-continuous suggestion effect is executed as the advance notice effect, the image display device 5 displays the image as the pseudo-continuous suggestion effect and the effect image for notifying the temporary stop, While temporarily making the image as the pseudo continuous suggestion effect invisible to the player, when executing the active display change notice effect as the notice effect, the effect image for notifying the temporary stop is not displayed on the image display device 5. , By displaying an image (image of an arrow) that is shorter in display size than the image as the pseudo continuous suggestion effect as the image for the active display change notice effect, the active display change notice effect is blocked by the temporary stop notification effect image. It is possible to prevent it from becoming difficult to understand.

In this modification 225SG-5, when the pseudo-continuous suggestion effect is executed as the notice effect, the pseudo-continuous symbols are temporarily stopped as a result of the temporary stop notice effect. An image having a left-right width dimension of L1 is displayed as a continuous suggestion effect, and an effect image for temporary stop notification having a transmittance of 0% is displayed on the image display device 5 as an example. The invention is not limited to this, and when the pseudo-continuous suggestion effect is executed as the advance notice effect, the transmittance is not 0% together with the image as the pseudo-continuous suggestion effect on the upper part of the image display device 5 (for example, the transmittance is not 0%). 20% or 50%) effect image for temporary stop notification may be displayed.

(Description of characteristic portion 225SG in the embodiment of the present invention)
Next, the characterizing portion 225SG (hereinafter referred to as the main characterizing portion 225SG) in the embodiment of the present invention will be described. In addition, in this characterizing portion 225SG, the description of the portion having the same configuration as that of the pachinko game machine 1 of the characterizing portion described above is omitted.

First, the display control section 123 in the characteristic section 225SG will be described. The CGROM in the display control unit 123 stores a plurality of types of image data for displaying images on the image display device 5 . The display control unit 123 can cause the image display device 5 to display a predetermined image based on one image data stored in the CGROM based on an instruction from the effect control CPU 120, and can display a plurality of types of image data. By arranging and displaying an image on the image display device 5, it is possible to display a predetermined effect screen. When the predetermined image is not to be displayed on the image display device 5, depending on the situation, other image data may be placed in front of the image data of the predetermined image with a transmittance of 0%. In the case of controlling so as not to display the image based on the data on the performance screen, and by displaying the image on the image display device 5 which created the display data not arranging the image data of the prescribed image, the prescribed image is not displayed on the performance screen. may be controlled as follows.

As shown in Figures 42-1(A) to 42-1(C), Figures 42-2(A) to 42-2(C), Figures 42-3(A) to 42-3(C) In addition, for example, when an image is displayed on the image display device 5, the image is displayed on the image display device 5 based on display data created by arranging a plurality of image data including image data 1 to 4. Among them, FIG. 42-1 is the image data immediately before the pseudo-continuous symbols are temporarily stopped as the temporary-stop suggesting effect in the characteristic portion 225SG, and FIG. 42-2 is the image data when the pseudo-continuous symbols are temporarily stopped. FIG. 42-3 shows image data when the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop.

As shown in FIG. 42-2(A), the image data 1 is an effect image (temporary stop notification) for notifying that the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped in the entire display area of the image display device 5 as a temporary stop notification effect. This is the data drawn to display the effect image for

As shown in FIG. 42-1(A), the image data 2 moves from the outer peripheral edge of the image display device 5 to the central portion of the image display device 5 ("middle" decorative design display area 5C) as a temporary stop suggestion effect. This is the data drawn to display the saturated line toward .

As shown in FIGS. 42-1(B), 42-2(B), and 42-3(A), the image data 3 shows the pseudo consecutive symbols on the image display device 5 during execution of the temporary stop suggestion effect. This is the data drawn to display moving display from top to bottom. In addition, when the pseudo-continuous symbols are temporarily stopped, the temporarily-suspended pseudo-continuous symbols are larger in size than during the moving display (as shown in FIG. The width dimension is a and the vertical width dimension is b, but as shown in FIG. (y>b)). This data is drawn to display a variable display of normal decoration patterns (symbols "1" to "9" in this characterizing portion 225SG) from top to bottom.

As shown in FIG. 42-3(B), the image data 4 shows a pseudo continuous pattern downward from the central portion of the image display device 5 immediately after the temporary stop suggestion effect ends without the pseudo continuous symbols temporarily stopping. This data is drawn to display the moving display of consecutive symbols.

As shown in FIGS. 42-1 to 42-3, these image data 1 to 4 are set with display priorities for displaying images on the image display device 5. FIG. Image data 1 is set to have the highest display priority. The display priority of image data 2 is set lower than that of image data 1, and the display priority of image data 3 is set lower than that of image data 2. FIG. The lowest display priority is set for image data 4 (image display priority in image display device 5: image data 1>image data 2>image data 3>image data 4). That is, in the image display device 5, the image based on the image data 1 is displayed as the uppermost image, the image based on the image data 2 is displayed as the lower image than the image based on the image data 1, and the image based on the image data 3 is displayed. The image is displayed as a lower image than the image based on the image data 1 and the image based on the image data 2, and the image based on the image data 4 is displayed based on the image data 1, the image based on the image data 2, and the image data 3. It is designed to be displayed as an image in a lower layer than the image.

Therefore, when the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed, as shown in FIG. It is to be displayed with priority over moving display towards). Incidentally, since the concentration lines in the characteristic portion 225SG are set to have a high transmittance (for example, 50%), during execution of the temporary stop suggesting effect, the player can see decorative symbols and pseudo-continuous symbols through the concentration lines. It is visible.

Immediately after the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous pattern, as shown in FIGS. Based on the image (a pseudo-continuous pattern that has a larger size than during the moving display due to the temporary stop) is displayed with priority. It should be noted that the effect image for notifying temporary stop is not displayed when a predetermined period elapses before the start of the re-variable display.

It should be noted that the transmittance of the temporary stop notification effect image in the characteristic portion 225SG is set to 0%. That is, when the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped, as shown in FIGS. 42-2(C) and 42-2(D), the effect image for notifying the temporary stop is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5. As a result, the decorative symbols and the pseudo consecutive symbols become invisible to the player, but after a predetermined period of time has passed, the decorative symbols and the pseudo consecutive symbols become visible to the player.

As shown in FIG. 42-3(C), the image based on the image data 3 (variable display of a decoration pattern different from the pseudo consecutive symbols) is displayed immediately after the temporary stop suggestion effect is completed without the pseudo consecutive symbols being temporarily stopped. ) is displayed with priority over the image based on the image data 4 (moving display from the center of the image display device 5 of the pseudo-continuous pattern downward).

In particular, in this characteristic portion 225SG, during execution of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) displays the image data shown in FIG. The player is made to pay attention to whether or not the symbols are temporarily stopped.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123), in the variable display for executing the temporary stop suggestion effect, temporarily stops the pseudo continuous symbols regardless of whether or not the pseudo continuous symbols are temporarily stopped at the start timing of the variable display. The variable display is executed by setting image data to be stopped. Then, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) controls the image display device 5 at the display image data switching timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect in which the pseudo consecutive symbols are not temporarily stopped (see FIGS. The image data to be displayed in FIG. 42-3 is switched from the image data (FIGS. 42-1 and 42-2) in which the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped to the image data in which the pseudo-continuous pattern is not temporarily stopped as shown in FIG. 42-3.

Next, the display mode of the image display device 5 in the variable display that executes the temporary stop suggesting effect in the characteristic portion 225SG will be described with reference to FIG. 42-4.

First, as shown in FIGS. 42-4(A) to 42-4(C), when a certain period of time has passed since the start of the variable display, decorations are displayed in the "left" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L and 5C. The pattern stops (stops swinging) and becomes a reach. After that, as the first temporary stop suggesting effect, the pseudo consecutive symbols move downward in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. At this time, as shown in FIGS. 42-4(C) to 42-4(E), in the image display device 5, as the pseudo consecutive symbols are moved toward the center of the image display device 5, Then, the central line is moved and displayed toward the central portion of the image display device 5 .

Then, when the pseudo consecutive symbols do not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) switches the image data, so that as shown in FIG. 42-4(F), While the concentration line is hidden, the pseudo continuous pattern continues to move downward on the image display device without temporary stop and is hidden.

On the other hand, when the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped as a result of the temporary stop suggesting effect, the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped as shown in FIGS. 42-4(G) and 42-4(H). An effect image for notifying the temporary stop is displayed on the entire display area of the image display device 5 . As described above, the effect image for temporary stop notification is set to have a transmittance of 0%. The image makes the pseudo-continuous pattern invisible. Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbols, the effect image for the temporary stop notification is hidden, so that the player visually recognizes the pseudo-continuous symbols of a larger size than during the temporary stop notification effect. It becomes possible.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 225SG, the pseudo consecutive symbols are moved and displayed toward the center of the image display device 5 during the variable display of 1, and the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped. It is possible to execute a stop suggesting effect. Further, when the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped as a result of the temporary stop suggesting effect, the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped and an effect image for notifying the temporary stop is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5. If the temporarily stopped pseudo-continuous symbols are temporarily made invisible by the above, and if the pseudo-continuous symbols do not stop temporarily as a result of the temporary stop suggesting effect, the pseudo-continuous symbols are displayed as an image without displaying the effect image for notifying the temporary stop. Since the display is hidden after continuously moving toward the lower side of the display device 5, the player can see the success of the temporary stop suggesting effect (temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous pattern) and the failure of the effect (temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol). ) can be easily grasped, and the interest of the temporary stop suggestion effect can be improved.

In addition, during the temporary stop suggesting effect, a concentration line with high transmittance is displayed on the image display device 5, thereby making the player pay attention to whether or not the pseudo consecutive symbols being displayed in movement will be temporarily stopped. It can improve interest. Furthermore, when the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped, the image display device 5 displays an effect image for notifying the temporary stop with a transmittance of 0, thereby reducing the player's discomfort during the temporary stop. In addition, since it is possible to emphasize that the pseudo-continuous symbols have been temporarily stopped, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the temporary suspension of the pseudo-continuous symbols.

Further, when the pseudo-continuous symbols are temporarily stopped, the pseudo-continuous symbols at the time of the temporary stop are displayed in a size larger than that before the temporary stop (because the horizontal width dimension before the temporary stop is a and the vertical width dimension is b). On the other hand, the horizontal width dimension at the time of temporary stop is x (x>a), and the vertical width dimension is y (y>b)). A temporary stop can be emphasized more.

In addition, in the present characteristic portion 225SG, an example is shown in which the pseudo consecutive symbols are displayed in a size larger than before the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped from the timing when the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped, but the present invention is limited to this. The timing to display the size of the pseudo-pseudo continuous pattern larger than before the temporary stop is the timing immediately before the temporary stop, the timing after the temporary stop, such as the timing when the effect image for temporary stop notification is hidden. It can be timing.

Further, in the present characteristic portion 225SG, the temporary stop of the pseudo consecutive symbols is emphasized by displaying the pseudo consecutive symbols in a larger size than before the temporary stop of the pseudo consecutive symbols from the timing when the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, emphasizing that the pseudo continuous symbols are temporarily stopped by changing the shape or color of the pseudo continuous symbols from the timing at which the pseudo continuous symbols are temporarily stopped. You may

42-4(C) to 42-4(E), the characteristic portion 225SG displays concentration lines on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop suggesting effect, and also displays a temporary stop suggesting effect. By moving and displaying the concentration line toward the center of the image display device 5 according to the progress, the pseudo consecutive patterns are temporarily stopped by increasing the degree of emphasis on whether or not the pseudo consecutive patterns are temporarily stopped. It is possible to increase the expectation for the performance and improve the interest of the temporary stop suggestion production.

In this characteristic portion 225SG, by moving and displaying the concentration line toward the central portion of the image display device 5 according to the progress of the temporary stop suggesting effect, the degree of emphasis on whether or not the pseudo consecutive symbols will be temporarily stopped is increased. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible to change the color of the concentration lines or increase the number of lines to be displayed (increase the density of the concentration lines) according to the progress of the temporary stop suggestion effect. ), the degree of emphasis on whether or not the pseudo-continuous symbols are temporarily stopped may be increased.

Although the characteristic portion 225SG of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these, and any changes or additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. .

For example, as shown in FIG. 42-1, the characteristic portion 225SG draws concentrated lines as image data 2, and draws decorative patterns and pseudo-continuous patterns as image data 3. Although a mode in which concentrated lines are displayed with priority over decoration patterns and pseudo-continuous patterns has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and a modified example 225SG-1 is shown in FIGS. As shown in -5(C), by drawing a concentrated line as the image data 4, the image display device 5 displays decorative patterns and pseudo-continuous patterns with priority over concentrated lines (concentrated lines are displayed as decorative patterns and may be displayed as an image on the rear side of the pseudo consecutive symbol).

By doing so, as shown in FIGS. 42-6(A) to 42-6(H), during the temporary stop suggestion effect, the central line of the image display device 5 is drawn at the center of the image display device 5. By moving and displaying toward the part, it is possible to increase the degree of emphasizing whether or not the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped, and the concentration line makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize the decoration pattern and the pseudo-continuous pattern. can be prevented.

Incidentally, when the pseudo consecutive symbols do not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggesting effect, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) switches the image data so that as shown in FIG. 42-6(F), While the concentration line is hidden, the pseudo continuous pattern continues to move downward on the image display device without temporary stop and is hidden.

On the other hand, when the pseudo-continuous symbols temporarily stop as a result of the temporary-stop suggesting effect, the pseudo-continuous symbols temporarily stop as shown in FIGS. 42-6(G) and 42-6(H), An effect image for notifying the temporary stop is displayed on the entire display area of the image display device 5 . As described above, the effect image for temporary stop notification is set to have a transmittance of 0%. The image makes the pseudo-continuous pattern invisible. Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbols, the effect image for the temporary stop notification is hidden, so that the player visually recognizes the pseudo-continuous symbols of a larger size than during the temporary stop notification effect. It becomes possible.

As described above, by displaying the central line as an image on the rear side of the ornamental pattern and the pseudo-continuous pattern, it is possible to improve the interest of the temporary-stop-indicating effect suggesting that the pseudo-continuous pattern will be temporarily stopped. Furthermore, when the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped, the effect image for notifying the temporary stop is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5, so that the player's discomfort at the time of the temporary stop can be reduced, and the temporary stop can be reduced. It is possible to emphasize what has been done, and to improve interest in the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbols.

Further, in the modified example 225SG-1, when the pseudo continuous symbols do not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, after hiding the concentration line, the image display device is restarted without temporarily stopping the pseudo continuous symbols. Although the mode of continuously moving downward and hiding is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the modified example 225SG-2 is shown in FIGS. As shown in H), when the pseudo-continuous symbols do not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary-stop suggesting effect, the pseudo-continuous symbols are continuously moved downward on the image display device without being temporarily stopped, and are not displayed. On the other hand, the concentration line may be displayed continuously for a predetermined period of time until the stop timing of the variable display even after the pseudo continuous pattern is hidden.

By doing so, as in the modification 225SG-1, by displaying the concentration line as an image on the rear side of the ornamental pattern and the pseudo-continuous symbol, the temporary stop suggestion suggesting that the pseudo-continuous symbol will be temporarily stopped. You can improve the interest of the production. In the case where the pseudo-continuous symbols are not temporarily stopped, the pseudo-continuous symbols are also displayed continuously for a predetermined period of time after the pseudo-continuous symbols are not displayed on the image display device 5 . It is possible to improve interest in whether or not to make a temporary stop. It should be noted that although not shown in particular, when the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the entire display area of the image display device 5 is temporarily stopped when the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped, as in the characteristic portion 225SG. By displaying the effect image for notifying the stop, it is possible to reduce the discomfort of the player at the time of the temporary stop.

Further, in the modification 225SG-2, during the temporary stop suggesting effect, decorative patterns and pseudo-continuous symbols are displayed with priority over concentration lines, and pseudo-continuous symbols are not temporarily stopped as a result of the temporary stop suggesting effect. , the image display device 5 has exemplified a mode in which the concentration line is continuously displayed for a predetermined period after the pseudo continuous pattern is hidden, but the present invention is not limited to this. As shown in FIGS. 42-8(A) to 42-8(H), as a modified example 225SG-3, during the temporary stop suggesting effect, the concentration line is displayed with priority over the decoration pattern and the pseudo continuous pattern, In the case where the pseudo consecutive symbols are not temporarily stopped as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, even if the concentration line is continuously displayed for a predetermined period after the pseudo consecutive symbols are hidden in the image display device 5, good.

By doing so, similar to the characterizing portion 225SG, by displaying the ornamental pattern and the pseudo-continuous pattern as an image on the rear side of the central line, a temporary stop suggestion effect suggesting that the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped. can improve the interest of In the case where the pseudo-continuous symbols are not temporarily stopped, the pseudo-continuous symbols are also displayed continuously for a predetermined period of time after the pseudo-continuous symbols are not displayed on the image display device 5 . It is possible to improve interest in whether or not to make a temporary stop. It should be noted that although not shown in particular, when the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the entire display area of the image display device 5 is temporarily stopped when the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped, as in the characteristic portion 225SG. By displaying the effect image for notifying the stop, it is possible to reduce the discomfort of the player at the time of the temporary stop.

Further, in the characteristic portion 225SG, when the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped, an effect image for notifying the temporary stop is displayed as an image with a transmittance of 0% on the image display device 5, and the stopped pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily visually recognized. Although the form in which it is impossible is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIGS. is temporarily stopped, the image display device 5 may display an effect image for temporary stop notification as an image having a lower transmittance (for example, 20%) than the concentration line.

In other words, as shown in FIG. 42-10, during the period in which the concentration line is displayed as the temporary stop suggestion effect (the period until the temporary stop timing of the pseudo continuous symbols), the transmittance of the concentration line is high (for example, , 50% described above) allows the player to easily visually recognize decorative symbols and pseudo-continuous symbols through the concentration line, while the effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed as a temporary stop notification effect ( In the period after the temporary stop timing of the pseudo continuous pattern), the transmittance is lower than that of the concentrated line (for example, 20% as described above), so that the player can see the decorative pattern and the pseudo pattern more than the period when the concentrated line is displayed. It may be difficult to visually recognize the continuous pattern. It should be noted that although it is not shown in this modified example 225SG-4, if the pseudo continuous symbols do not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the image display device 5 will notify the temporary stop as in the other characteristic parts and the modified examples. Effect images for are not displayed.

By doing so, similar to the characterizing part 225SG, during the temporary stop suggesting effect, a concentrated line with a relatively high transmittance is displayed, thereby providing a temporary stop suggesting effect suggesting that the pseudo consecutive symbols will be temporarily stopped. can improve the interest of Then, when the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stop as the effect result of the temporary stop suggestion effect (when the temporary stop notification effect is executed), the image display device 5 By displaying the temporary stop notification effect image in the entire display area, it is possible to reduce the discomfort of the player at the time of the temporary stop, and the fact that the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped is displayed through the temporary stop notification effect image. Since it can be emphasized, it is possible to improve interest in temporarily stopping the pseudo-continuous symbols.

Further, in the characterizing part 225SG, a form in which the temporary stop suggesting effect and the temporary stop notification effect can be executed as effects related to the pseudo-continuous effect during the variable display has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. As a modified example 225SG-5, during the variable display, as a different effect from the temporary stop suggestion effect and the temporary stop notification effect, a notice effect suggesting that the variable display result will be a big hit (see FIG. 41-29 in the characteristic part 193SG) ) may be executable. Note that these advance notice effects can be executed when the concentration line is displayed on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop suggestion effect. When is displayed, the execution of the notice effect may be restricted. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the result of the variable display will result in a big win by executing the notice effect, and the effect image for notifying the temporary stop is displayed on the image display device 5. By restricting execution of the advance notice effect, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the notice effect from being lowered by the effect image for notifying the temporary stop and the interest of the notice effect being lowered.

In addition, as a notice effect that can be executed during the variable display, as shown in FIG. As a result of the pseudo-continuous suggestive effect, a pseudo-continuous suggestive effect that suggests that the pseudo-continuous symbol will be temporarily stopped, and a variable display that is being executed at a predetermined position of the image display device 5 (for example, the central lower part of the image display device) An active display area 225SG005F is provided for displaying the reserved storage display corresponding to the active display as an active display, and by changing the display mode of the active display, an active display notice effect suggesting that the variable display result will be a big hit, and the active display An active display change notice effect suggesting that the display mode will change may be made executable.

In this way, when the pseudo-continuous suggestive effect is executed as the advance notice effect, for example, as shown in FIGS. is temporarily stopped, an image having a horizontal width dimension of L1 is displayed on the upper part of the image display device 5 as a pseudo continuous suggestion effect, and a temporary stop notification is given when the transmittance is 0% on the image display device 5. The effect image for notifying the temporary stop is displayed, and the effect image for notifying the temporary stop is hidden after a predetermined period of time has passed since the temporary stop. In other words, the display of the image as the pseudo-continuous suggestive effect is started at the timing of the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol, but the image as the pseudo-continuous suggestive effect becomes visible to the player only when the effect image for the temporary stop notification is displayed. It is from the hidden timing.

On the other hand, when executing the active display change notice effect as the notice effect, as shown in FIGS. The effect image for notifying temporary stop is displayed on the image display device 5 from the timing of the stop, and the image of the active display change notice effect (in this modification 225SG-5, the image is displayed from the right part of the image display device 5 to the active display area 225SG005F An image of an arrow flying toward it and having a left-right width dimension of L2 (L1>L2)) is displayed.

When the display mode of the active display changes as a result of the active display change notice effect, as shown in FIG. 42-11(F), when the display mode of the active display changes and the display mode of the active display does not change as a result of the effect of the active display change notice effect, as shown in FIG. It is sufficient that the arrow coming from the right side passes through the left side of the image display device 5 without sticking into the active display, and then becomes non-display.

As described above, in this modification 225SG-5, when the pseudo-continuous suggestion effect is executed as the advance notice effect, the image display device 5 displays the image as the pseudo-continuous suggestion effect and the effect image for notifying the temporary stop, While temporarily making the image as the pseudo continuous suggestion effect invisible to the player, when executing the active display change notice effect as the notice effect, the effect image for notifying the temporary stop is not displayed on the image display device 5. , By displaying an image (image of an arrow) that is shorter in display size than the image as the pseudo continuous suggestion effect as the image for the active display change notice effect, the active display change notice effect is blocked by the temporary stop notification effect image. It is possible to prevent it from becoming difficult to understand.

In this modification 225SG-5, when the pseudo-continuous suggestion effect is executed as the notice effect, the pseudo-continuous symbols are temporarily stopped as a result of the temporary stop notice effect. An image having a left-right width dimension of L1 is displayed as a continuous suggestion effect, and an effect image for temporary stop notification having a transmittance of 0% is displayed on the image display device 5 as an example. The invention is not limited to this, and when the pseudo-continuous suggestion effect is executed as the advance notice effect, the transmittance is not 0% together with the image as the pseudo-continuous suggestion effect on the upper part of the image display device 5 (for example, the transmittance is not 0%). 20% or 50%) effect image for temporary stop notification may be displayed.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 193SG and the characteristic portion 225SG, one symbol among a plurality of decorative symbols or a symbol different from the decorative symbols is used as a symbol (a pseudo-continuous pattern) is temporarily stopped on the image display device 5, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example, by changing the display mode of the pending memory display at the end timing of the variable display. The variable display result corresponding to the reserved memory display can execute the reserved memory display change performance suggesting that the variable display result will be a big hit, and as one of a plurality of decorative patterns or as a pattern different from the decorative pattern. A case may be provided in which the pattern indicating that the reserved memory display changes (the reserved memory display change notification pattern) stops on the image display device 5 . In this way, when the pending memory display change notification pattern is stopped on the image display device 5, the provisional stop suggestion in the characteristic portion 193SG or the characteristic portion 225SG is targeted for whether or not the reserved memory display change notification pattern is stopped. An effect corresponding to the effect (suggestion effect in the present invention) may be made executable.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 193SG and the characteristic portion 225SG, one symbol among a plurality of decorative symbols or a symbol different from the decorative symbols is used as a symbol (a pseudo-continuous pattern) is temporarily stopped on the image display device 5, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is possible to suggest the ratio of the variable display result during execution to be a big hit according to the background image, and the background image changes as one of a plurality of decorative patterns or as a pattern different from the decorative pattern. A case may be provided in which the pattern (background image change notification pattern) indicating that the game is to be stopped on the image display device 5 . When the background image change notification pattern is stopped on the image display device 5 as described above, the temporary stop suggestion effect in the characteristic portion 193SG or the characteristic portion 225SG is performed based on whether or not the background image change notification pattern is stopped. A corresponding effect (suggestive effect in the present invention) may be made executable.

Further, in the characterizing portion 193SG, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is illustrated as a gaming machine that performs a predetermined game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the gaming machine that performs a predetermined game is at least a predetermined game. In addition to the pachinko game machine 1, a slot machine or a general game machine may be used as long as it performs

In addition, in the present specification, a plurality of characteristic portions and modifications have been exemplified as the form of the gaming machine of the present invention. Alternatively, only one feature or variation may be implemented.

For example, in the characteristic portion 193SG and the characteristic portion 225SG, one symbol among a plurality of decorative symbols or a symbol different from the decorative symbol is used as a symbol (a pseudo-continuous pattern) is temporarily stopped on the image display device 5, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is changed by a combination of decorative patterns (stopped pattern). An effect (suggestive effect in the present invention) equivalent to the temporary stop suggestive effect in the characterizing portion 193SG and the characterizing portion 225SG is executed for the stop of the symbol that suggests that the suggestion is possible and that a specific set value is set. It may be possible.

1 Pachinko game machine 2 Game board 3 Game machine frame 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 11 Main board 12 Effect control board 103 CPU
120 Production control CPU
200 dispensing device 202 first guiding passage forming portion 201 ball tank forming portion 203 first passage forming body 210 terminal substrate 220 cover bodies 271A to 271H holes 314, 324, 334 cover portion 340 ball stop members N1 to 6, 11 to 16 Screw member

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that performs variable display to display a display result and is controllable to an advantageous state for a player,
a starting region;
display means;
a specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect of performing a re-variable display after executing a predetermined effect after starting the variable display;
a notification effect executing means capable of executing a notification effect for notifying that the specific effect has been executed;
a suggestive effect executing means capable of executing a suggestive effect suggesting that the specific effect will be executed;
a storage section capable of storing game media;
a payout unit capable of paying out game media;
a guide passage forming portion having an open upper surface and forming a guide passage for guiding the game media in the storage portion to the payout portion;
a prevention member that prevents the game medium from flowing down the guide passage forming portion;
a screw drop limiter provided so as to partially cover the upper surface of the guide passage forming portion;
with
A game can be played using the game medium paid out from the payout unit, and the specific effect can be executed based on the game medium entering the start area,
The guiding passage forming portion is composed of a first guiding passage forming portion and a second guiding passage forming portion different from the first guiding passage forming portion,
The prevention member can prevent the game medium from flowing down by entering the first guide passage forming portion,
The notification effect is an effect for displaying a notification image on the display means for notifying that the specific effect has been executed,
The suggesting effect executing means displays a specific image suggesting that the specific effect is to be executed on the display means, and changes the display mode of the specific image to thereby reduce the visibility of the specific effect. It is possible to perform the production,
The screw drop-limiting portion prevents game media that have fallen on the screw drop-limiting portion from accumulating and the screw member that has dropped on the screw drop-limiting portion to fall to the guide passage forming portion. It is configured to be able to stay on the restriction part,
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images